JP2008302149A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

<P>PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To exhibit desired image processing performance without increasing the number of memories to be used in a control means for image processing. <P>SOLUTION: The game machine has a first special symbol display and a second special symbol display which start variable display of special symbols based on the establishment of a condition for executing the variable display, and extract and display the display results. The game machine comprises a CGROM for storing a plurality of image data including image data of identification information, and a drawing processor for displaying an image in an image display device based on the image data stored in the CGROM according to a command of a presentation controlling microcomputer. The drawing processor reads the image data from the CGROM while the bus width of the data bus is set at a prescribed bus width, changes the bus width to a specific bus width when a prescribed condition is established and reads the image data from the CGROM. <P>COPYRIGHT: (C)2009,JPO&INPIT

Description

  The present invention includes a variable display device that variably displays a plurality of types of identification information that can be identified based on the fact that the variable display start condition is satisfied after the start condition is satisfied, and the variable information display result of the identification information is The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine that is controlled to a specific gaming state advantageous to the player after a predetermined specific display result is obtained.

  As a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a variable display is performed by updating and displaying predetermined identification information (for example, a symbol) on an image display device such as a liquid crystal display (LCD), and a stop symbol (display) There is a game that enhances the game interest by executing a so-called variable display game that informs whether or not to give a predetermined game value depending on the result.

  The variable display game is a game in which when the “big hit” occurs, the stop symbol form when the symbol update display is completely stopped is changed to a specific display form. When it is a “hit”, it is very easy to win a game ball in the big prize opening by opening a special electric accessory called a big prize opening. Then, the player is provided with a state in which the winning of the game ball is extremely easy for a certain period of time.

  Hereinafter, a state in which the prize winning opening is in an open state and the winning of a game ball is extremely easy is referred to as a specific game state. When entering the specific gaming state, for example, the stop symbol pattern of the display symbol displayed on the image display device becomes a predetermined specific display mode (generally, the stop symbols are aligned in the same symbol).

  In the variable display game, the player pays attention to whether or not the mode of the stop symbol becomes the specific display mode and becomes a “hit”. For this reason, various effects are displayed to enhance the game entertainment, such as changing the variation of the symbols, until the symbol is finalized (final stop) so that it can be determined whether or not it will be a “big hit”. Is called.

  As such an effect, for example, in the image display device, a symbol other than the symbol that becomes the final stop symbol (for example, the middle symbol of the left and right middle symbols) continues for a predetermined time and matches a specific display result. Before the final result is displayed, such as when it is stopped, swinging, enlarged or reduced or deformed, or when multiple symbols change synchronously with the same symbol, or the position of the displayed symbol is switched. There is a reach effect performed in a state where the possibility of occurrence of big hits is continuing (hereinafter, these states are referred to as reach states). Further, the reach state and its state are referred to as a reach mode. Furthermore, variable display including reach production is called reach variable display.

  Usually, a drawing processor for drawing (for image processing) is mounted on a control board for controlling the image display device. Further, the control board is provided with a ROM for storing various image data, and a frame memory that is a RAM for developing an image displayed on the image display device. The drawing processor reads predetermined image data stored in the ROM based on an instruction from the host CPU that performs display control, and expands the read image data in a predetermined area of the frame memory. Then, an image is displayed on the image display device based on the image data read from the frame memory. Note that when the image data stored in the ROM is compressed, the drawing processor performs a process of expanding the image data read from the ROM. Such a drawing processor is generally provided with a function to draw (synthesize) a still image or a moving image (hereinafter also referred to as a movie image).

  As described above, the drawing processor reads image data from the ROM and writes or reads image data to the RAM. In general, data transfer between the drawing processor and the ROM and RAM is performed via a data bus.

  In order to improve the image processing performance of the drawing processor, it is conceivable to increase the bus width of the data bus. When the bus width of the data bus is wide (for example, 64 bits), the data transfer speed between the rendering processor and the ROM and RAM is substantially smaller than when the bus width is narrow (for example, 16 bits or 32 bits). This is because the image processing speed is increased. In addition, there is a gaming machine in which when a plurality of RAMs are provided, the image processing performance is improved by configuring the bus between the drawing processor and the RAM so as to be switchable (see, for example, Patent Document 1). .)

Japanese Patent Publication No. 2006-75457 (paragraphs 0038-0040)

  However, when the bus width of the data bus is wide, a ROM or RAM that matches the bus width must be used. For example, when the bus width of the data bus is 64 bits, it is necessary to use a ROM or RAM capable of inputting / outputting 64 bits of data or two ROMs or RAMs capable of inputting / outputting 32 bits of data. In general, ROMs and RAMs capable of inputting and outputting 64-bit data are more expensive than ROMs and RAMs capable of inputting and outputting 32-bit data, and the manufacturing cost of gaming machines is increased. In addition, when two ROMs and RAMs are used, the manufacturing cost of the gaming machine is naturally higher than when one ROM and RAM are used.

  The disadvantage that the manufacturing cost of the gaming machine becomes high is particularly remarkable when the capacity of the ROM or RAM may be small. For example, unless it is specially manufactured, generally only ROM or RAM having a fixed capacity such as 64 kbytes or 256 kbytes can be obtained. Then, even when it is sufficient to use a small capacity ROM or RAM, it may be necessary to use a large capacity ROM or RAM. In that case, when it is necessary to use a ROM or RAM capable of inputting / outputting 64-bit data, or using two ROMs or RAM capable of inputting / outputting 32-bit data, the manufacturing cost is further increased. Become.

  Therefore, an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can exhibit desired image processing performance without increasing the number of memories used in the control means for image processing.

  The gaming machine according to the present invention has identification information (for example, based on the fact that a predetermined variable display execution condition is established (for example, a game ball wins a first start winning opening 13 or a second starting winning opening 14). , The first variable display device (for example, the first special symbol display device 8a) and the second variable display device (for example, the first special symbol or the second special symbol) are started and the display result is derived and displayed. A special game state that is advantageous to the player when a specific display result (for example, a jackpot symbol) is derived and displayed on either the first variable display device or the second variable display device. (E.g., a big hit gaming state), as a production component, for variable display of identification information on the first variable display device and variable display of identification information on the second variable display device Correspondingly, an image display device (for example, image display device 9) that executes variable display of a plurality of types of effect identification information (for example, decorative symbols), and an effect including variable display of effect identification information in the image display device. Production control means (for example, production control microcomputer 100) for controlling display, image data storage means (eg, CGROM 83) for storing a plurality of image data including image data of a plurality of types of production identification information, data The image data stored in the image data storage means is connected to the image data storage means via a bus (for example, a CG bus) so as to be readable, and is stored in the image data storage means in response to a command from the effect control means. Image processing means (for example, a drawing processor 109) that performs processing for displaying an image on the image display device based on the existing image data. The image processing means reads the image data from the image data storage means in a state where the bus width of the data bus is set to a predetermined bus width (for example, 64 bits), and when a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, moving image When reading the image data, the bus width of the data bus is changed to a specific bus width (for example, 32 bits) different from the predetermined bus width, and the image data is read from the image data storage means (for example, the process of step S963) The upper 32 bits of the CG bus are invalidated when “1” is set in the data bus mode register.

  The gaming machine includes game control means (for example, a game control microcomputer 560) that controls the progress of the game and controls the variable display of the first variable display device and the second variable display device. 1st counting means (for example, a part for executing steps S213 and S1509 in the game control microcomputer 560) for counting the number of fulfilled execution conditions (for example, the first reserved memory number) of the variable display in one variable display device; Second counting means (for example, a part for executing steps S223 and S1509 in the game control microcomputer 560) that counts the number of fulfilled execution conditions (for example, the second reserved memory number) of the variable display in the second variable display device; In the first variable display device, at least on the condition that the variable display of the identification information is not executed in the second variable display device Variable display execution means (for example, variable display execution of identification information on the second variable display device on condition that variable display of identification information is not executed at least on the first variable display device) When the variable display executing means derives and displays the display result on the first variable display device, the game control microcomputer 560 includes steps S1501 to S1508, S334 to S337, S351 to S353, and S1301. Alternatively, when the number of establishments counted by the first counting means is 1 or more and the number of establishments counted by the second counting means is 1 or more when the display result is derived and displayed on the second variable display device, Which of the variable display of identification information in the first variable display device and the variable display of identification information in the second variable display device Priority is given to variable display of the identification information (for example, the game control microcomputer 560 executes step S1506 on condition that it is determined to be N in step S1504 when it is determined to be N in step S1503). The first special symbol variation display is executed with priority.When it is determined as Y in step S1503, step S1507 is performed on the condition that it is determined as N in step S1505, and the second special symbol variation is performed. The display may be executed with priority).

  The game control means performs first counting means (for example, steps S213 and S1509 in the game control microcomputer 560) that counts the number of established variable display execution conditions (for example, the first reserved memory number) in the first variable display device. And a second counting means (for example, steps S223 and S1509 in the game control microcomputer 560) for counting the number of established execution conditions (for example, the second reserved memory number) in the second variable display device. And variable display time determination means for determining the variable display time of the identification information in the first variable display device and the second variable display device (for example, steps S331 to S333 in the game control microcomputer 560 are executed) The variable display time determining means is counted by the first counting means. When the total number corresponding to the sum of the established number and the established number counted by the second counting means (for example, the total pending storage number) is a predetermined number or more (for example, two or more or three or more), the total number is The variable display time is shortened compared to when the number is less than the predetermined number (for example, the gaming control microcomputer 560 determines that the total number of reserved memories is 3, when the gaming state is the normal state in the processing of steps S331 to S333 If the number is 4, the shortened variation pattern of the non-reach PA1-2 is determined, and if the total reserved memory number is 5 to 8, the shortened variation pattern of the non-reach PA1-3 is determined. If the total number of reserved memories is 2 to 8, the shortened variation pattern of the non-reach PB1-2 is determined. PC1 Determining a second shorter variation pattern) may be configured so.

  The game control means performs first counting means (for example, steps S213 and S1509 in the game control microcomputer 560) that counts the number of established variable display execution conditions (for example, the first reserved memory number) in the first variable display device. And a second counting means (for example, steps S223 and S1509 in the game control microcomputer 560) for counting the number of established execution conditions (for example, the second reserved memory number) in the second variable display device. And a pre-determining means for determining whether the display result derived and displayed on the first variable display device and the second variable display device is the specific display result before the display result is derived (for example, The part for executing step S1513 in the game control microcomputer 560) and the predetermination means When it is determined not to be the display result, reach effect determining means for determining whether or not to execute the reach effect in the variable display of the effect identification information on the image display device (for example, step S327 in the game control microcomputer 560). , S328), and the reach production determining means includes the total number of established counts counted by the first counting means and the established counts counted by the second counting means (for example, total pending storage count). When there is a large amount, it is determined that the reach effect is executed at a smaller rate than when the total number of the established number counted by the first counting means and the established number counted by the second counting means is small (for example, When the gaming state is the normal state in steps S327 and S328, the gaming control microcomputer 560 is changed to FIG. 16), the reach determination value is determined to be executed with a probability of 14.6% when the total reserved memory number is 0, as shown in FIG. When the number is one, it is decided to execute the reach effect with a smaller probability of 9.2%, and when the total number of reserved memories is two, it is determined to execute the reach effect with an even smaller probability of 7.9%, It may be configured to determine that the reach effect is executed with a smaller probability of 3.8% when the total number of reserved storage is 3 or more).

  The image data storage means stores image data including moving image data in a compressed state (for example, the CGROM 83 stores super reach moving image data and customer waiting demonstration moving image data shown in FIG. 66) and image processing. The means determines that a predetermined condition is satisfied when moving image data is read from the image data storage means (for example, a portion determined as Y in step S962 in the rendering processor 109), and sets the bus width of the data bus to the predetermined bus The moving image data is read from the image data storage means by changing the width (for example, 64 bits) to a specific bus width (for example, 32 bits) (for example, a part for executing step S963 in the rendering processor 109). It may be.

  According to the first aspect of the present invention, the image processing means reads the image data from the image data storage means in a state where the bus width of the data bus is set to a predetermined bus width, and when the predetermined condition is satisfied, Since the bus width is changed to a specific bus width different from a predetermined bus width and the image data is read from the image data storage means, the image data is read from the image data storage means by switching the bus width. The cost for the image data storage means can be reduced. Further, it is configured to have a first variable display device and a second variable display device for starting the variable display of the identification information based on the establishment of a predetermined variable display execution condition and deriving and displaying the display result. Therefore, by making it possible to variably display a plurality of pieces of identification information, it is possible to provide more playability.

  In the second aspect of the invention, the variable display executing means is counted by the first counting means when the display result is derived and displayed on the first variable display device or when the display result is derived and displayed on the second variable display device. If the established number is 1 or more and the established number counted by the second counting means is 1 or more, the variable display of the identification information on the first variable display means or the variable display of the identification information on the second variable display means Since the variable display of any one of the identification information is preferentially executed, the first variable display device can easily satisfy the condition for executing the variable display of the identification information in the first variable display device. In the second variable display device, the variable display of the identification information in the second variable display device can be executed with priority, and the second condition is displayed when the execution condition for the variable display of the identification information is easily satisfied. Varying display variable display of the identification information can be executed with priority in can be digested number establishment of the execution conditions of the variable display efficiently. For this reason, it is possible to reduce the situation where the execution of the variable display execution condition is invalid, and to improve the operation rate of the variable display.

  According to a third aspect of the present invention, when the variable display time determining means has a total number corresponding to the sum of the number of establishments counted by the first counting means and the number of establishments counted by the second counting means being a predetermined number or more. Since the variable display time is shortened compared to when the total number is less than the predetermined number, either the first variable display device or the second variable display device is selected when the total number is equal to or greater than the predetermined value. It is possible to prevent a situation in which the shortening variation is performed in the first variable display device and the shortening variation is not performed in the other variable display device. For this reason, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable and to reduce the situation where the execution of the variable display execution condition is invalid. Therefore, the operating rate of variable display can be improved.

  In the invention according to claim 4, whether or not the game control means executes the reach effect in the variable display of the effect identification information in the image display device when it is determined not to be the specific display result by the predetermining means. The reach effect determining means includes a reach effect determining means for determining, and the reach effect determining means counts by the first counting means when the total number of the established counts counted by the first counting means and the established counts counted by the second counting means is large. Since it is determined that the reach effect is executed at a small rate compared with the case where the total number of the established number counted and the number counted by the second counting means is small, the number of established counts counted by the first counting means When the total number with the number of formations counted by the second counting means is large, it is possible to reduce the frequency of executing the reach effect during the variation display of the identification information. Therefore, in a gaming machine provided with the first variable display device and the second variable display device, the operating rate of variable display can be improved and the processing burden on the game control means can be reduced.

  According to the fifth aspect of the present invention, the image processing means determines that the predetermined condition is satisfied when the moving image data is read from the image data storage means, and the bus width of the data bus is changed from the predetermined bus width to the specific bus width. Since the moving image data is read from the image data storage means, the bus width can be switched to the optimum when reading the moving image data from the image data storage means. The processing efficiency of processing can be improved.

Embodiment 1 FIG.
DESCRIPTION OF EXEMPLARY EMBODIMENTS Hereinafter, a first embodiment of the invention will be described with reference to the drawings. First, the overall configuration of a pachinko gaming machine 1 that is an example of a gaming machine will be described. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1 as seen from the front.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 includes an outer frame (not shown) formed in a vertically long rectangular shape and a game frame attached to the inside of the outer frame so as to be openable and closable. Further, the pachinko gaming machine 1 has a glass door frame 2 formed in a frame shape that is provided in the game frame so as to be opened and closed. The game frame includes a front frame (not shown) that can be opened and closed with respect to the outer frame, a mechanism plate (not shown) to which mechanism parts and the like are attached, and various parts (games to be described later) attached to them. A structure including the board 6).

  On the lower surface of the glass door frame 2 is a hitting ball supply tray (upper plate) 3. Under the hitting ball supply tray 3, there are provided an extra ball receiving tray 4 for storing game balls that cannot be accommodated in the hitting ball supply tray 3 and a hitting operation handle (operation knob) 5 for firing the hitting ball. A game board 6 is detachably attached to the back surface of the glass door frame 2. The game board 6 is a structure including a plate-like body constituting the game board 6 and various components attached to the plate-like body. In addition, a game area 7 is formed on the front surface of the game board 6 in which a game ball that has been struck can flow down.

  Near the center of the game area 7, an image display device 9 composed of a liquid crystal display device (LCD) is provided. In the image display device 9, variable display (variation) of effect symbols (decorative symbols) synchronized with variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is performed. Therefore, the image display device 9 corresponds to a variable display device that performs variable display of effect symbols (decorative symbols) as identification information. The image display device 9 is controlled by an effect control microcomputer mounted on the effect control board. When the first special symbol display 8a is executing variable display of the first special symbol, the effect control microcomputer causes the image display device 9 to execute the effect display along with the variable display, and the second special symbol display 8a executes the second special display. When the variable display of the second special symbol is executed on the symbol display 8b, the effect display is executed on the image display device in accordance with the variable display, so that it is possible to easily grasp the progress of the game.

  In addition to the image display device 9, the first decorative symbol display that performs variable display of the first decorative symbol corresponding to the first special symbol during the variable display time of the first special symbol by the first special symbol indicator 8a. And a second decorative symbol display 9b for performing variable display of the second decorative symbol corresponding to the second special symbol during the variable display time of the second special symbol by the second special symbol indicator 8b. It may be. In this case, the first decorative symbol display unit 9a and the second decorative symbol display unit 9b are controlled by the effect control microcomputer 100, and are constituted by, for example, two LEDs or seven-segment LEDs.

  On the left side of the upper part of the image display device 9 in the game board 6, a first special symbol display (first variable display means) 8a for variably displaying the first special symbol as identification information is provided. In this embodiment, the first special symbol display 8a is realized by a simple and small display (for example, 7 segment LED) capable of variably displaying numbers 0 to 9. In other words, the first special symbol display 8a is configured to variably display numbers (or symbols) from 0 to 9. On the right side of the upper part of the image display device 9 in the game board 6, a second special symbol display (second variable display means) 8b for variably displaying the second special symbol as identification information is provided. The second special symbol display 8b is realized by a simple and small display (for example, 7 segment LED) capable of variably displaying numbers 0 to 9. That is, the second special symbol display 8b is configured to variably display numbers (or symbols) from 0 to 9.

  In this embodiment, the type of the first special symbol and the type of the second special symbol are the same (for example, both 0 to 9), but the types may be different. Further, the first special symbol display 8a and the second special symbol display 8b may be configured to variably display numbers (or two-digit symbols) of, for example, 00 to 99, for example.

  Hereinafter, the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be collectively referred to as a special symbol, and the first special symbol indicator 8a and the second special symbol indicator 8b may be collectively referred to as a special symbol indicator.

  For the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the first start condition or the second start condition, which is the variable display execution condition, is satisfied (for example, the game ball has the first start winning opening 13 or the second start winning opening) 14), a variable display start condition (for example, when the number of reserved memories is not 0 and the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is not executed) When the variable display time (fluctuation time) elapses, a display result (stop symbol) is derived and displayed. Note that winning means that a game ball has entered a predetermined area such as a winning opening. Deriving and displaying the display result is to finally stop and display a symbol (an example of identification information). In this embodiment, the variable display start condition is established by prioritizing the winning to the second starting winning port 14 out of the winning to the first starting winning port 13 and the winning to the second starting winning port 14. . That is, if the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is not executed, and if the big hit game is not executed, even if the first reserved memory number is not 0, the second The variable display of the second special symbol is continuously executed until the number of reserved memories becomes zero. It should be noted that the variable display start condition may be established in the order in which the start winnings are generated regardless of the winning at the first starting winning port 13 and the winning at the second starting winning port 14.

  The image display device 9 is for decoration (production) during the variable display time of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 8a and during the variable display time of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display 8b. The display design (decorative design) is variably displayed. The variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 8a and the variable display of the effect symbol on the image display device 9 are synchronized. Further, the variable display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display 8b and the variable display of the effect symbol on the image display device 9 are synchronized. Synchronous means that the start time and end time of variable display are substantially the same (may be exactly the same) and the variable display period is substantially the same (may be exactly the same). In addition, when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a and when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display 8b, an effect symbol that reminds the jackpot on the image display device 9 The combination of is stopped and displayed.

  A winning device having a first start winning opening 13 is provided below the image display device 9. The game ball won in the first start winning opening 13 is guided to the back of the game board 6 and detected by the first start opening switch 13a.

  A variable winning ball device 15 having a second starting winning port 14 through which a game ball can be won is provided below a winning device having a first starting winning port (first starting port) 13. The game ball that has won the second start winning opening (second start opening) 14 is guided to the back of the game board 6 and detected by the second start opening switch 14a. The variable winning ball device 15 is opened by a solenoid 16. When the variable winning ball device 15 is in the open state, the game ball can be awarded to the second starting winning port 14 (it is easier to start winning), which is advantageous for the player. In the state where the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is in the open state, it is easier for the game ball to win the second start winning opening 14 than the first starting winning opening 13. In addition, in a state where the variable winning ball device 15 is in the closed state, the game ball does not win the second start winning opening 14. In the state where the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is in the closed state, it may be configured that the winning is possible (that is, it is difficult for the gaming ball to win) although it is difficult to win a prize.

  Hereinafter, the first start winning opening 13 and the second start winning opening 14 may be collectively referred to as a start winning opening or a starting opening.

  When the variable winning ball device 15 is controlled to be in the open state, the game ball heading for the variable winning ball device 15 is very likely to win the second start winning port 14. The first start winning opening 13 is provided immediately below the image display device 9, but the interval between the lower end of the image display device 9 and the first starting winning opening 13 is further reduced, or the first start winning opening is set. The nail arrangement around the first start winning opening 13 is made difficult to guide the game balls to the first starting winning opening 13 so that the winning rate of the second starting winning opening 14 is increased. It is also possible to make the direction higher than the winning rate of the first start winning opening 13.

  Below the first special symbol display 8a, the number of valid winning balls that have entered the first start winning opening 13, that is, the first reserved memory number (the reserved memory is also referred to as the start memory or the start prize memory) is displayed 4. There is provided a first special symbol storage memory indicator 18a composed of two indicators (for example, LEDs). The first special symbol storage memory indicator 18a increases the number of indicators to be lit by 1 each time there is an effective start winning. Then, each time the variable display on the first special symbol display 8a is started, the number of indicators to be turned on is reduced by one.

  Below the second special symbol display 8b is a second special symbol hold comprising four indicators (for example, LEDs) for displaying the number of effective winning balls that have entered the second start winning opening 14, that is, the second reserved memory number. A storage indicator 18b is provided. The second special symbol storage memory display 18b increases the number of indicators to be lit by 1 every time there is an effective start winning. Then, each time the variable display on the second special symbol display 8b is started, the number of indicators to be turned on is reduced by one.

  Further, the display screen of the image display device 9 displays an area (hereinafter referred to as a total reserved storage display unit 18c) that displays a total number (total reserved storage number) that is the sum of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number. .) Is provided. Since the total pending storage display unit 18c for displaying the total number is provided, it is possible to easily grasp the total number of execution conditions that are not satisfied with the variable display start condition. Since the total reserved memory display unit 18c is provided, the first special symbol reserved memory display 18a and the second special symbol reserved memory display 18b may not be provided.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 1, the variable winning ball apparatus 15 that opens and closes only the second start winning opening 14 is provided. Any of the start winning ports 14 may be provided with a variable winning ball device that performs an opening / closing operation.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 1, a special variable winning ball device 20 is provided below the variable winning ball device 15. The special variable winning ball apparatus 20 includes an opening / closing plate, and when the specific display result (big hit symbol) is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a, and the specific display result (big hit symbol) on the second special symbol display 8b. When the open / close plate is controlled to be open by the solenoid 21 in the specific game state (big hit game state) that occurs when the symbol is derived and displayed, the big winning opening serving as the winning area is opened. The game ball that has won the big winning opening is detected by the count switch 23.

  A normal symbol display 10 is provided at the lower right side of the game board 6. The normal symbol display 10 variably displays a plurality of types of identification information (for example, “◯” and “x”) called normal symbols.

  When the game ball passes through the gate 32 and is detected by the gate switch 32a, the variable display of the normal symbol display 10 is started. In this embodiment, variable display is performed by alternately lighting the upper and lower lamps (the symbols can be visually recognized when turned on). For example, if the lower lamp is turned on at the end of the variable display, it is a hit. . When the stop symbol on the normal symbol display 10 is a predetermined symbol (winning symbol), the variable winning ball device 15 is opened for a predetermined number of times. In other words, the state of the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is a state that is advantageous from a disadvantageous state for the player when the normal symbol is a stop symbol (a state in which a game ball can be awarded at the second start winning port 14). To change. In the vicinity of the normal symbol display 10, a normal symbol holding storage display 41 having four indicators (for example, LEDs) for displaying the number of winning balls that have passed through the gate 32 is provided. Each time there is a game ball passing through the gate 32, that is, every time a game ball is detected by the gate switch 32a, the normal symbol storage memory display 41 increases the number of indicators that are turned on by one. Then, each time the variable display on the normal symbol display 10 is started, the number of indicators that are lit is reduced by one. Further, in the probability variation state where the probability of being determined to be a big hit as compared to the normal state is high, the probability that the stop symbol in the normal symbol display 10 becomes a winning symbol is increased, and the variable winning ball apparatus 15 The opening time becomes longer and the number of opening times is increased. Further, in this embodiment, even in the short time state (the game state in which the special symbol variable display time is shortened), the opening time of the variable winning ball device 15 is lengthened or the number of times of opening is increased.

  On the left and right sides of the game area 7 of the game board 6, there are provided decorative LEDs 25 that are displayed blinking during the game, and at the lower part there is an outlet 26 for taking in a hit ball that has not won. In addition, two speakers 27R and 27L that utter sound effects and sounds as predetermined sound outputs are provided on the left and right upper portions outside the game area 7. A top frame LED 28a, a left frame LED 28b, and a right frame LED 28c provided on the front frame are provided on the outer periphery upper portion, the outer periphery left portion, and the outer periphery right portion of the game area 7. Also, a prize ball LED 51 that is turned on when there is a remaining number of prize balls is provided in the vicinity of the left frame LED 28b, and a ball cut LED 52 that is turned on when the supply ball is cut is provided in the vicinity of the right frame LED 28c. . The top frame LED 28a, the left frame LED 28b, the right frame LED 28c, and the decoration LED 25 are examples of effects light emitters provided in the pachinko gaming machine 1. In addition to the above-described various LEDs for production (decoration), LEDs and lamps for production are installed.

  In the gaming machine, a ball hitting device (not shown) that drives a driving motor in response to the player operating the hitting operation handle 5 and uses the rotational force of the driving motor to launch the gaming ball into the game area 7. ) Is provided. A game ball launched from the ball striking device enters the game area 7 through a ball striking rail formed in a circular shape so as to surround the game area 7, and then descends the game area 7. When the game ball enters the first start winning opening 13 and is detected by the first start opening switch 13a, if the variable display of the first special symbol can be started (for example, the variable display of the special symbol ends, 1), the first special symbol display 8a starts variable display (variation) of the first special symbol, and the image display device 9 starts variable display of the effect symbol (decorative symbol). Is done. That is, the variable display of the first special symbol and the effect symbol corresponds to winning in the first start winning opening 13. If the variable display of the first special symbol cannot be started, the first reserved memory number is increased by 1 on the condition that the first reserved memory number has not reached the upper limit value.

  When the game ball enters the second start winning port 14 and is detected by the second start port switch 14a, if the variable display of the second special symbol can be started (for example, the special symbol variable display ends, 2), the second special symbol display 8b starts variable display (variation) of the second special symbol, and the image display device 9 starts variable display of the effect symbol (decorative symbol). Is done. That is, the variable display of the second special symbol and the effect symbol corresponds to winning in the second start winning opening 14. If the variable display of the second special symbol cannot be started, the second reserved memory number is increased by 1 on condition that the second reserved memory number has not reached the upper limit value.

  FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing an example of the circuit configuration of the main board (game control board) 31. 2 also shows the payout control board 37, the effect control board 80, and the like. A game control microcomputer (corresponding to game control means) 560 for controlling the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to a program is mounted on the main board 31. The game control microcomputer 560 includes a ROM 54 for storing a game control (game progress control) program and the like, a RAM 55 as storage means used as a work memory, a CPU 56 for performing control operations in accordance with the program, and an I / O port unit 57. including. In this embodiment, the ROM 54 and the RAM 55 are built in the game control microcomputer 560. That is, the game control microcomputer 560 is a one-chip microcomputer. The one-chip microcomputer only needs to incorporate at least the CPU 56 and the RAM 55, and the ROM 54 may be external or built-in. The I / O port unit 57 may be externally attached. The game control microcomputer 560 further includes a random number circuit 503 that generates hardware random numbers (random numbers generated by the hardware circuit).

  In the game control microcomputer 560, the CPU 56 executes control in accordance with a program stored in the ROM 54. Therefore, the game control microcomputer 560 (or the CPU 56) executes (or performs processing) hereinafter. Specifically, the CPU 56 executes control according to a program. The same applies to microcomputers mounted on substrates other than the main substrate 31.

  The random number circuit 503 is a hardware circuit that is used to generate a random number for determination to determine whether or not to win a jackpot based on a display result of variable symbol special display. A random number circuit 503 updates numerical data in accordance with a set update rule within a numerical range in which an initial value (for example, 0) and an upper limit value (for example, 65535) are set, and starts at a random timing Based on the fact that the winning time is the reading (extraction) of the numerical data, it has a random number generation function in which the numerical data to be read becomes a random value.

  The random number circuit 503 includes a numeric data update range selection setting function (initial value selection setting function and upper limit value selection setting function), numeric data update rule selection setting function, and numeric data update rule selection. It has various functions such as a switching function. With such a function, the randomness of the generated random numbers can be improved.

  Further, the game control microcomputer 560 has a function of setting an initial value of numerical data updated by the random number circuit 503. For example, a predetermined calculation is performed using the ID number of the game control microcomputer 560 stored in a predetermined storage area such as the ROM 54 (an ID number assigned with a different value for each product of the game control microcomputer 560). The numerical data obtained by the execution is set as the initial value of the numerical data updated by the random number circuit 503. By performing such processing, the randomness of the random number generated by the random number circuit 503 can be further improved.

  The game control microcomputer 560 reads numerical data as random R from the random number circuit 503 when a start winning to the first start port switch 13a or the second start port switch 14a occurs, and performs a specific display based on the random R. It is determined whether or not to make a jackpot display result as a result, that is, whether or not to make a jackpot. When it is determined that the game is a big hit, the gaming state is shifted to a big hit gaming state as a specific gaming state advantageous to the player.

  The RAM 55 is a backup RAM as a non-volatile storage means, part or all of which is backed up by a backup power source created on the power supply board. That is, even if the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped, a part or all of the contents of the RAM 55 is stored for a predetermined period (until the capacitor as the backup power supply is discharged and the backup power supply cannot be supplied). In particular, at least data corresponding to the game state, that is, the control state of the game control means (such as the value of the special symbol process flag and the total reserved memory number counter) and the data indicating the number of unpaid winning balls are stored in the backup RAM. The data corresponding to the control state of the game control means is data necessary for restoring the control state before the occurrence of a power failure or the like based on the data when the power is restored after a power failure or the like occurs. Further, data corresponding to the control state and data indicating the number of unpaid winning balls are defined as data indicating the progress state of the game. In this embodiment, it is assumed that the entire RAM 55 is backed up.

  A reset signal (not shown) from the power supply board is input to the reset terminal of the game control microcomputer 560. A reset circuit for generating a reset signal supplied to the game control microcomputer 560 and the like is mounted on the power supply board. When the reset signal becomes high level, the game control microcomputer 560 and the like are in an operable state, and when the reset signal becomes low level, the game control microcomputer 560 and the like are in an operation stop state. Therefore, an allowable signal that allows the operation of the game control microcomputer 560 or the like is output during a period when the reset signal is at a high level, and a game control microcomputer is output when the reset signal is at a low level. An operation stop signal for stopping the operation of 560 or the like is output. Note that the reset circuit may be mounted on each electric component control board (a board on which a microcomputer for controlling the electric parts is mounted).

  Further, a power-off signal indicating that the power supply voltage from the power supply board has dropped below a predetermined value is input to the input port of the game control microcomputer 560. That is, the power supply board monitors the voltage value of a predetermined voltage (for example, DC30V or DC5V) used in the gaming machine, and when the voltage value decreases to a predetermined value (the power supply voltage is reduced). A power supply monitoring circuit that outputs a power-off signal indicating that). A clear signal (not shown) indicating that the clear switch for instructing to clear the contents of the RAM is operated is input to the input port of the game control microcomputer 560.

  Further, an input driver circuit 58 for supplying detection signals from the gate switch 32a, the first start port switch 13a, the second start port switch 14a and the count switch 23 to the game control microcomputer 560 is also mounted on the main board 31. The main board also includes an output circuit 59 for driving the solenoid 16 for opening and closing the variable winning ball device 15 and the solenoid 21 for opening and closing the special variable winning ball device 20 that forms a big winning opening in accordance with a command from the game control microcomputer 560. 31. Further, an information output circuit (not shown) for outputting an information output signal such as jackpot information indicating the occurrence of a jackpot gaming state to an external device such as a hall computer is also mounted on the main board 31.

  In this embodiment, the effect control means (configured by the effect control microcomputer) mounted on the effect control board 80 instructs the effect contents from the game control microcomputer 560 via the relay board 77. An effect control command is received, and display control with the image display device 9 that variably displays the effect symbol is performed.

  FIG. 3 is a block diagram illustrating a circuit configuration example of the relay board 77, the effect control board 80, the lamp driver board 35, and the audio output board 70. In the example shown in FIG. 3, the lamp driver board 35 and the audio output board 70 are not equipped with a microcomputer, but may be equipped with a microcomputer. Further, without providing the lamp driver board 35 and the audio output board 70, only the effect control board 80 may be provided for effect control.

  The effect control board 80 has an effect control microcomputer 100 including an effect control CPU 101 and a RAM. The RAM may be externally attached. In the effect control board 80, the effect control CPU 101 operates in accordance with a program stored in a built-in or external ROM (not shown), and receives a capture signal from the main board 31 input via the relay board 77 ( In response to the (effect control INT signal), an effect control command is received via the input driver 102 and the input port 103a. Further, the effect control CPU 101 inputs a detection signal from the operation button 120 via the input port 103b. Further, the effect control CPU 101 causes the drawing processor (VDP: video display processor) 109 to perform display control of the image display device 9 based on the effect control command.

  In this embodiment, a rendering processor 109 that controls the display of the image display device 9 in cooperation with the rendering control microcomputer 100 is mounted on the rendering control board 80. The drawing processor 109 has an address space independent of the effect control microcomputer 100, and maps the VRAM therein. The VRAM is a buffer memory for expanding image data generated by the drawing processor. Then, the drawing processor 109 outputs the image data in the VRAM to the image display device 9.

  The drawing processor 109 reads necessary data from a character ROM (not shown) according to the received effect control command in accordance with the instruction from the effect control CPU 101. The character ROM is for storing character image data displayed on the image display device 9, specifically, a person, a character, a figure, a symbol, etc. (including effect symbols) in advance. The drawing processor 109 executes display control based on the data read from the character ROM in accordance with an instruction from the effect control CPU 101.

  The effect control command and the effect control INT signal are first input to the input driver 102 on the effect control board 80. The input driver 102 allows the signal input from the relay board 77 to pass only in the direction toward the inside of the effect control board 80 (does not pass the signal in the direction from the inside of the effect control board 80 to the relay board 77). It is also a unidirectional circuit as a regulating means.

  As a signal direction regulating means, the signal inputted from the main board 31 is allowed to pass through the relay board 77 only in the direction toward the effect control board 80 (the signal is not passed in the direction from the effect control board 80 to the relay board 77). The unidirectional circuit 74 is mounted. For example, a diode or a transistor is used as the unidirectional circuit. FIG. 3 illustrates a diode. A unidirectional circuit is provided for each signal. Furthermore, since the effect control command and the effect control INT signal are output from the main board 31 via the output port 571 that is a unidirectional circuit, the signal from the relay board 77 toward the inside of the main board 31 is restricted. That is, the signal from the relay board 77 does not enter the inside of the main board 31 (the game control microcomputer 560 side). The output port 571 is a part of the I / O port unit 57 shown in FIG. Further, a signal driver circuit that is a unidirectional circuit may be further provided outside the output port 571 (on the relay board 77 side).

  Further, the effect control CPU 101 outputs a signal for driving the LED to the lamp driver board 35 via the output port 105. Further, the production control CPU 101 outputs sound number data to the audio output board 70 via the output port 104.

  In the lamp driver board 35, a signal for driving the LED is input to the LED driver 352 via the input driver 351. The LED driver 352 supplies a drive signal to each LED provided on the frame side such as the top frame LED 28a, the left frame LED 28b, and the right frame LED 28c. Further, a drive signal is supplied to the decoration LED 25 provided on the game board side. When a light emitter other than the LED is provided, a drive circuit (driver) for driving the light emitter is mounted on the lamp driver substrate 35.

  In the voice output board 70, the sound number data is input to the voice synthesis IC 703 via the input driver 702. The voice synthesizing IC 703 generates voice or sound effect according to the sound number data, and outputs it to the amplifier circuit 705. The amplifier circuit 705 outputs an audio signal obtained by amplifying the output level of the speech synthesis IC 703 to a level corresponding to the volume set by the volume 706 to the speakers 27R and 27L. The voice data ROM 704 stores control data corresponding to the sound number data. The control data corresponding to the sound number data is a collection of data showing the output form of the sound effect or sound in a time series in a predetermined period (for example, the changing period of the effect design).

  FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing a circuit configuration of the drawing processor 109. FIG. 4 also shows a CPU (production control CPU) 101, a ROM 112 for storing production control programs, various production patterns such as symbol display, light emission, and voice output, and a RAM 113 used as a work memory. ing.

  When executing the display control of the image display device 6, the effect control CPU 101 gives a command corresponding to the effect control command to the drawing processor 109. The drawing processor 109 reads necessary data from the CGROM 83 or the like in accordance with the command. The CGROM 83 stores, for example, decorative patterns displayed on the image display device 6 and image data (moving image data and still image data) composed of characters (persons, animals), characters, figures, symbols, and the like. The CGROM 83 may store moving image data or still image data obtained by actual shooting. The drawing processor 109 generates image data to be displayed on the image display device 9 according to the input data, and outputs R (red), G (green), B (blue) signals and a synchronization signal to the image display device 9. . The image display device 9 performs, for example, screen display by a dot matrix system that drives a large number of pixels (pixels).

  Specifically, the VRAM 84 and the frame buffer 85 are realized using SDRAM. In this embodiment, the VRAM 84 and the frame buffer 85 are separately configured. However, the VRAM 84 and the frame buffer 85 may be implemented using a common SDRAM. In this case, the SDRAM is provided with a frame buffer area and a VRAM area.

  The drawing processor 109 includes a drawing control unit 91 (drawing circuit), a display signal control unit 87 (display circuit) for outputting a signal to the image display device 9, a moving image decompression unit 89 that performs moving image decoding processing, and image data. And a data transfer circuit 94 for performing the transfer. The drawing control unit 91 includes a VRAM address generation unit and the like.

  Further, a CG bus interface (CG bus I / F) 93 is provided inside the drawing processor 109, and the data transfer circuit 94 and the moving image decompression unit 89 receive image data from the CGROM 83 via the CG bus I / F 98. Is read. In addition, a CPU I / F 92 is also provided inside the rendering processor 109, and the effect control CPU 101 can access a portion connected to the CG bus via the CPU I / F 92. Specifically, the effect control CPU 101 can access the drawing control register 95 connected to the CG bus. The drawing control register 95 stores a command from the effect control CPU 101 to the drawing control unit 91.

  In this embodiment, the variable display of the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 8a is based on the fact that the game ball that has entered the first starting winning port 13 is detected by the first starting port switch 13a. After the start condition is satisfied, the process is started based on the fact that the first start condition is satisfied, for example, due to the variable display of the previous special symbol, the big hit gaming state, or the small hit gaming state. The variable display of the second special symbol by the second special symbol display 8b is performed after the second starting condition is satisfied, for example, when a game ball that has entered the second starting winning port 14 is detected by the second starting port switch 14a. For example, it is started based on the fact that the second start condition is satisfied, for example, due to the variable display of the previous special symbol, the big hit gaming state, or the small hit gaming state being ended.

  In the special symbol variable display by the first special symbol display unit 8a or the second special symbol display unit 8b, after a predetermined time has elapsed after the variable symbol special display is started, a fixed special that results in a variable symbol variable display result is obtained. The symbol is stopped and displayed (derived display). At this time, if a specific special symbol (big hit symbol) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol, it becomes a “big hit” as the specific display result, and a predetermined special symbol (small bonus symbol) different from the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed. Then, it becomes “small hit” as a predetermined display result, and it becomes “lost” if a special symbol other than the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed. After the variable display result in the variable display of the special symbol becomes “big hit”, the game is controlled to the big hit gaming state as the specific gaming state. Further, after the variable display result in the variable display of the special symbol becomes “small hit”, the small hit game state different from the big hit game state is controlled. In the pachinko gaming machine 1 in this embodiment, as an example, numbers indicating “1”, “3”, and “7” are jackpot symbols, numbers indicating “5” are jackpot symbols, and “−” is indicated. The symbol is a lost pattern. In addition, each symbol such as a big hit symbol, a small hit symbol, and a lost symbol in the variable display of the special symbol by the first special symbol display 8a is different from each symbol in the variable display of the special symbol by the second special symbol display 8b. The symbol may be a symbol, or the common symbol may be a big hit symbol, a small bonus symbol, or a lost symbol in the variable display of both special symbols.

  In this embodiment, among the special symbols indicating the numbers “1”, “3”, and “7” that are jackpot symbols, the special symbols indicating the numbers “3” and “7” are 15 round jackpot symbols, A special symbol indicating the number “1” is a two-round jackpot symbol. In the big hit gaming state (15 round big hit state) as the first specific gaming state controlled after the 15 round big hit symbol is stopped and displayed as a fixed special symbol in the variable display of the special symbol, the open / close plate of the special variable winning ball apparatus 20 However, the special variable winning ball apparatus 20 is opened by opening the large winning opening in a predetermined period (for example, 29 seconds) which is the first period or a period until a predetermined number (for example, 10) of winning balls are generated. A round is executed to change to the first state advantageous to the player. In this way, the open / close plate that opened the grand prize opening during the round receives the game ball falling on the surface of the game board 2 and then closed the grand prize opening, thereby playing the special variable prize winning ball device 20 as a game. Change to the second state, which is disadvantageous to the person, and finish one round. In the 15 round big hit state, the number of executions of the round, which is the opening cycle of the big prize opening, is the first number (for example, “15”). A game in a 15-round big hit state in which the number of round executions is “15” is also referred to as a 15-time open game.

  In the big hit gaming state (two round big hit state) as the second specific gaming state controlled after the two round big hit symbol is stopped and displayed as the fixed special symbol in the variable display of the special symbol, the special variable winning ball apparatus 20 in each round Is a second period (for example, 0.5 seconds) that is shorter than the first period in the 15 round big hit state (the period in which the big winning opening is opened by the opening / closing plate). It becomes. In the 2 round big hit state, the number of executions of the round is a second number (for example, “2”) smaller than the first number in the 15 round big hit state. In the two-round big hit state, at least one of the period in which the winning opening is opened in each round is the second period and the number of executions of the round is the second number is performed. Control other than that may be performed, and other control may be performed in the same manner as in the 15 round big hit state. A game in the round two big hit state in which the number of round executions is “2” is also referred to as a two-time open game. In the two-round big hit state, the predetermined winning ball apparatus provided separately from the special variable winning ball apparatus 20 in each round is changed from the second state that is disadvantageous to the player to the first state that is advantageous to the player. It is also possible to return to the second state after a predetermined period (the first period or the second period) has elapsed.

  In addition, among the special symbols indicating the numbers “3” and “7” that will be the big hit symbol of 15 rounds, the special symbol indicating the number “3” is stopped and displayed as the fixed special symbol in the variable symbol variable display. After the base 15 round big hit state is over, as a special gaming state, the special symbol variable time (special figure variation time) in the variable display of the special symbol is controlled to a short time state compared to the normal state The Here, the normal state is a specific game state such as a big hit game state, a special game state such as a short-time state, or a game state other than the small hit game state, and is an initial setting state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, a system reset). As in the case where the initialization process is performed, the same control as in the state in which the initialization process is executed after the power is turned on is performed. The time-saving state is ended when either of the following conditions is satisfied: the variable display of a special symbol is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times) and the variable display result is “big hit”. do it. In addition, after the 15 round big hit state based on the fact that the special symbol showing the number “3” out of the 15 round big hit symbols is stopped and displayed as the fixed special symbol in the variable display of the special symbols, Instead, it may be in a normal state. Like the special symbol indicating the number “3”, 15 round big hits that are controlled to the short-time state or the normal state after the big-hit gaming state based on being stopped and displayed as the confirmed special symbol in the variable display of the special symbol The symbol is usually referred to as a jackpot symbol (also referred to as “non-probable variation jackpot symbol”).

  Of the special symbols indicating the numbers “3” and “7”, which are the 15 round big hit symbols, the special symbol indicating the number “7” is stopped and displayed as the fixed special symbol in the variable symbol variable display 15 After the round-hit state ends, or after the 2-round big-hit state ends based on the special symbol indicating the number “1” that becomes the 2-round big-hit symbol being stopped and displayed as a fixed special symbol in the variable symbol display. Is a special gaming state that is different from the short-time state, for example, a special variation state (high probability game) in which the special figure variation time is shortened compared to the normal state and the probability variation control (probability variation control) is continuously performed. State). In this probability change state, in the variable display of each special symbol and the decorative symbol display, the variable display result is “big hit”, and the probability of being further controlled to the big hit gaming state is improved to be higher than the normal state. . Such a probability change state may be continued until the next variable display result becomes “big hit”, regardless of the number of executions of the variable display of the special symbol. On the other hand, after the certainty change state is reached, any one of the conditions that the variable display of the special symbol is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times) and the variable display result becomes “big hit”. You may make it complete | finish, when it establishes previously. Even if the variable display of the special symbol is executed a predetermined number of times in the probability change state or before the variable display result is a “big hit”, the variable state of the special symbol is started at the predetermined rate when the variable symbol display starts. May be terminated. Like the special symbol indicating the number “7”, the 15-round jackpot symbol controlled to the probable change state after the jackpot gaming state based on the fact that it is stopped and displayed as the fixed special symbol in the variable symbol special display, It is called a probable big hit symbol.

  After the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed as the confirmed special symbol in the variable display of the special symbol, the small hit game state different from the big hit game state is controlled. In this small hit gaming state, a variable winning operation for changing the special variable winning ball apparatus 20 to the first state advantageous to the player is performed as in the two round big hit state. That is, in the small hit gaming state, for example, the operation of opening the large winning opening over the second period by the opening / closing plate provided in the special variable winning ball apparatus 20 is repeatedly executed until the second number of times is reached. In the small hit gaming state, as in the two round big hit state, the period in which the big prize opening is in the open state is the second period, and the number of executions of the operation in which the big prize opening is in the open state is the second number. It may be controlled so that at least one of them is performed. After the small hit gaming state ends, the gaming state is not changed, and the game state before the variable display result becomes “small hit” is continuously controlled. A game in the small hit gaming state in which the number of times that the big winning opening is opened by the variable winning operation is “2” is also referred to as a two-time open game, similar to the game in the two round big hit state. When the winning ball apparatus provided separately from the special variable winning ball apparatus 20 in each round in the two round big hit state is changed to the first state, the same as the two round big hit state in the small hit gaming state. In the aspect, the winning ball apparatus may be changed to the first state.

  In the probability variation state and the short time state, the normal symbol variable display on the normal symbol display unit 10 can be controlled so that the variation time of the normal symbol (ordinary symbol variation time) is shorter than that in the normal state, or the normal symbol can be variably displayed each time. Control for improving the probability that the normal symbol variable display result is “per normal symbol” than in the normal state, and the movable blade piece in the variable winning ball apparatus 15 based on the fact that the variable display result is “per normal symbol”. The second start condition is increased by increasing the possibility that the game ball enters the second start winning opening 14 such as control for making the tilt time of the game longer than that in the normal state and control for increasing the number of tilts compared with that in the normal state. Control that is advantageous to the player is facilitated by the fact that the above is easily established. Therefore, in this embodiment, in the normal state other than the probability variation state and the short time state, the first start winning port 13 is easier to start than the second start winning port 14, but the probability variation state or In the short-time state, the second start winning opening 14 is easier to start than the first starting winning opening 13. It should be noted that any one of these controls may be performed in the probability variation state or the short time state, or a plurality of controls may be performed in combination. The control to be performed may be different between the probability change state and the time-short state, or the combination of the controls to be performed (which may or may not include the same control) may be different.

  In the period from the start of variable display of decorative symbols to the end of variable display due to the stop display of the fixed decorative symbols in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas, variable display of decorative symbols The state may become a predetermined reach state. Here, the reach state means a decorative symbol that has not been stopped and displayed yet (“reach variation symbol”) when the decorative symbols that are stopped and displayed in the display area of the image display device 9 constitute a part of the jackpot combination. Is also a display state in which the variation continues, or a display state in which all or part of the decorative symbols change synchronously while constituting all or part of the jackpot combination. Specifically, a part of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas (for example, “left” and “right” decorative symbol display areas) constitutes a predetermined jackpot combination. Decorative symbols are displayed in the remaining decorative symbol display areas (for example, the “decorative” decorative symbol display area, etc.) that are not yet stopped when decorative symbols (for example, decorative symbols indicating the alphanumeric character “7”) are stopped. The display state is changing, or all or part of the “left”, “middle”, or “right” decoration symbol display area is synchronized with the decoration symbol forming all or part of the jackpot combination. The display state is in progress. In response to the reach state, a character image (effect image imitating a person) different from the decorative design is displayed in the display area of the image display device 9, or the display mode of the background image is changed. Or changing the variation of the decorative pattern. Such a change in the character image display, background image display mode, and decorative pattern variation mode is referred to as reach effect display (or simply reach effect).

  In addition, during the variable display of decorative symbols, unlike the reach effect, the variable display state of decorative symbols may become the reach state, and the variable display result may be a “hit” In some cases, a specific effect for informing the player by a variable display mode of a decorative design or the like may be executed. In this embodiment, specific effects such as “slip”, “pseudo train”, “intro”, “expansion chance”, and “end of development opportunity” are set to be executable.

  In the specific effect of “slip”, the decorative symbols are changed in all of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas, and then two or more decorative symbol display areas (for example, “left” and “left”) are displayed. After temporarily displaying the decorative symbols in the “right” decorative symbol display area, etc., a predetermined number (for example, “1” or “2”) of the decorative symbol display areas in the temporarily stopped display The decorative symbol to be stopped is changed by changing the decorative symbol again after changing the decorative symbol again (for example, one or both of the “left” decorative symbol display area and the “right” decorative symbol display area). An effect display is performed. In the temporary stop display, while the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, for example, the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed to the player by, for example, performing a fluctuation variation display or immediately changing the decorative symbol again only by stopping for a short time. It is only necessary to notify that the decorative pattern is not fixed. Alternatively, in the temporary stop display, the decorative design may be re-fluctuated after the decorative design is stopped to the extent that the player recognizes that the decorative design that has been stopped is confirmed.

  In the “pseudo-ream” specific production, “Left”, “Middle”, and “Right” decorations based on the fact that one of the first start condition and the second start condition for variable symbol display is established once. After changing the decorative symbols in all of the symbol display areas, temporarily display the decorative symbols in all of the decorative symbol display areas, and then change the decorative symbols in all of the decorative symbol display areas again. ) Can be performed a predetermined number of times (for example, up to four times). As an example, in the specific effect of “pseudo ream”, any of the pseudo ream chances GC1 to GC8 shown in FIG. 5A is configured in the decorative symbol display areas of “left”, “middle”, and “right”. The decorative symbol to be displayed is temporarily stopped. Here, the “left symbol” is a decorative symbol displayed (stop display or temporary stop display) in the “left” decorative symbol display area, and the “middle symbol” is displayed in the “middle” decorative symbol display area. The “right symbol” is a decorative symbol displayed in the “right” decorative symbol display area. The pseudo consecutive chances GC1 to GC8 may be determined in advance as a combination of decorative symbols included in the special combination.

  In the specific production of “Intro”, after changing the decoration pattern in all of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decoration display areas, the fixed decorations are stopped in all the decoration display areas. Before the display (final stop display), for example, a predetermined effect display such as an introduction part of the effect display performed in the reach effect is performed.

  In the specific development of “Development Opportunities”, the decorative symbols are changed in all of the decorative symbol display areas of “left”, “middle”, and “right” and then predetermined in all of the decorative symbol display areas. After the decorative symbols constituting the development chance included in the special combination are temporarily stopped and displayed, a predetermined reach effect is started with the variable display state of the decorative symbols as the reach state. As an example, in the specific effect of “Development Chance”, one of the development chances HC1 to HC8 shown in FIG. 5B is configured in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas. The decorative symbol to be displayed is temporarily stopped. Therefore, when any of the development chances HC1 to HC8 is temporarily stopped, the decorative symbol variable display state becomes the reach state, or the variable display result becomes “big hit” after the reach state is reached. The player's expectation is enhanced.

  In the specific production of “Development Opportunity End”, the decorative symbols are changed in all of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas, and then developed in all the decorative symbol display areas. An effect display is performed in which a decorative pattern of a predetermined combination as a chance is stopped and displayed as a final decorative pattern (final stop display). As an example, in the specific effect of “end of development opportunity”, any of the development chance items HC1 to HC8 that are temporarily stopped and displayed in the specific effect of “development opportunity” are stopped and displayed as a confirmed decorative pattern.

  Further, during the variable display of the decorative pattern, unlike the reach effect or the specific effect, for example, by displaying a decorative character other than the variable display mode of the decorative pattern, such as displaying a predetermined character image or message image, A notice effect may be executed to notify the player that the variable display state may become a reach state and that the variable display result may be a “hit”. In this embodiment, notice effects such as “character display”, “step-up image”, and “mail display” are set to be executable.

  In the “character display” notice effect, the decorative symbols are changed in all of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas, and then two or more decorative symbol display areas (for example, “left”) are displayed. ”And“ Right ”decorative symbol display areas, etc.) before the temporary display of the decorative symbols, an effect display is performed in which a character image prepared in advance is displayed at a predetermined position in the display area of the image display device 9.

  In the notice effect of “Step-up image”, the decoration pattern is changed in all of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decoration symbol display areas, and then decorated in two or more decoration symbol display areas. Before the symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed, an effect display in which a plurality of types of effect images prepared in advance are switched and displayed in a predetermined order in the display area of the image display device 9 may be performed. In the notice effect of “step-up image”, after any one of a plurality of kinds of effect images prepared in advance (for example, an effect image that is displayed first in a predetermined order) is displayed, the effect image The effect display in the notice effect may be terminated without being switched.

  In the “mail display” notice effect, the decorative symbols are changed in all of the decorative symbol display areas of “left”, “middle”, and “right”, and then the decorative symbols are displayed in two or more decorative symbol display areas. Before the temporary stop display, an effect display in which the effect operation changes is performed, for example, the display of the effect image in the display area of the image display device 9 is changed in response to the operation button 120 being operated by the player. Is called.

  If a special symbol that will be a lost symbol is stopped and displayed as a fixed special symbol in the variable symbol display, the variable symbol display will not change to the reach state after the variable symbol variable display starts. There are cases where a fixed decorative pattern that is a predetermined non-reach combination or a fixed decorative graphic that is one of the development chances HC1 to HC8 of the special combination is displayed in a stopped manner. Such a decorative display variable display mode is referred to as a “non-reach” (also referred to as “normal loss”) variable display mode when the variable display result is “losing”.

  When the special symbol that is a lost symbol is stopped and displayed as a fixed special symbol in the variable symbol special display, the variable symbol display state has reached the reach state after the variable symbol variable display has started. Corresponding to the above, after the reach effect is executed, or the reach effect is not executed, a fixed decorative pattern that becomes a predetermined reach lose combination may be stopped and displayed. Such a variable display result of the decorative design is referred to as a variable display mode of “reach” (also referred to as “reach lose”) when the variable display result is “losing”.

  When the special symbol indicating the number “3”, which is a normal jackpot symbol, is stopped and displayed as a special symbol that becomes a 15-round jackpot symbol as the fixed special symbol in the variable symbol variable display state, the decorative symbol variable display state Corresponding to having reached the reach state, after the predetermined reach effect is executed, or the reach effect is not executed, the fixed decorative symbol that is the predetermined normal jackpot combination is stopped and displayed. Here, for example, the symbol numbers that are variably displayed in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas in the image display device 9 are the determined decorative symbols that are usually the big hit combinations. Among the decorative patterns of “8”, any one of the decorative patterns having the even numbers “2”, “4”, “6”, “8” is “left”, “middle”, “right”. What is necessary is just to stop and display on the predetermined effective line in the decorative symbol display area. In this way, the decorative symbols having the even number “2”, “4”, “6”, “8” constituting the normal jackpot combination are referred to as normal symbols (also referred to as “non-probable variation symbols”). Then, in response to the fixed special symbol in the variable display of the special symbol becoming the normal jackpot symbol, after the predetermined reach effect is executed, or the reach effect is not executed, the fixed decorative symbol of the normal jackpot combination The decorative display variable display mode in which is stopped is referred to as a “normal” (also referred to as “normal big hit”) variable display mode when the variable display result is “big hit”. In this way, after the variable display result is “big hit” by the “normal” variable display mode, the game is controlled to the 15 round big hit gaming state, and when the 15 round big hit state is finished, it is controlled to the short time state or the normal state. become.

  In this embodiment, a decorative symbol is displayed on one line in each of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas in the image display device 9 as a predetermined effective line. However, the present invention is not limited to the case where one effective line is displayed on the image display device 9, and a plurality of effective lines (for example, five lines) may be displayed.

  Further, in this embodiment, when the special symbol indicating the number “7”, which is the probability variable big hit symbol, is stopped and displayed among the special symbols that become the 15 round big hit symbol as the fixed special symbol in the variable symbol special display. Is one of the three display modes of the first probability variation, the second probability variation, and the third probability variation, and the decorative display is variably displayed on the image display device 9. In addition, the display mode of the first probability variation is to execute the reach effect (for example, normal reach) similar to the case of “normal” during the variable display of the decorative pattern, or without executing the reach effect. This is a display mode in which a probability variation symbol is stopped and displayed as a stop symbol. In addition, the display mode of the second probability variation is to execute a reach effect (for example, super reach) different from the case of “normal” during the variable display of the decorative symbol, and stop displaying the probability variable symbol as a decorative symbol stop symbol. This is the display mode. In addition, the display mode of the third probability variation is a probability variation big hit without performing the reach effect (for example, normal reach) similar to the case of “normal” during the variable display of the decorative pattern, or without performing the reach effect. In spite of being, it is a display mode in which the non-probable variation symbol is stopped and displayed as the stop symbol of the decorative symbol.

  When the special symbol showing the number “7”, which is a probabilistic big hit symbol, is stopped and displayed as a fixed special symbol in the special symbol variable display, the decorative symbol variable display state Corresponding to the reach state, after the reach effect similar to the case where the decorative display variable display mode is “normal” or after the reach effect is not executed, the predetermined probability change big hit There are cases in which a fixed decorative symbol that is a combination is stopped and displayed. Here, the confirmed decorative symbols that are probable big hit combinations are, for example, symbol numbers “1” to “1” that are variably displayed in the decorative symbol display areas of “left”, “middle”, and “right” in the image display device 9. Among the decorative patterns of “8”, any one of the decorative patterns having the odd numbers “1”, “3”, “5”, and “7” is “left”, “middle”, and “right”. What is necessary is just to be able to be stopped and displayed on a predetermined effective line in the decorative symbol display area. In this way, the decorative symbols having odd numbers “1”, “3”, “5”, and “7” constituting the probability variation big hit combination are referred to as probability variation symbols. Then, in response to the fact that the confirmed special symbol in the variable display of the special symbol becomes the probable big hit symbol, after the reach effect similar to the case where the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is “normal” is executed, or the reach The decorative display variable display mode in which the confirmed decorative symbol of the probability variation big hit combination is stopped and displayed without performing the production is “first positive variation big hit (hereinafter simply referred to as first positive variation) when the variable display result is“ big hit ”. Also referred to as a variable display mode. Thus, after the variable display result is “big hit” by the variable display mode of “first positive change”, the game is controlled to the 15th round big hit state, and when the 15th round big hit state ends, it is controlled to the positive change state. .

  When the special symbol showing the number “7”, which is a probabilistic big hit symbol, is stopped and displayed as a fixed special symbol in the special symbol variable display, the decorative symbol variable display state In response to the reach state, after a reach effect different from the case where the variable display mode is “normal” is executed, a fixed decorative symbol that is a predetermined probability variation big hit combination may be stopped and displayed. is there. Corresponding to the fact that the fixed special symbol in the variable display of the special symbol becomes the probability variation big hit symbol, after the reach effect different from the case where the variable symbol display mode of the decorative symbol is “normal” is executed, the probability big hit The variable display mode of the decorative symbol in which the fixed decorative symbol of the combination is stopped is a variable display mode of “second positive variation big hit (hereinafter also simply referred to as second positive change)” when the variable display result is “big hit”. Called. Thus, after the variable display result is “big hit” by the variable display mode of “second positive change”, it is controlled to the 15 round big hit state, and when the 15 round big hit state ends, it is controlled to the positive change state. .

  When the special symbol showing the number “7”, which is a probabilistic big hit symbol, is stopped and displayed as a fixed special symbol in the special symbol variable display, the decorative symbol variable display state Corresponding to the reach state, after the reach effect similar to the case where the decorative symbol variable display mode is “normal” or after the reach effect is not executed, the normal jackpot combination The fixed decorative pattern may be stopped and displayed. Corresponding to the fact that the confirmed special symbol in the variable display of the special symbol becomes the probability variation big hit symbol, after the reach effect similar to the case where the variable symbol display mode of the decorative symbol is “normal”, or The variable display mode of the decorative symbol in which the fixed decorative symbol of the normal big hit combination is stopped and displayed without executing the reach effect is the “third positive variable big hit (hereinafter simply referred to as the third positive big hit) in the case where the variable display result is“ big hit ”. This is also referred to as a variable display mode. Thus, after the variable display result is “big hit” by the variable display mode of “third probability change”, the game is controlled to the 15 round big hit state, and when the 15 round big hit state is finished, it is controlled to the positive change state. .

  As described above, when the decorative symbol variable display mode is “first probability variation” or “second probability variation”, the fixed symbol design that is a probability variation big hit combination is stopped and displayed in the variable symbol variable display. , It is determined that the probability change state is reached after being controlled to the 15 round big hit state. On the other hand, when the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is “third probability variation”, the fixed decoration which is normally a big hit combination in the variable display of the decorative pattern is the same as when the variable display mode is “normal”. The symbol is stopped and displayed. For this reason, when the variable display mode is “third probability variation”, the player cannot recognize whether or not the probability variation state is obtained from the variable symbol display result of the decorative symbols. That is, the confirmed decorative symbol that becomes the probability variation jackpot combination is included in the specific display result that is determined to be controlled to the jackpot gaming state, and is included in the special display result that is determined to be controlled to the probability variation state. On the other hand, the confirmed decorative pattern that is normally a big hit combination is included in the specific display result other than the special display result that is not determined to be controlled to the probability variation state.

  When a special symbol indicating the number “1”, which is a two-round jackpot symbol, is stopped and displayed as a fixed special symbol in the variable symbol variable display, the decorative symbol variable display state does not reach the reach state, and is predetermined. The fixed decorative symbol that is a non-reach combination is stopped and displayed, or the fixed decorative symbol that is one of the development chances HC1 to HC8 shown in FIG. 5B is stopped or displayed, or FIG. In some cases, the fixed decorative symbol that is one of the chances of success TC1 to TC4 shown in C) is stopped and displayed. Note that the chances of success TC1 to TC4 may be determined in advance as a combination of decorative symbols included in the special combination. In addition, when the special symbol indicating the number “1”, which is a two-round jackpot symbol, is stopped and displayed as the fixed special symbol in the variable symbol variable display, the decorative symbol variable display state has reached the reach state. Corresponding to the above, after the predetermined reach effect is executed, or the reach effect is not executed, the fixed decorative pattern that becomes the predetermined reach combination may be stopped and displayed. In this way, in response to the fact that the confirmed special symbol in the variable symbol variable display becomes a special symbol indicating the number “1”, which is the two-round jackpot symbol, various decorative symbols in which various confirmed ornament symbols are displayed in a stopped manner. The display mode is referred to as a variable display mode of “surprise accuracy” (also referred to as “surprise accuracy hit” or “sudden probability change hit”) when the variable display result is “big hit”. Thus, after the variable display result is “big hit” by the variable display mode of “surprise accuracy”, it is controlled to the two round big hit state, and when the two round big hit state is finished, the probability change state is controlled.

  When the special symbol indicating the number “5”, which is the small hit symbol, is stopped and displayed as the fixed special symbol in the variable symbol special display, the same as when the decorative symbol variable display mode is “accurate”. After the decorative display is variably displayed, the fixed decorative pattern that is a predetermined non-reach combination is stopped and displayed, or the fixed decorative pattern that is one of the development chance items HC1 to HC8 shown in FIG. A symbol may be displayed in a stopped state, or a fixed decorative symbol that is a predetermined reach combination may be displayed in a stopped state. In this way, in response to the fixed special symbol in the variable display of the special symbol becoming a special symbol indicating the number “5” which is the small hit symbol, variable display of the decorative symbol in which various fixed decorative symbols are stopped and displayed. The mode is referred to as a “small hit” variable display mode. Here, the confirmed decorative pattern that is one of the chance chance items TC1 to TC4 shown in FIG. 5 (C) is stopped and displayed only when the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is “accurate”, and the variable display mode is “small”. When it is “winning”, it is not stopped and displayed as a confirmed decorative pattern. In other words, when the fixed decorative symbol that is one of the chances of success TC1 to TC4 is stopped and displayed in the variable display of the decorative symbol, the variable display result may be “big hit” by the variable display mode of “probable”. Determine. In addition, you may be made to use in common the sudden chance big hit and the small hit case in the case of sudden probability change big hit TC1-TC4 shown in FIG.5 (C). By doing so, it is possible to improve the interest of the game by making it difficult to know whether it is a sudden big hit or a small hit (that is, whether or not the game state is shifted to the probability change state).

  In addition, after the variable display result becomes “small hit”, it is controlled to the small hit gaming state in which the variable winning action similar to the two round big hit state is performed, and the gaming state is changed when the small hit gaming state is ended. Therefore, the gaming state before the variable display result is “small hit” continues. If it is determined that the probability change state or the short-time state is to be ended in response to the variable display game in which the variable display result is “small hit”, the normal state is returned after the end of the small hit gaming state. Will be controlled.

  When the variable display mode of the decorative pattern when the variable display result is “big hit” is any one of “normal”, “first probability variation”, and “third probability variation”, during the variable display of the decoration symbol, There is a case where a promotion effect during change as a specific change display is executed. In the fluctuating promotion effect, after a decorative symbol that is a normal jackpot combination is temporarily stopped and displayed on the effective lines of the decorative symbol display areas of “left”, “middle”, and “right” on the image display device 9, for example, “ In the left, middle, and right decorative pattern display areas, the same decorative pattern is made to change again, and either a decorative pattern that is a probable big hit combination or a decorative pattern that is a normal jackpot combination. Is stopped and displayed as a final decorative symbol (final stop display). Here, when the changing promotion effect is executed corresponding to the fact that the decorative symbol variable display mode is “normal” or “third probability change”, the temporary display is temporarily stopped as the changing promotion effect. After changing the decorative symbol again, the promotion promotion failure during change is performed in which the fixed decorative symbol which is normally a big hit combination is stopped and displayed. On the other hand, when the changing promotion effect is executed in response to the variable display mode being “first probability change”, the temporarily stopped display of the decorative symbols is changed again as the changing promotion effect. After the change, the promotion success success during change is performed in which the fixed decorative symbol that becomes the probable big hit combination is stopped and displayed.

  When the variable display result when the variable display result is “big hit”, when the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is “normal” or “third probability change”, the variable display result is stopped and displayed for 15 rounds. After the control, the jackpot promotion effect is executed as a notification effect as to whether or not to control to the probable change state during the period until the 15 round big hit state is finished. Here, the timing at which the jackpot promotion effect is executed may be a period before the start of the first round in the 15 round big hit state after the variable display result is stopped and displayed, or the 15 round big hit state May be a period during which any one of the rounds is being executed, or may be a period from the end of any round to the start of the next round in the 15 round big hit state, or 15 rounds. It may be a period from the end of the last round in the big hit state to the start of the next variable display game. Alternatively, an effect operation corresponding to the promotion effect during the big hit may be performed during the fluctuation of the first special symbol or decorative design after the end of the 15th round big hit state. The jackpot promotion effect executed after the final round in the 15 round jackpot state is sometimes referred to as “ending promotion effect” in particular.

  In the jackpot promotion effect, there is a jackpot promotion promotion effect that informs that there is a promotion that the game state becomes a probable change state even though the confirmed decorative pattern is a normal jackpot combination, and that there is no promotion that becomes a probable change state There is a promotion promotion failure during the jackpot to be notified. As an example, in the jackpot promotion effect, the decorative symbol is variably displayed in the display area of the image display device 9, and either the normal symbol or the probability variation symbol is stopped and displayed as the effect display result. At this time, the normal symbol is stopped and displayed as the effect display result in the jackpot promotion promotion effect, while the probable change symbol may be stopped and displayed as the effect display result in the jackpot promotion promotion effect. As another example, in the jackpot promotion effect, the effect image indicating the roulette game is displayed in the display area of the image display device 9. At this time, the ball thrown into the rotating roulette in the jackpot promotion failure production is displayed in the “even number” and displays the production image of “Sorry!”, While the jackpot promotion promotion production is thrown into the rotating roulette. The ball enters “odd number” and the effect image “probability!” Is displayed. Corresponding to the special symbol showing the number “7” being stopped as a special symbol for variable display of the special symbol, the variable display result is “big hit” by the variable display mode of “third probability variation”. After that, by executing the big success promotion effect during the big hit before the big hit gaming state is finished, it is notified that there is a promotion that becomes a probable change state. In response to the fact that the special symbol indicating the number “3” is stopped and displayed as the fixed special symbol in the variable symbol special display, after the variable display result becomes “big hit” by the “normal” variable display mode, Until the jackpot gaming state is ended, the success promotion effect during the jackpot is not executed, and there is no notification that there is a promotion that is in a probable change state.

  Next, control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 560 to the effect control microcomputer 100 will be described. The control command transmitted from the main board 31 to the effect control board 80 via the relay board 15 is, for example, an effect control command transmitted and received as an electrical signal. The effect control command includes, for example, a display control command used for controlling an image display operation in the image display device 9, a voice control command used for controlling sound output from the speakers 27 </ b> L and 27 </ b> R, and a game effect lamp 9. And a lamp control command used for controlling the lighting operation of the decorative LED and the like. FIG. 6A is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the contents of the effect control command used in this embodiment. The effect control command has, for example, a 2-byte structure, and the first byte indicates MODE (command classification), and the second byte indicates EXT (command type). The first bit (bit 7) of the MODE data is always “1”, and the first bit of the EXT data is “0”. Note that the command form shown in FIG. 6A is an example, and other command forms may be used. In this example, the control command is composed of two control signals, but the number of control signals constituting the control command may be one or a plurality of three or more.

  In the example shown in FIG. 6A, a command 8001 (H) is a first change start command that specifies the start of change in variable display of the first special symbol by the first special symbol display 8a. Command 8002 (H) is a second variation start command for designating the variation start in the variable display of the second special symbol by the second special symbol display 8b. Command 81XX (H) corresponds to a variable pattern display such as a decorative pattern variably displayed in each of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas in image display device 9 in response to the variable symbol special display. This is a change pattern specification command to be specified. Here, XX (H) indicates an unspecified hexadecimal number, and may be a value arbitrarily set according to the instruction content by the effect control command. In the variation pattern designation command, different EXT data is set according to the variation pattern to be designated.

  Command 8CXX (H) is a display result command for designating a variable display result such as a special symbol or a decorative symbol. In the display result command, for example, as shown in FIG. 6B, the result of prior determination as to whether the variable display result is “lost”, “big hit”, or “small hit”, and the variable display result is “big hit”. In response to the jackpot type determination result indicating whether the decorative symbol variable display mode is “normal”, “first probability variation” to “third probability variation”, or “surprise probability”, different EXT data Is set.

  Specifically, the commands 8C00 (H) and 8C01 (H) are display result commands indicating a determination result indicating that the variable display result is “lost”. Among these, the command 8C00 (H) is a first display result command indicating a determination result that the variable display result is “losing” and indicating that the gaming state is a short time state. The command 8C01 (H) is a second display result command indicating a determination result that the variable display result is “losing” and indicating that the gaming state is not the short-time state. When the variable display result is “losing”, a common display result command may be transmitted without distinguishing whether or not the gaming state is the short-time state. The command 8C02 (H) indicates a determination result that the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is “normal” when the variable display result is “big hit”, that is, the third display result designating that it is normal big hit. It is a command. Command 8C03 (H) indicates a determination result indicating that the variable symbol display state of the decorative symbol is “first probability variation” when the variable display result is “big success”, that is, designates that the first probability variation is big success. This is the fourth display result command. Command 8C04 (H) indicates a determination result indicating that the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is “second probability variation” when the variable display result is “big success”, that is, designates that it is the second probability variation big success. This is the fifth display result command. Command 8C05 (H) indicates the determination result that the decorative symbol variable display mode is “third probability variation” when the variable display result is “big success”, that is, designates that it is the third probability variation big success. This is the sixth display result command. The command 8C06 (H) indicates a determination result that the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is “surprise” when the variable display result is “big hit”, that is, a seventh display for designating that the sudden probability change big hit. Result command. Command 8C07 (H) is an eighth display result command indicating a determination result indicating that the variable display result is “small hit”.

  The command 8F00 (H) is a decorative symbol stop designation command for designating stop of variable display of decorative symbols in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas in the image display device 9.

  A0XX (H) is a hit start designation command (also referred to as a “fanfare command”) for designating display of an effect image indicating the start of a big hit gaming state or a small hit gaming state. In the hit start designation command, for example, EXT data similar to that of the display result command is set, so that different EXT data is set according to the prior determination result or the big hit type determination result. Alternatively, in the hit start designation command, the correspondence relationship between the preliminary determination result and the big hit type determination result and the set EXT data may be different from the correspondence relationship in the display result command.

  Command A1XX (H) is a command for specifying the opening of a big winning opening for 15 rounds that specifies display of an effect image during a period in which the big winning opening is open in each round corresponding to the 15 rounds big winning state It is. Command A2XX (H) displays an effect image (for example, an effect image in the interval between rounds) during the period when the big prize opening changes from the open state to the closed state at the end of each round, corresponding to the 15 round big hit state. This is a designation command for the 15 round big hit that is designated after opening the big prize opening. In the special command for opening the big prize opening for 15 rounds and the designation command after opening the big prize opening, for example, different EXT data corresponding to the number of round executions (for example, “1” to “15”) in the 15 round big hit state. Is set.

  Command A3XX (H) is a hit end designation command for designating display of an effect image at the end of the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state. In the hit end designation command, for example, EXT data similar to the display result command or the hit start designation command is set, so that different EXT data is set according to the prior determination result or the big hit type determination result. Alternatively, in the hit end designation command, the correspondence relationship between the prior determination result and the big hit type determination result and the set EXT data may be different from the correspondence relationship in the display result command or the hit start designation command.

  Command A4XX (H) is a two-round big hit state based on the variable display result being “big hit” and the big hit type being “surprise”, or a small hit gaming state based on the variable display result being “small hit” In response to the above, a command for specifying the opening of the big prize opening for the accuracy / small hit is designated for designating the display of the effect image during the period in which the big prize opening is in the open state in each round or variable winning action. Command A5XX (H) specifies the display of the effect image during the period when the big prize opening changed from the open state to the closed state at the end of each round or variable winning action corresponding to the two round big hit state or the small hit game state This is a command to specify after opening the big prize opening for accuracy and small hits. In the command for opening the big winning opening for the accuracy / small hit and the command specifying after opening the big winning opening, for example, the number of executions of the variable winning action in the round or the small hit gaming state (for example, “1” or “2” )), Different EXT data is set.

  Command B001 (H) is based on the fact that a game ball has won the first start winning opening 13, and the first start condition for executing variable display of the first special symbol by the first special symbol display 8a is established. This is the first start opening prize designation command for notifying that. Command B002 (H) is based on the fact that a game ball has won the second start winning opening 14, and the second start condition for executing variable display of the second special symbol by the second special symbol display 8b is established. This is the second start opening prize designation command for notifying that.

  The command C0XX (H) is used to display the total reserved memory number and the second reserved memory so that the total reserved memory number can be specified on the total reserved memory display unit 18c provided in the display area of the image display device 9 or the like. This is a pending storage count notification command for notifying the total pending storage count that is the total value with the number. For example, in response to one of the first start condition and the second start condition being established, either the first start opening prize designation command or the second start opening prize designation command is transmitted as the reserved storage number notification command. Following this, it is transmitted from the main board 31 to the effect control board 80. In the pending storage count notification command, for example, different EXT data is set corresponding to the value of a total pending storage count counter (for example, “1” to “8”) described later. Thereby, on the side of the production control board 80, when either the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied, the reserved memory number notification command transmitted from the main board 31 is received, and the total reserved memory number Can be specified.

  Next, each random number used in the game control process in the game control microcomputer 560 will be described. On the main board 31, for example, a random number circuit 503 provided in the game control microcomputer 100 counts numerical data indicating various random values used for controlling the progress of the game in an updatable manner. FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a random number value counted on the main board 31 side. As shown in FIG. 7, in this embodiment, on the main board 31 side, a random value MR1 for determining a special figure display result, a random value MR2-1 for determining a big hit type, and a random value MR2- for determining a reach 2. Numerical data indicating each of the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type and the random value MR4 for determining the variation pattern are controlled to be countable. In addition, in order to improve a game effect, random numbers other than these may be used. The random number circuit 503 only needs to count numerical data indicating all or part of these random number values MR1, MR2-1, MR2-2, MR3, and MR4.

  Note that the CPU 56 uses a random counter different from the random number circuit 503 to update various numerical data by software, thereby indicating numerical values indicating a part of the random number values MR1, MR2-1, MR2-2, MR3, and MR4. Data may be counted. As an example, the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result is updated independently of the CPU 56 by the random number circuit 503 and indicates the other random number values MR2-1, MR2-2, MR3, MR4. The numerical data may be updated by software by the CPU 56 using a random counter. The random number circuit 503 may be built in the game control microcomputer 100 or may be configured as a random number circuit chip different from the game control microcomputer 100.

  The random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result indicates whether the variable display result of the special symbol or the like in the special symbol variable display is controlled as the big hit gaming state by setting the variable display result as the big hit, and the variable display result is set as the “small hit”. It is a random value used for determining whether or not to control to the small hit gaming state, for example, takes a value in the range of “1” to “65535”.

  When the variable display result is “big hit”, the random display value MR2-1 for determining the jackpot type is “normal”, “first probability variation” to “third probability variation”, “surprise”, Is a random value used for determining one of the big hit types as the plurality of types of specific variable display types, for example, taking a value in the range of “1” to “100”. The reach determination random number value MR2-2 is a random number value used to determine whether or not the variable display state of the decorative symbol is set to the reach state when the variable display result is “lost”. A value in the range of “1” to “239” is taken.

  The random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type is a random number value used for determining the variation pattern type of the decorative design as any one of a plurality of types prepared in advance, for example, a range of “1” to “241”. Takes the value of The random number value MR4 for determining the variation pattern is a random value used to determine the variation pattern of the decorative design as one of a plurality of types prepared in advance. For example, a value in the range of “1” to “251” is used. Take.

  The random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type is classified into the reach variation pattern type (for example, super reach A or super reach B) in the reach state, or reach. This is a random value for categorizing whether or not the variation pattern type has a specific effect (for example, “slip” effect) when not in a state. Then, after classification, which random pattern MR4 is used to determine which variation pattern in the classified variation pattern type (for example, the variation pattern including which super reach A among the variation pattern types of the classified super reach A) Is determined).

  FIG. 8 shows variations in decorative symbols prepared in advance corresponding to the cases where the variable display mode of decorative symbols is “non-reach” and “reach” when the variable display result is “losing”. It is explanatory drawing which illustrates a pattern. As shown in FIG. 8, in this embodiment, non-reach PA1-1 to non-reach PA1-7 and non-reach PB1- are the variation patterns corresponding to the case where the decorative symbol variable display mode is “non-reach”. 1 and non-reach PB1-2, non-reach PC1-1 and non-reach PC1-2 variation patterns are prepared. In addition, normal PA2-1 to normal PA2-4, super PA3-1 to super PA3-8, super PB3-1 to super PB3− are the variation patterns corresponding to the case where the decorative symbol variable display mode is “reach”. 5. Fluctuation patterns of Super PC 3-1 to Super PC 3-4 are prepared.

  FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a variation pattern of decorative symbols prepared in advance corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “big hit” or “small hit”. As shown in FIG. 9, in this embodiment, normal PA2-5 to normal PA2-8 and super PA4 are used as variation patterns corresponding to the case where the decorative symbol variable display result is “big hit” or “small hit”. -1 to super PA4-8, super PA5-1 to super PA5-4, super PB4-1 to super PB4-4, super PB5-1 to super PB5-4, super PC4-1 and super PC4-2, super PD1 -1 and Super PD1-2, Super PE1-1 and Super PE1-2, Super PF1-1 to Super PF1-3, Special PG1-1 to Special PG1-4, Special PG2-1 to Special PG2-3, Special PG3 Variation patterns of -1 to special PG3-3 are prepared.

  In addition to the game control program, the ROM 54 provided in the game control microcomputer 100 stores various data tables used for controlling the progress of the game. For example, the ROM 54 stores table data constituting a plurality of determination tables and determination tables prepared for the CPU 56 to perform various determinations and determinations. Further, the ROM 54 stores table data constituting a plurality of command tables used for the CPU 56 to transmit control signals serving as various control commands from the main board 31 and a variation pattern for storing a plurality of types of variation patterns of decorative symbols. Table data constituting the table is stored.

  The determination table stored in the ROM 54 includes, for example, a first special figure display result determination table 130A shown in FIG. 10A and a second special figure display result determination table 130B shown in FIG. 10B. ing. The first special symbol display result determination table 130A displays the variable display result as “big hit” before the definite special symbol that becomes the variable display result in the variable display of the first special symbol by the first special symbol display 8a is derived and displayed. In order to determine whether or not to control to the big hit gaming state as "", and whether to control to the small hit gaming state as the "small hit" as the variable display result based on the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result It is a table that is referred to. The first special figure display result determination table 130 is a random number MR1 for determining a special figure display result depending on whether a probability change flag, which will be described later, is OFF or ON (whether or not the gaming state is a probability change state). Are set data (determination data) and the like associated (assigned) with big hit determination value data, small hit determination value data, and loss determination value data. The second special figure display result determination table 130B displays the variable display result as “big hit” before the definite special symbol that becomes the variable display result is derived and displayed in the variable display of the second special symbol by the second special symbol display 8b. ”Is a table referred to for determining whether or not to control the big hit gaming state based on the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result. The second special figure display result determination table 130B decides to assign the random value MR1 for special figure display result determination to the big hit determination value data or the loss determination value data depending on whether the probability variation flag is OFF or ON. Data.

  The determination table stored in the ROM 54 includes a jackpot type determination table 131 shown in FIG. When it is determined that the variable display result is “big hit”, the big hit type determination table 131 sets the decorative symbol variable display mode to “normal”, “based on the random number MR2-1 for jackpot type determination. This table is referred to in order to determine one of a plurality of types of jackpot types such as “first probability variation” to “third probability variation”, “surprise probability”. In the jackpot type determination table 131, the value of a special symbol pointer (special symbol pointer value) to be described later is 1 or 2 (whether it is a jackpot corresponding to variable display of the first special symbol, Depending on whether it is a big hit corresponding to variable display), the random value MR2-1 for jackpot type determination is assigned to the big hit types of “normal”, “first probability variation” to “third probability variation”, “surprise probability” It consists of decision data. Also, the jackpot type determination table 131 sets a value of a jackpot type buffer (a jackpot type buffer value), which will be described later, corresponding to the jackpot type determined based on the random number MR2-1 for determining the jackpot type. Table data (setting data) for setting to any of “04” may be included.

  In this embodiment, in the setting of the jackpot type determination table 131 shown in FIG. 11, depending on whether the special symbol pointer value is 1 or 2, the random value for determining the jackpot type for the jackpot type of “surprise” The assignment of MR2-1 is different. That is, when the special symbol pointer value is 1, the value in the range of “83” to “100” among the random value MR2-1 for jackpot type determination is assigned to the jackpot type of “surprise” When the special symbol pointer value is 2, the random value MR2-1 for determining the big hit type is not assigned to the big hit type of “Success”. With such a setting, when the first start condition for starting variable display of the first special symbol by the first special symbol indicator 8a is satisfied, the jackpot type is determined as one of a plurality of types. The jackpot type is determined based on the fact that the second start condition for starting the variable display of the second special symbol by the second special symbol display 8b is satisfied, and the jackpot type is determined as one of a plurality of types. The ratio determined to be “accurate” can be varied.

  The determination table stored in the ROM 54 includes the big hit variation pattern type determination tables 132A to 132I shown in FIGS. 12 (A) to (F) and FIGS. 13 (A) to (C). The jackpot variation pattern type determination tables 132A to 132I indicate that when it is determined that the variable display result is “big hit”, the variation pattern type is determined according to the determination result of the jackpot type. It is a table that is referenced to determine one of a plurality of types based on the random value MR3. Each of the big hit variation pattern type determination tables 132A to 132I is based on the table selection setting as shown in FIG. The selection table is selected according to the determination result of the jackpot type. Each of the big hit variation pattern type determination tables 132A to 132I has a variation pattern type depending on whether the determination result of the big hit type is “normal”, “first probability variation” to “third probability variation”, or “surprise probability”. The random number MR3 for determination is changed to normal CA3-1, super CA3-2 to super CA3-8, super CB3-1 to super CB3-5, special CA4-1, special CA4-2, special CB4-1, special CB4. -2, data for determination to be assigned to any one of the variation patterns of special CC4-1 and special CC4-2.

  As an example, focusing on the case where the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is the normal state, the big hit variation pattern shown in FIG. 12 (A) used when the big hit type is “normal” or “third probability variation”. In the type determination table 132A and the big hit variation pattern type determination table 132B shown in FIG. 12B used when the big hit type is “first probability variation”, the fluctuation pattern of the normal CA3-1 and super CA3-2. The assignment of the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type to the type is different. In addition, in the big hit variation pattern type determination table 132A, the random value MR3 for variation pattern type determination is assigned to the variation pattern type of the super CA3-3, while in the big hit variation pattern type determination table 132B, the super CA3. The random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type is not assigned to the variation pattern type -3. On the other hand, in the big hit variation pattern type determination table 132A, the random value MR3 for variation pattern type determination is not assigned to the variation pattern type of the super CA 3-4, whereas in the big hit variation pattern type determination table 132B, the super CA3 The random pattern value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type is assigned to the variation pattern type -4. Thus, paying attention to the case where the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is one of the normal state, the probability variation state, and the short-time state, the variation pattern type determination table for big hit that is selected in accordance with the big hit type in the gaming state 132A to 132D (selected in the normal state), big hit variation pattern type determination tables 132E to 132H (selected in the probability variation state), big hit variation pattern type determination tables 132A to 132C, 132I (in the short time state) When the selection) is compared with each other, the allocation of the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type for each variation pattern type is different according to the jackpot type, and the variation pattern type is different for the variation pattern type depending on the jackpot type. A random number value MR3 for determination is assigned. As a result, it is possible to determine different variation pattern types according to the determination result as to which of the plurality of types of jackpot types, and it is possible to vary the ratio determined for the same variation pattern type.

  In particular, in the big hit variation pattern type determination tables 132D, 132H, and 132I used when the big hit type is “probability”, for example, special CA4-1, special CA4-2, special CB4-1, special CB4-2, special When the big hit type is other than “surprise” such as CC4-1 or special CC4-2, the random number value for determining the variation pattern type is compared with the variation pattern type to which the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type is not assigned. MR3 is assigned. As a result, when the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “surprise”, when the control is set to the two round big hit state, the variation pattern type is determined to be different from the case of controlling to the 15 round big hit state. can do.

  As another example, focusing on the case where the jackpot type is determined to be “normal”, the jackpot shown in FIG. The fluctuation pattern type determination table 132A for use and the big hit use fluctuation pattern type determination table 132E shown in FIG. The assignment of the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type to the type is different. In addition, in the big hit variation pattern type determination table 132A, the random value MR3 for variation pattern type determination is assigned to the variation pattern type of the super CA3-3, while in the big hit variation pattern type determination table 132E, the super CA3. The random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type is not assigned to the variation pattern type -3. Thus, paying attention to the case where the big hit type is determined as one of “normal”, “first probability variation” to “third probability variation”, or “surprise probability”, it is selected according to the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 Jackpot variation pattern type determination tables 132A and 132E (selected when “normal” or “third probability variation”), jackpot variation pattern type determination tables 132B and 132F (selected when “first probability variation”), When the big hit variation pattern type determination tables 132C and 132G (selected when “second probability variation”) and the big hit variation pattern type determination tables 132D, 132H and 132I (selected when “surprise probability”) are compared with each other, pachinko games Variation pattern type determination for each variation pattern type depending on whether the gaming state in the machine 1 is a normal state, a short time state, or a probable variation state Are different random value assignment of MR3 of, also, may be assigned the variation pattern type determination random number value for MR3 for different variation pattern type according to the playing state. This makes it possible to determine different variation pattern types depending on whether the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a normal state, a short-time state or a probable variation state, and is determined to be the same variation pattern type. The ratio can be varied.

  The determination table stored in the ROM 54 includes small hit variation pattern type determination tables 133A to 133C shown in FIGS. The small hit variation pattern type determination tables 133A to 133C have a plurality of variation pattern types based on the random value MR3 for variation pattern type determination when it is determined that the variable display result is “small hit”. A table that is referenced to determine one of the types. In each of the small hit variation pattern type determination tables 133A to 133C, for example, according to the table selection setting as shown in FIG. 14D, whether the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is the normal state, the probability variation state, or the short-time state. Is selected as a use table. Each of the small hit variation pattern type determination tables 133A to 133C is used for determining that the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type is assigned to any one of the variation pattern types of the special CA4-1, the special CB4-1, and the special CC4-1. It consists of data.

  Here, the variation pattern type of the special CA4-1 to which the random value MR3 for variation pattern type determination is assigned in the variation pattern type determination table 133A for small hits shown in FIG. 14A is shown in FIG. The random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern type is also assigned in the big hit variation pattern type determination table 132D shown in FIG. The variation pattern type of the special CB4-1 to which the random value MR3 for variation pattern type determination is assigned in the variation pattern type determination table 133B for small hits shown in FIG. 14B is a big hit shown in FIG. The random pattern MR3 for determining the variation pattern type is also assigned in the variation pattern type determination table 132H for use. In the variation pattern type of the special CC4-1 to which the random value MR3 for variation pattern type determination is assigned in the variation pattern type determination table 133C for small hits shown in FIG. 14C, the big hit shown in FIG. Also in the fluctuation pattern type determination table 132I for use, a random value MR3 for determination of the fluctuation pattern type is assigned. As described above, the variation pattern types of the special CA 4-1, the special CB 4-1, and the special CC 4-1 are common variations in the case where the big hit type is “surprise” and the variable display result is “small hit”. It is a pattern type. That is, the big hit variation pattern type determination table 132D shown in FIG. 12 (D), the big hit variation pattern type determination table 132H shown in FIG. 13 (B), and FIG. The big hit variation pattern type determination table 132I shown in C) is set so as to include a variation pattern type that is common to the variation pattern type determined when the variable display result is “small hit”.

  The determination table stored in the ROM 54 includes reach determination tables 134A to 134C shown in FIGS. The reach determination tables 134A to 134C indicate whether or not the variable display state of the decorative symbols is set to the reach state when it is determined that the variable display result is “lost”, and the reach determination random number MR2- 2 is a table referred to for determination based on 2. Each reach determination table 134A to 134C is used depending on whether the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is the normal state, the probability variation state, or the short-time state, for example, according to the table selection setting as shown in FIG. Selected as a table. The reach determination tables 134A to 134C are used to determine reach determination random numbers MR2-2 as non-reach HA1-1 to non-reach HA1-5, non-reach HB1-1, non-reach HB1-2, non-reach HC1-1, Determination to be assigned to either a determination result indicating that the reach state is not reached such as non-reach HC1-2 or a determination result indicating reach state such as reach HA2-1 to reach HA2-3, reach HB2-1, reach HC2-1 Data.

  Here, for example, in the setting of the reach determination table 134A shown in FIG. 15A, corresponding to the case where the total reserved storage number is “0”, among the random numbers MR2-2 for reach determination, “1” to A value in the range of “204” is assigned to the determination result of the non-reach HA 1-1, while a value in the range of “205” to “239” is assigned to the determination result of the reach HA 2-1. Corresponding to the case where the total reserved storage number is “1”, “1” to “217”, which are larger than the number of random number values assigned to the non-reach HA 1-1 among the random numbers MR2-2 for reach determination. Is assigned to the determination result of non-reach HA1-2. Furthermore, corresponding to the case where the total number of reserved storage is “2”, the number of random numbers MR2-2 for reach determination is larger than the number of random values assigned to non-reach HA1-1 and non-reach HA1-2. A value in the range of “1” to “220” is assigned to the determination result of non-reach HA1-3. The non-reach HA1 among the random numbers MR2-2 for reach determination corresponding to each of the case where the total number of reserved storage is “3” or “4” or any one of “5” to “8”. A value in the range of “1” to “230”, which is larger than the number of random numbers assigned to each of the determination results of −1 to non-reach HA 1-3, is used as the determination result of non-reach HA 1-4 or non-reach HA 1-5. assign. With this setting, when the total number of reserved memories is equal to or greater than a predetermined number (eg, “3”), it is determined that the decorative symbol variable display state is set to the reach state as compared to when the total number is less than the predetermined number. The ratio is lower. If the average special figure fluctuation time in the fluctuation pattern corresponding to “non-reach” is set to be shorter than the average special figure fluctuation time in the fluctuation pattern corresponding to “reach”, the total When the reserved storage number is equal to or greater than the predetermined number, the average special figure fluctuation time can be shortened as compared to when the number is less than the predetermined number.

  FIG. 16 is an explanatory diagram showing reach occurrence probabilities when it is decided not to make a big hit or a small hit. In this embodiment, using the reach determination tables 134A, 134B, and 134C shown in FIG. 15, it is determined whether or not to execute the reach effect with the probability shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 16, in this embodiment, when the gaming state is the normal state, it is determined that the reach effect is executed with a probability of 3.8% if the total number of reserved memories is three or more, If the total number of reserved memories is 2, it is determined to execute the reach effect with a probability of 7.9%, and if the total number of reserved memories is 1, it is determined to execute the reach effect with a probability of 9.2%, If the total number of reserved memories is 0, it is determined that the reach effect is executed with a probability of 14.6%. Regardless of the total number of reserved memories, if the gaming state is a probabilistic state, it is determined that the reach effect is executed with a probability of 1.7%. It is decided to execute the reach production.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 16, when the gaming state is the normal state, when the total number of reserved memories (that is, the total number of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number) is large, The frequency of performing the reach effect during the variable display is reduced. Therefore, the operating rate of the variable display can be improved, and the processing load on the game control means (specifically, the game control microcomputer 560) is reduced. Even when the gaming state is a probability change state or a short time state, the frequency of executing the reach effect may be reduced when the total number of reserved memories is large. Further, according to the gaming state, when the total number of reserved memories is large, the frequency of executing the reach effect may be increased. By doing so, it is possible to prolong the effect by the variable display and to improve the interest in the game.

  The determination table stored in the ROM 54 includes reach variation pattern type determination tables 135A to 135C shown in FIGS. The reach variation pattern type determination tables 135A to 135C include a plurality of variation pattern types based on a random value MR3 for variation pattern type determination when it is determined that the decorative symbol variable display state is set to the reach state. A table that is referenced to determine one of the types. Each reach variation pattern type determination table 135A to 135C is selected as a use table according to the determination result indicating reach state such as reach HA2-1 to reach HA2-3, reach HB2-1, reach HC2-1. The That is, the reach variation pattern type determination table 135A is selected as a usage table according to the determination results of the reach HA2-1 to the reach HA2-3, and the reach variation pattern type determination table 135B according to the determination result of the reach HB2-1. Is selected as the usage table, and the variation pattern type determination table for reach 135C is selected as the usage table in accordance with the determination result of the reach HC2-1. Each of the reach variation pattern type determination tables 135A to 135C indicates whether the determination result indicating the reach state is one of the reach HA2-1 to the reach HA2-3, the reach HB2-1, and the reach HC2-1. The random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type is composed of data for determination assigned to any one of the variation pattern types of normal CA2-1, super CA2-2, super CA2-3, super CB2-1, and super CB2-2. Has been.

  Here, for example, in the setting of the reach variation pattern type determination table 135A shown in FIG. 17A, “1” to “1” of the random value MR3 for variation pattern type determination corresponding to the determination result of the reach HA2-1. A value in the range of “128” is assigned to the variation pattern type of normal CA2-1, while other random values are assigned to the variation pattern types of super CA2-2 and super CA2-3. Corresponding to the determination result of reach HA2-2, a value in the range of “1” to “170” is assigned to the variation pattern type of normal CA2-1 in the random value MR3 for variation pattern type determination. Further, in response to the determination result of reach HA2-3, a value in the range of "1" to "182" is assigned to the variation pattern type of normal CA2-1 among the random value MR3 for variation pattern type determination. The determination result of the reach HA 2-1 indicates that the reach determination random number MR 2-2 corresponds to the case where the total number of reserved memories is “0” according to the setting of the reach determination table 134 A shown in FIG. Assigned. As the determination result of the reach HA 2-2, the random number value MR2-2 for the reach determination is assigned corresponding to the case where the total reserved storage number is “1” or “2”. The determination result of the reach HA2-3 indicates that the reach holding memory number is “3”, “4”, or “5” to “8”. A random value MR2-2 is assigned. With these settings, when the total number of reserved memories is a predetermined number (for example, “1”) or more, the fluctuation pattern of the normal CA 2-1 in which the “normal” reach effect is executed is compared to when the total number is less than the predetermined number. The rate determined for the type increases. And the average special figure fluctuation time in the fluctuation pattern that executes the “normal” reach production is set to be shorter than the average special figure fluctuation time in the fluctuation pattern that executes the reach production other than “normal”. If so, when the total number of reserved memories is equal to or greater than the predetermined number, the average special figure fluctuation time can be shortened as compared to when the total number is less than the predetermined number.

  The determination table stored in the ROM 54 includes non-reach variation pattern type determination tables 136A to 136C shown in FIGS. The non-reach variation pattern type determination tables 136A to 136C indicate that when it is determined that the variable display state of the decorative symbol is not the reach state, the variation pattern type is based on the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern type. It is a table that is referred to in order to determine one of a plurality of types. The non-reach variation pattern type determination tables 136A to 136C include non-reach HA1-1 to non-reach HA1-5, non-reach HB1-1, non-reach HB1-2, non-reach HC1-1, and non-reach HC1-2. The table is selected as a use table according to the determination result indicating that the reach state is not set. That is, the non-reach variation pattern type determination table 136A is selected as a use table in accordance with the determination results of the non-reach HA 1-1 to non-reach HA 1-5, and the determination results of the non-reach HB1-1 and non-reach HB1-2. Accordingly, the non-reach variation pattern type determination table 136B is selected as the use table, and the non-reach variation pattern type determination table 136C is selected as the use table according to the determination results of the non-reach HC1-1 and non-reach HC1-2. The In each of the non-reach variation pattern type determination tables 136A to 136C, the determination result indicating that the reach state is not set is non-reach HA1-1 to non-reach HA1-5, non-reach HB1-1, non-reach HB1-2, non-reach HC1. -1 and non-reach HC1-2, the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type is determined as non-reach CA1-1 to non-reach CA1-4, non-reach CB1-1 to non-reach CB1-. 3 and determination data to be assigned to any of the variation pattern types of non-reach CC1-1 to non-reach CC1-3.

  The determination table stored in the ROM 54 includes hit variation pattern determination tables 137A to 137C shown in FIGS. 19, 20A and 20B. The hit variation pattern determination tables 137A to 137C indicate the variation pattern according to the determination result of the big hit type or the variation pattern type when it is determined that the variable display result is “big hit” or “small hit”. This is a table that is referred to in order to determine one of a plurality of types based on the random number MR4 for determining the variation pattern. Each of the variation pattern determination tables 137A to 137C is selected as a usage table according to the determination result of the variation pattern type. That is, the hit variation pattern determination table 137A is selected as the use table in accordance with the determination result that the variation pattern type is either normal CA3-1 or super CA3-2 to super CA3-8, and the variation pattern type is super CB3. -1 to Super CB3-5, the hit variation pattern determination table 137B is selected as a use table according to the determination result, and the variation pattern type is special CA4-1, special CA4-2, special CB4-1, The hit variation pattern determination table 137C is selected as the use table in accordance with the determination result indicating that any one of the special CB4-2, the special CC4-1, and the special CC4-2 is used. Each of the hit variation pattern determination tables 137A to 137C includes a random number MR4 for determining the variation pattern according to the variation pattern type, and a plurality of variations corresponding to the case where the decorative symbol variable display result is “big hit” or “small hit”. It consists of decision data assigned to one of the types of variation patterns.

  Further, the determination table stored in the ROM 54 includes the loss variation patterns 138A and 138B shown in FIGS. The loss variation pattern determination tables 138A and 138B indicate the change pattern according to whether or not to reach the reach state and the determination result of the change pattern type when it is determined that the variable display result is “lost”. This is a table that is referred to in order to determine one of a plurality of types based on the random number MR4 for determining the variation pattern. Each loss variation pattern determination table 138A, 138B is selected as a use table according to the determination result of the variation pattern type. That is, in the determination result that the variation pattern type is any one of non-reach CA1-1 to non-reach CA1-4, non-reach CB1-1 to non-reach CB1-3, non-reach CC1-1 to non-reach CC1-3. Accordingly, the loss variation pattern determination table 138A is selected as a use table, and the variation pattern type is determined to be one of normal CA2-1, super CA2-2, super CA2-3, super CB2-1, super CB2-2. The loss variation pattern determination table 138B is selected as a usage table according to the result. The loss variation pattern determination table 138A corresponds to the case where the random display value MR4 for determining the variation pattern is “loss” and the variable display mode is “non-reach” according to the variation pattern type. Data for determination to be assigned to any one of the plurality of types of variation patterns. The loss variation pattern determination table 138B corresponds to a case where the random display value MR4 for variation pattern determination corresponds to the variation pattern type when the decorative pattern variable display result is “lost” and the variable display mode is “reach”. It consists of data for determination assigned to one of a plurality of types of variation patterns.

  Here, in the setting of the loss fluctuation pattern determination table 138A shown in FIG. 21, non-reach PA1-4 to non-reach corresponds to the case of non-reach fluctuation pattern types such as non-reach CA1-4 and non-reach CC1-3. A random number value MR4 for determining a variation pattern is assigned to a variation pattern for executing a specific effect such as reach PA1-7. Also, in response to the variation pattern type of non-reach CB1-3, a specific effect in which the value in the range of “1” to “100” of the random value MR4 for variation pattern determination is “end of development opportunity eye” is executed. Assigned to the non-reach PA1-7 fluctuation pattern. With such a setting, non-reach PA1-4 to non-reach corresponds to the determination that the decorative symbol variable display result is “losing” and the determination that the decorative symbol variable display state is not the reach state. It is possible to determine that one of the variation patterns of the reach PA1-7 and perform an effect operation as a specific effect.

  For the variation pattern type of non-reach CA1-4, non-reach HA1- of the random value MR3 for variation pattern type determination in the non-reach variation pattern type determination table 136A shown in FIG. A value in the range of “217” to “241” is assigned corresponding to 1, and a value in the range of “230” to “241” is assigned to correspond to the non-reach HA 1-2. A value in the range of “231” to “241” is assigned corresponding to HA1-3, and a range of “237” to “241” corresponding to each of non-reach HA1-4 and non-reach HA1-5. Value is assigned. Here, for the determination result of non-reach HA1-1, in the reach determination table 134A shown in FIG. 15A, the reach determination disturbance corresponds to the case where the total number of reserved storage is “0”. A value in the range of “1” to “204” is assigned to the numerical value MR2-2. For the determination result of the non-reach HA1-2, in the reach determination table 134A, the total reserved storage number corresponds to “1” and “1” to “217” among the random numbers MR2-2 for reach determination. A value in the range is assigned. For the determination result of the non-reach HA1-3, in the reach determination table 134A, the total reserved storage number corresponds to “2” and “1” to “220” among the random numbers MR2-2 for reach determination. A value in the range is assigned. For the determination result of non-reach HA1-4, in the reach determination table 134A, the total number of reserved memories corresponds to “3”, “4”, and “1” of the reach determination random number MR2-2. A value in the range of “230” is assigned. For the determination result of non-reach HA 1-5, “1” in the reach determination random number MR <b> 2-2 for the reach determination corresponding to the total reserved storage number “5” to “8” in the reach determination table 134 </ b> A. A value in the range of “230” is assigned. Therefore, when the total number of reserved memories is “1” or “2”, the ratio determined as the variation pattern type of non-reach CA1-4 is larger than when the total number of reserved memories is “0”. Lower. Further, when the total number of reserved memories is “3”, “4” or “5” to “8”, the total number of reserved memories is “0”, or “1” or “2”. Compared with the case of "", the ratio determined as the variation pattern type of non-reach CA1-4 is low.

  In the example of the fluctuation pattern shown in FIG. 8, the special figure fluctuation time in the fluctuation pattern of the non-reach PA1-1 in which the specific effect is not executed is 5.75 seconds, and the special figure fluctuation time in the fluctuation pattern of the non-reach PA1-2. 3.75 seconds, and the special figure fluctuation time in the fluctuation pattern of non-reach PA1-3 is 1.50 seconds. On the other hand, the special figure fluctuation time in the fluctuation pattern of the non-reach PA1-4 in which the “slip” specific effect is executed is 8.25 seconds, and the non-reach PA1 in which the “pseudo-continuous” specific effect is executed. The special figure fluctuation time in the fluctuation pattern of −5 is 16.70 seconds, the special figure fluctuation time in the fluctuation pattern of the non-reach PA 1-6 in which the specific effect of “Intro” is executed is 10.20 seconds, The special figure fluctuation time in the fluctuation pattern of the non-reach PA 1-7 in which the specific effect “end of development opportunity end” is executed is 9.25 seconds. That is, the special figure change time in the variation pattern in which the specific effect is executed corresponding to “non-reach” is longer than the special figure change time in the change pattern in which the specific effect is not executed. When the total number of reserved memories is “1” or more, the ratio determined as the variation pattern type of the non-reach CA 1-4 that executes the specific effect is lower than when it is “0”. In addition, when the total number of reserved memories is “3” or more, the ratio determined as the variation pattern type of non-reach CA1-4 is lower than that when it is less than “3”. Thus, when the total number of reserved memories is greater than or equal to the predetermined number, the average special figure fluctuation time can be shortened as compared to when the total number is less than the predetermined number.

  In the setting of the losing fluctuation pattern determination table 138B shown in FIG. 22, the fluctuation for executing the “normal” reach effect such as normal PA2-1 to normal PA2-4 corresponding to the case where the fluctuation pattern type is normal CA2-1. A random number MR4 for determining a variation pattern is assigned to the pattern. Corresponding to the case of the variation pattern type of super CA2-2, the variation pattern for executing the reach effect α1 such as super PA3-1 to super PA3-4 and the reach effect such as super PA3-5 to super PA3-8. A random value MR4 for determining a variation pattern is assigned to the variation pattern for executing α2. Corresponding to the case where the variation pattern type is super CA2-3 or super CB2-1, the random value MR4 for variation pattern determination is included in the variation pattern for executing the reach effect β1 such as super PB3-1 to super PB3-5. Assigned.

  In addition, for example, the variation pattern for executing the “pseudo-continuous” specific effect, such as the variation pattern of Super PA 3-4, Super PA 3-8, and Super PB 3-4, is a decorative pattern after the pseudo-continuous variation is performed. The variation pattern type is classified according to the type of effect operation in the reach effect executed based on the fact that the variable display state becomes the reach state. That is, since the fluctuation pattern of the super PA 3-4 is a fluctuation pattern for executing the reach effect α1, this corresponds to the case of the fluctuation pattern type of the super CA 2-2 in the loss fluctuation pattern determination table 138B shown in FIG. Thus, a random value MR4 for determining the variation pattern is assigned. Since the variation pattern of the super PA 3-8 is a variation pattern that executes the reach effect α2, the variation pattern determination table 138B corresponds to the variation pattern type of the super CA 2-2 in the variation variation pattern determination table 138B. The random value MR4 is assigned. Since the variation pattern of the super PB 3-4 is a variation pattern for executing the reach effect β1, it corresponds to the case where the variation pattern type of the super CA 2-3 or the super CB 2-1 is set in the loss variation pattern determination table 138B. The random value MR4 for determining the variation pattern is assigned.

  For the variation pattern types of normal CA2-1 and super CA2-2, the variation pattern type determination is performed in any of the reach variation pattern type determination tables 135A to 135C shown in FIGS. A random value MR3 is assigned. Also, the random pattern value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type is assigned to the variation pattern type of the super CA2-3 in the reach variation pattern type determination tables 135A and 135C shown in FIGS. 17A and 17C. ing. For the variation pattern type of super CB2-1, a random value MR3 for variation pattern type determination is assigned in the reach variation pattern type determination table 135B shown in FIG. As described above, in the reach variation pattern type determination tables 135A to 135C shown in FIGS. 17A to 17C, the effect in the reach effect that is executed based on the fact that the variable display state of the decorative symbols has reached the reach state. Table data (determination data) is configured so that it can be determined as one of the variation pattern types classified according to the type of operation. In addition, in the reach variation pattern type determination tables 135A to 135C, after the specific effect of “pseudo-continuous” is executed, the effect operation in the reach effect that is executed based on the fact that the variable display state of the decorative symbols has reached the reach state. The table data is configured so that it can be determined as one of the variation pattern types classified by type.

  Next, each random number used in the effect control process in the effect control microcomputer 100 will be described. On the effect control board 80, for example, a random number circuit (not shown) or the like counts numerical data indicating various random values used for controlling the effect operation in an updatable manner. FIG. 23 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a random number value counted on the side of the effect control board 80. As shown in FIG. 23, in this embodiment, on the side of the effect control board 80, random numbers SR1-1 to SR1-3 for determining the first to third final stop symbols, temporary stop symbol determination for promotion effect Random number value SR2, random number value SR3 for determining the temporary stop symbol at the time of sliding / development chance, random number values SR4-1 to SR4-3 for determining the first to third pseudo-temporary temporary stop symbols, for determining the promotion effect execution Random number SR5, random numbers SR6-1 to SR6-3 for determining the first to third specific effect patterns, random values SR7 for determining the notice pattern type, random values SR8- for determining the first to third notice patterns Numerical data indicating each of 1 to SR8-3 is controlled to be countable. In addition, in order to improve a production effect, random numbers other than these may be used. The random number circuit mounted on the effect control board 80 includes these random number values SR1-1 to SR1-3, SR2, SR3, SR4-1 to SR4-3, SR5, SR6-1 to SR6-3, SR7, SR8-1. Any numerical data may be used as long as it counts numerical data indicating all or part of SR8-3. The effect control CPU 101 uses a random counter different from the random number circuit, such as a random counter provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 shown in FIG. SR1-1 to SR1-3, SR2, SR3, SR4-1 to SR4-3, SR5, SR6-1 to SR6-3, SR7, SR8-1 to SR8-3 are counted so as to count numerical data It may be. When the effect control board 80 is not equipped with a random number circuit, the effect control CPU 101 uses the random counter to select random values SR1-1 to SR1-3, SR2, SR3, SR4-1 to SR4-3. , SR5, SR6-1 to SR6-3, SR7, SR8-1 to SR8-3 may be counted.

  Random values SR1-1 to SR1-3 for determining the first to third final stop symbols are “left” and “middle” in the display area of the image display device 9 as fixed decorative symbols that are variable display results of decorative symbols. , A random number value used to determine a decorative symbol (final stop symbol) to be stopped and displayed in each “right” decorative symbol display area. The final stop symbols here are three decorative symbols that are finally stopped and displayed in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas when the variable display of the decorative symbols ends. That is. As an example, the random number value SR1-1 for determining the first final stop symbol takes a value in the range of “1” to “80”, and the random value SR1-2 for determining the second final stop symbol is “1” to “ The random number value SR1-3 for determining the third final stop symbol takes a value in the range of “1” to “96”.

  The random value SR2 for determining the temporary stop symbol during the promotion effect is a normal jackpot combination that is temporarily stopped and displayed in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas when executing the changing promotion effect. Is a random value used for determining the decorative pattern of, and takes a value in the range of “1” to “80”. The random value SR3 for determining the temporary stop symbol at the time of slipping / development chance is “left”, “medium”, when executing the specific effect of “slip” or when executing the specific effect of “developed chance”, This is a random value used for determining the decorative symbols to be temporarily stopped and displayed in all or part of the “right” decorative symbol display area, and takes a value in the range of “1” to “101”.

  The random numbers SR4-1 to SR4-3 for determining the first to third pseudo-temporary temporary stop symbols are “left”, “middle”, and “right” when executing a specific effect of “pseudo-continuous”. This is a random value used to determine a combination of temporary stop symbols to be temporarily stopped and displayed in each decorative symbol display area as one of the pseudo consecutive chances GC1 to GC8. As an example, the first pseudo-random temporary stop symbol determination random value SR4-1 takes a value in the range of “1” to “211”, and the second pseudo-simultaneous temporary stop symbol determination random value SR4-2. Takes a value in the range of “1” to “229”, and the random value SR4-3 for determining the third pseudo-temporary temporary stop symbol takes a value in the range of “1” to “311”.

  When the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “normal”, “first probability variation” to “third probability variation”, the random effect value SR5 for promotion effect execution determination Or a random number value used for determining whether or not to execute the promotion effect during the big hit, and takes a value in the range of “1” to “100”.

  The random values SR6-1 to SR6-3 for determining the first to third specific effect patterns are specified corresponding to the contents of the effect operation when executing the specific effects such as “slip”, “pseudo train”, and “intro”. It is a random value used to determine the effect pattern as one of a plurality of types. As an example, the random value SR6-1 for determining the first specific effect pattern is used to determine the specific effect pattern in the case of executing the “slip” specific effect, and is in the range of “1” to “71”. Takes a value. The random value SR6-2 for determining the second specific effect pattern is used to determine the specific effect pattern in the case of executing the “pseudo-continuous” specific effect, and a value in the range of “1” to “150” is used. Take. The random number SR6-3 for determining the third specific effect pattern is used to determine a specific effect pattern in the case of executing the specific effect of “Intro”, and takes a value in the range of “1” to “100”. .

  The random value SR7 for determining the notice pattern type is used to determine whether or not to execute the notice effect, and to determine any one of a plurality of kinds of prepared notice pattern types when the notice effect is executed. It is a random value and takes a value in the range of “1” to “191”. The random numbers SR8-1 to SR8-3 for determining the first to third notice patterns are random values used to determine any one of a plurality of kinds of prepared notice patterns. As an example, the random value SR8-1 for determining the first notice pattern is used to determine the notice pattern in the notice effect of “character display”, and takes a value in the range of “1” to “499”. The random value SR8-2 for determining the second notice pattern is used to determine the notice pattern in the notice effect of the “step-up image”, and takes a value in the range of “1” to “1009”. The random value SR8-3 for determining the third notice pattern is used to determine the notice pattern in the notice effect of “mail display”, and takes a value in the range of “1” to “200”.

  The ROM 112 mounted on the effect control board 80 stores various data tables used for controlling the effect operation in addition to the effect control program. For example, the ROM 112 stores table data constituting a plurality of determination tables, determination tables, and control pattern tables prepared for the production control CPU 101 to perform various determinations, determinations, and settings.

  In addition, the determination table stored in the ROM 112 is, for example, as shown in FIG. 24A to FIG. 24D as a table for determining a predetermined decorative pattern that is one of a predetermined non-reach combination and development chance items HC1 to HC8. Final stop symbol determination tables 160A to 160D are included. The final stop symbol determination table 160A shown in FIG. 24A is a left final stop that becomes a finalized decorative symbol that is stopped and displayed in the “left” decorative symbol display area among the predetermined decorative symbols that are predetermined non-reach combinations. It is a table referred to in order to determine the symbol FZ1-1 based on the random number SR1-1 for determining the first final stop symbol. The final stop symbol determination table 160A includes determination data that assigns the random number SR1-1 for determining the first final stop symbol to the symbol numbers “1” to “8” of the decorative symbols that become the left final stop symbol FZ1-1. It is composed of The final stop symbol determination table 160B shown in FIG. 24B is a right final stop that becomes a finalized decorative symbol that is stopped and displayed in the “right” decorative symbol display area among the predetermined decorative symbols that are a predetermined non-reach combination. It is a table referred to for determining the symbol FZ1-2 based on the left final stop symbol FZ1-1 and the random number SR1-2 for determining the second final stop symbol. The final stop symbol determination table 160B stores the random number SR1-2 for determining the second final stop symbol in accordance with the symbol numbers “1” to “8” of the decorative symbols determined as the left final stop symbol FZ1-1. It consists of decision data assigned to the symbol numbers “1” to “8” of the decorative symbols that will be the right final stop symbol FZ1-2. The final stop symbol determination table 160C shown in FIG. 24C is a medium final stop that becomes a fixed decorative symbol that is stopped and displayed in the “medium” decorative symbol display area among the fixed decorative symbols that are predetermined non-reach combinations. This is a table referred to for determining the symbol FZ1-3 based on the left final stop symbol FZ1-1, the right final stop symbol FZ1-2, the random number SR1-3 for determining the third final stop symbol, and the like.

  Here, the determination table stored in the ROM 112 includes a left / right turn determination table 161 as shown in FIG. It is determined whether the left / right output type DC1-1 corresponds to LR0, LR11 to LR18, or LR31 to LR38. The final stop symbol determination table 160C has a third random number SR1- 3 is made up of data for determination assigned to the symbol numbers “1” to “8” of the decorative symbols that are the middle final stop symbols FZ1-3.

  In the final stop symbol determination table 160B shown in FIG. 24 (B), the symbol number of the decorative symbol that becomes the left final stop symbol FZ1-1 and the symbol number of the decorative symbol that becomes the right final stop symbol FZ1-2 are the same. Is not assigned the random number SR1-2 for determining the second final stop symbol. With such an assignment, when a final decorative symbol that is a predetermined non-reach combination is determined as the final stop symbol, the final decorative symbol combination is a reach combination or a jackpot combination (except for the odd chance TC1 to TC4). It can be avoided. Also, in the final stop symbol determination table 160C shown in FIG. 24C, combinations of the left final stop symbol FZ1-1, the right final stop symbol FZ1-2, and the middle final stop symbol FZ1-3 are predetermined decorative symbols. The random number value SR1-3 for determining the third final stop symbol is not assigned to the portion that becomes the combination of. For example, even if it is other than the reach combination or the big hit combination, the part that becomes the pseudo consecutive chances GC1 to GC8 shown in FIG. 5A, the part that becomes the development chances HC1 to HC8 shown in FIG. The random number value SR1-3 for determining the third final stop symbol is set in the portion that becomes the odd chance TC1 to TC4 shown in FIG. 5C, and further in the portion that becomes a certain non-reach combination as shown in FIG. Not assigned. With such an assignment, when a final decorative symbol that is a predetermined non-reach combination is determined as the final stop symbol, the final decorative symbol is a pseudo-continuous chance item GC1 to GC8, an expansion chance item HC1 to HC8, or a random chance item TC1. ˜TC4, and even non-reach combinations similar to these chances.

  The final stop symbol determination table 160D shown in FIG. 24D is the final stop symbol display area in each of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas when the “development chance end” specific effect is executed. Based on the random number value SR1-1 for determining the first final stop symbol, the combination of the confirmed decorative symbols that become the stop symbols FZ1-4, FZ1-5, and FZ1-6 is determined as one of the development chance items HC1 to HC8. This is a table to be referred to. The final stop symbol determination table 160D is composed of determination data that assigns the random number SR1-1 for determining the first final stop symbol to the development chance items HC1 to HC8.

  Further, the determination table stored in the ROM 112 includes, for example, final stop symbol determination tables 162A and 162B shown in FIGS. 27A and 27B as tables for determining a final decorative symbol to be a reach-losing combination. Yes. The final stop symbol determination table 162A shown in FIG. 27A is a left final stop symbol FZ2- that becomes a finalized symbol that is stopped and displayed in the “left” decorative symbol display area among the finalized symbols that are reach-losing combinations. 1 and the right final stop symbol FZ2-2, which is the final symbol to be stopped and displayed in the “right” decorative symbol display area, are determined based on the random number SR1-1 for determining the first final stop symbol. This is a table to be referred to. The final stop symbol determination table 162A is a decorative symbol (left and right final stop symbol FZ2) in which the random number SR1-1 for determining the first final stop symbol is the same as the left final stop symbol FZ2-1 and the right final stop symbol FZ2-2. −1, FZ2-2), the data for determination to be assigned to symbol numbers “1” to “8”. The final stop symbol determination table 162B shown in FIG. 27B is a middle final stop symbol FZ2- that becomes a finalized symbol that is stopped and displayed in the “medium” symbol pattern display area among the finalized symbols that are reach-losing combinations. 3 is a table referred to for determining 3 based on the random number SR1-3 for determining the third final stop symbol.

  Here, the middle final stop symbol FZ2-3 constituting the reach-losing combination is specified by a symbol difference which is a difference value from the symbol number of the decorative symbol which becomes the left final stop symbol FZ2-1 or the right final stop symbol FZ2-2. The That is, in the variable display of the decorative symbols, the decorative symbols start to change in the decorative symbol display areas of “left”, “middle”, and “right”, and the predetermined order of “left” → “right” → “middle” is started. When displaying a fixed decorative pattern that will result in variable display of decorative symbols in, the “left” and “right” decorative symbol display areas other than the “medium” decorative symbol display area where the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed last. After the left and right final stop symbols FZ2-1 and FZ2-2 that are stopped and displayed are determined using the final stop symbol determination table 162A, the final stop symbol determination table 162B is used to stop in the “medium” decorative symbol display area. The difference (design difference) between the displayed middle final stop symbol FZ2-3 and the left and right final stop symbols FZ2-1 and FZ2-2 is determined. In accordance with the symbol difference determined at this time, the final decorative symbol that is the middle final stop symbol FZ2-3 that is stopped and displayed in the “medium” decorative symbol display area is determined. The final stop symbol determination table 162B is a variation pattern of normal PA2-1, normal PA2-2, special PG2-1, special PG2-2, or any of normal PA2-3 and normal PA2-4. If it is one of the fluctuation patterns of Super PA3-1 to Super PA3-4, Super PB3-1 to PB3-5, Super PC3-1 to Super PC3-4, Special PG2-3, Super PA3- The random number SR1-3 for determining the third final stop symbol is changed to symbol differences “−2”, “−1”, “+1”, depending on the case of any one of the fluctuation patterns of 5 to super PA3-8. It is composed of data for determination to be assigned to “+2”.

  In addition, the determination table stored in the ROM 112 is a final stop symbol shown in, for example, FIGS. 28A to 28C as a table for determining a definite decorative symbol to be one of the big hit combinations and the chances of success TC1 to TC4. Determination tables 163A to 163C are included. The final stop symbol determination table 163A shown in FIG. 28 (A) is a middle left symbol that is stopped and displayed in each of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas as a fixed symbol pattern that is a normal jackpot combination. It is a table referred to for determining the right final stop symbol FZ3-1, FZ3-2, FZ3-3 based on the random number SR1-1 for determining the first final stop symbol. In the final stop symbol determination table 163A, the random number SR1-1 for determining the first final stop symbol is the same as the symbol number “of the normal symbol that is the same as the left middle right final stop symbol FZ3-1, FZ3-2, FZ3-3. It is composed of data for determination to be assigned to “2”, “4”, “6”, “8”. The final stop symbol determination table 163B shown in FIG. 28 (B) is a left center that is stopped and displayed in each of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas as a definite decorative symbol combination that is a probable big hit combination. It is a table referred to for determining the right final stop symbol FZ3-1, FZ3-2, FZ3-3 based on the random number SR1-1 for determining the first final stop symbol. In the final stop symbol determination table 163B, the random number SR1-1 for determining the first final stop symbol is the same as the left middle right final stop symbol FZ3-1, FZ3-2, FZ3-3, and the symbol number “ It is composed of data for determination to be assigned to “1”, “3”, “5”, “7”. The final stop symbol determination table 163C shown in FIG. 28C is a left middle right final stop symbol FZ4-1, FZ4-2, FZ4- in each of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas. 3 is a table that is referred to in order to determine the combination of the determined decorative symbols that is 3 to be one of the chance chance items TC1 to TC4 based on the random number SR1-1 for determining the first final stop symbol. The final stop symbol determination table 163C is made up of determination data that assigns the random number SR1-1 for determining the first final stop symbol to the odd chance items TC1 to TC4.

  In addition, the determination table stored in the ROM 112 includes, for example, specific effect pattern determination tables 164A to 164C shown in FIGS. 29A to 29C as tables for determining one of a plurality of types of specific effect patterns. It is. The specific effect pattern determination table 164A shown in FIG. 29 (A) indicates that the specific effect pattern slips TP1 based on the first specific effect pattern determination random value SR6-1 when the “slip” specific effect is executed. It is a table referred to in order to determine any of -1 to slip TP1-4. The specific effect pattern determination table 164A includes non-reach PA1-4, normal PA2-2, normal PA2-4, normal PA2-6, normal PA2-8, super PA3-2, super PA3-6, super PA4-2, super PA5-2, Super PB3-2, Super PB4-2, Super PB5-2, Super PC3-2, Super PC3-4, Super PD1-2, Super PE1-2, Super PF1-3, Special PG1-2, Special The random value SR6- for determining the first specific effect pattern according to the change pattern (see FIGS. 8 and 9) in which the specific effect of “slip” is executed, such as the change patterns of PG2-2 and special PG3-3. 1 is composed of data for determination assigned to the specific production pattern of slip TP1-1 to slip TP1-4. .

  Here, in the specific effect pattern of the slip TP1-1, after changing the decorative symbols in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas, the “left” and “right” ornaments are displayed. After temporarily displaying the decorative symbol in the symbol display area, the decorative symbol display area in the “right” is displayed in the “right” decorative symbol display area by stopping the display after changing the decorative symbol at high speed again. An effect display for changing the decorative pattern to be stopped is displayed. In the specific effect pattern of the slip TP1-2, after changing the decorative symbols in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas, the “left” and “right” decorative symbol display areas are displayed. After temporarily displaying the decorative design at, display the stop in the decorative design display area of “Left” by stopping the display after changing the decorative design at high speed in the “Left” decorative design display area. An effect display for changing the decorative pattern to be performed is performed. In the specific effect pattern of the slip TP1-3, after changing the decorative symbols in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas, the “left” and “right” decorative symbol display areas are displayed. After temporarily displaying the decorative design at, display the stop in the decorative design display area on the "right" by stopping the display again after changing the decorative design to low speed in the "right" decorative design display area. An effect display for changing the decorative pattern to be performed is performed. In the specific effect pattern of the slip TP1-4, after changing the decorative symbols in all of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas, the “left” and “right” decorative symbol display areas are displayed. After temporarily displaying the decorative symbol at, display the stop in the decorative symbol display area of the “left” by displaying the stop symbol after changing the decorative symbol to low speed again in the “left” decorative symbol display area. An effect display for changing the decorative pattern to be performed is performed.

  The specific effect pattern determination table 164B shown in FIG. 29B simulates the specific effect pattern based on the random number SR6-2 for determining the second specific effect pattern when the “pseudo-continuous” specific effect is executed. It is a table referred to in order to determine any one of the series TP2-1 to the pseudo series TP2-3. The specific effect pattern determination table 164B includes non-reach PA1-5, super PA3-4, super PA3-8, super PB3-4, super PA4-4, super PA4-8, super PB4-4, super PB5-4, super A random value SR6 for determining a second specific effect pattern according to a change pattern (see FIGS. 8 and 9) in which a “pseudo-continuous” specific effect is executed, such as a change pattern of PF1-1 and special PG1-3. -2 is made up of data for determination assigned to the specific effect patterns of the pseudo-continuous TP2-1 to the pseudo-continuous TP2-3.

  Here, in the specific effect pattern of the pseudo-continuous TP 2-1, the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed in all of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbols, and then re-variable (pseudo-variable). The all-revariable display operation to be performed is performed once until the final decorative symbol that is the final stop symbol is stopped and displayed. In the specific effect pattern of the pseudo-continuous TP2-2, the all-revariable display operation is performed twice before the confirmed decorative symbol is stopped and displayed. In the specific effect pattern of the pseudo-continuous TP2-3, the all-revariable display operation is performed three times before the confirmed decorative symbol is stopped and displayed. Therefore, in this embodiment, by determining the specific effect pattern to any one of the pseudo-continuous TP2-1 to the pseudo-continuous TP2-3 using the specific effect pattern determination table 164B, the number of executions of the pseudo-continuous variation is determined. be able to.

  The specific effect pattern determination table 164C shown in FIG. 29C indicates the specific effect pattern in the intro TP3 based on the third specific effect pattern determination random number SR6-3 when the “intro” specific effect is executed. It is a table referred to in order to determine any of -1 to intro TP3-3. The specific effect pattern determination table 164C includes non-reach PA1-6, super PA3-3, super PA3-7, super PB3-3, super PA4-3, super PA4-7, super PA5-3, super PB4-3, super In response to a variation pattern (see FIGS. 8 and 9) in which a specific effect of “intro” is executed, such as a variation pattern of PB5-3, the random value SR6-3 for determining the third specific effect pattern is converted into intro TP3. It is comprised from the data for a determination etc. which are assigned to the specific production | generation pattern of -1-intro TP3-3.

  Here, when the variation pattern is non-reach PA 1-6, for example, the variation pattern is plural depending on whether the previous effect buffer value provided in the effect control buffer setting unit 164 shown in FIG. The assignment of the random value SR6-3 for determining the third specific effect pattern to the specific effect patterns of the intro TP3-1 to the intro TP3-3 corresponding to the kinds of effect operations is different. The previous effect buffer value is set to 1 when the specific effect pattern in the specific effect of “Intro” is determined to be intro TP3-1, and is set to 2 when it is determined to be intro TP3-2. If 3 is determined, it is set to 3. When the previous effect buffer value is 1, the intro TP3-1 is not assigned the random value SR6-3 for determining the third specific effect pattern, and when the previous effect buffer value is 2, the intro When the random number SR6-3 for determining the third specific effect pattern is not assigned to TP3-2 and the previous effect buffer value is 3, for determining the third specific effect pattern for intro TP3-3. No random number SR6-3 is assigned. When the specific effect of “intro” is executed according to the variation pattern of non-reach PA 1-6 by such assignment, the specific effect same as the specific effect pattern in the specific effect of “intro” executed last time It can be prevented from becoming a pattern.

  In addition, the determination table stored in the ROM 112 includes a fluctuating promotion effect execution determination table 165A shown in FIG. 30A and a jackpot promotion effect execution determination table 165B shown in FIG. 30B. In the changing promotion effect execution determination table 165A shown in FIG. 30A, the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “normal”, “first probability variation” to “third probability variation” (other than “surprise accuracy”). In this case, the table is referred to in order to determine whether to execute the changing promotion effect based on the promotion effect execution determination random value SR5. In the changing promotion effect execution determination table 165A, the random number SR5 for determining the promotion effect execution is changing depending on whether the jackpot type is “normal” or “first probability variation” to “third probability variation”. It consists of decision data assigned to the determination result indicating the presence or absence of the promotion effect. Here, when the jackpot type is “normal” or “third probability variation”, the random value SR5 for determining the promotion effect execution is all assigned to the determination result of the promotion effect during the change, and the promotion promotion during the change is failed The production will be executed. When the jackpot type is “first probability change”, a part of the random effect value SR5 for determining the promotion effect execution is assigned to the determination result with the changing promotion effect, and the rest is determined without the changing promotion effect. Assigned to the result. In this case, if the determination result indicates that there is a changing promotion effect, the changing promotion success effect is executed. Further, when the big hit type is “second probability variation”, the random value SR5 for promotion effect execution determination is all assigned to the determination result of no change promotion effect during change, and the promotion success effect during change and promotion during change Any failure production will not be executed.

  In the big hit middle promotion effect execution determination table 165B shown in FIG. 30 (B), the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “normal”, “first probability variation” to “third probability variation” (other than “surprise accuracy”). Is a table that is referred to in order to determine whether or not to execute the jackpot promotion effect based on the random value SR5 for promotion effect execution determination. The jackpot promotion effect execution determination table 165B determines whether the jackpot type is “normal”, “first probability change” to “third probability change”, and determines the random value SR5 for promotion effect execution determination as a jackpot. It is composed of data for determination assigned to a determination result indicating the presence or absence of a promotion promotion effect or a jackpot promotion failure effect. Here, when the jackpot type is “normal”, the random value SR5 for determining the promotion effect execution is all assigned to the determination result of the jackpot promotion promotion effect, and the jackpot promotion promotion effect is executed. It will be. When the jackpot type is “first probability change” or “second probability change”, the random value SR5 for determining the promotion effect execution is all assigned to the determination result of no jackpot promotion effect, and the jackpot promotion Neither the successful production nor the promotion failure during jackpot will be executed. Further, when the jackpot type is “third probability variation”, a part of the random effect value SR5 for determining the promotion effect execution is assigned to the determination result of the jackpot promotion promotion success effect, and the rest has the jackpot promotion promotion failure effect. Is assigned to the judgment result. In this case, either the jackpot promotion promotion success effect or the jackpot promotion promotion effect is executed according to the determination result. When the big hit type is “third probability variation” and the big hit middle promotion failure effect is performed, the common effect is executed after the big hit game when the gaming state is the short-time state.

  In addition, in the determination table stored in the ROM 112, for example, temporary tables shown in FIGS. 31A to 31D are used as tables for determining decorative symbols to be temporarily stopped when a specific effect of “slip” is executed. Stop symbol determination tables 166A to 166D are included. The temporary stop symbol determination tables 166A to 166D are used according to whether the specific effect pattern is the slip TP1-1 to the slip TP1-4, for example, according to the table selection setting as shown in FIG. Selected as. That is, when the specific performance pattern is the slip TP1-1, the temporary stop symbol determination table 166A is selected as the usage table, and when the specific effect pattern is the slip TP1-2, the temporary stop symbol determination table 166B is selected as the usage table. In the case of the slip TP1-3, the temporary stop symbol determination table 166C is selected as the usage table, and in the case of the slip TP1-4, the temporary stop symbol determination table 166D is selected as the usage table. Each temporary stop symbol determination table 166A to 166D has a temporary slip / development opportunity temporary change according to the symbol numbers “1” to “8” of the decorative symbols that will be the final stop symbols in the decorative symbol display area for changing the decorative symbols again. The random number value SR3 for determining the stop symbol is composed of determination data assigned to the symbol numbers “1” to “8” of the decorative symbols that are temporarily stopped symbols. In other words, the temporary stop symbol determination table 166A has a decorative symbol which becomes the right final stop symbol as the final stop symbol in the “right” decorative symbol display area in which the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped according to the specific effect pattern of the slip TP1-1. In accordance with the symbol numbers “1” to “8”, the random number SR3 for determining the temporary stop symbol at the time of the slip / development chance is changed to the symbol numbers “1” to “8” of the decorative symbol that becomes the right temporary stop symbol KZ1-1. Data for determination to be assigned to. The temporary stop symbol determination table 166B has a symbol number of a decorative symbol that becomes the left final stop symbol as the final stop symbol in the “left” decorative symbol display area in which the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped according to the specific effect pattern of the slip TP1-2. In response to “1” to “8”, the random number SR3 for determining the temporary stop symbol for the slip / development chance is changed to the symbol numbers “1” to “8” of the decorative symbols to be the left temporary stop symbol KZ1-2. Contains decision data to allocate. The temporary stop symbol determination table 166C shows the symbol number of the decorative symbol that becomes the right final stop symbol as the final stop symbol in the “right” decorative symbol display area in which the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped according to the specific effect pattern of the slip TP1-3. In accordance with “1” to “8”, the random number SR3 for determining the temporary stop symbol for the slip / development chance is changed to the symbol numbers “1” to “8” of the decorative symbols to be the right temporary stop symbol KZ1-3. Contains decision data to allocate. The temporary stop symbol determination table 166D displays the symbol number of the decorative symbol that becomes the left final stop symbol as the final stop symbol in the “left” decorative symbol display area in which the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped according to the specific effect pattern of the slip TP1-4. In accordance with “1” to “8”, the random number SR3 for determining the temporary stop symbol for the slip / development chance is changed to the symbol numbers “1” to “8” of the decorative symbols to be the left temporary stop symbols KZ1-4. Contains decision data to allocate.

  Further, in the determination table stored in the ROM 112, for example, as shown in FIGS. 32A to 32D, a table for determining a decorative symbol to be displayed temporarily stopped when a specific effect of “pseudo-continuous” is executed. Temporary stop symbol determination tables 167A to 167D to be shown are included. The temporary stop symbol determination tables 167A to 167D indicate that when the “pseudo-continuous” specific effect is executed, the variation pattern is non-reach PA1-5, super PA3-4, super PA3-8, super PA4- 4. Super PA4-8, Super PB3-4, Super PB4-4, Super PB5-4, Super PF1-1, Special PG1-3 Is selected as a use table in accordance with the remaining number of re-variable display operations to be executed until the operation is performed. Here, for example, the remaining number of re-variation display operations is “0” in the variation of the decorative symbol (pseudo continuous variation) in which the final decorative symbol that is the final stop symbol is stopped and displayed. Becomes “1” in the variation of the decorative symbol (pseudo-continuous variation) that is stopped and displayed, and becomes “2” in the variation of the decorative symbol (pseudo-continuous variation) in which the temporary stop symbol is stopped and displayed two times before. By the time the pseudo continuous variation in which the final decorative symbol that is the final stop symbol is stopped is executed, the variation of the decorative symbol in which the temporary stop symbol is stopped and displayed (pseudo continuous variation) is “3”. This corresponds to how many times the pseudo continuous fluctuation (the fluctuation in which the temporary stop symbol is stopped and displayed) is executed.

  As an example, the temporary stop symbol determination table 167A shows the total re-variation display operation executed until the final decorative symbol that is the final stop symbol is stopped and displayed in response to the variation pattern being non-reach PA1-5. When the number of remaining times is “1”, the left temporary stop symbol KZ2-1, which is the left symbol to be temporarily stopped in the “left” decorative symbol display area, is temporarily stopped in the “right” decorative symbol display area. The right temporary stop symbol KZ2-2, which is the right symbol to be displayed, and the intermediate temporary stop symbol KZ2-3, which is the middle symbol to be temporarily stopped and displayed in the “middle” decorative symbol display area, are selected as the use table. The temporary stop symbol determination table 167B has a variation pattern of Super PA3-4, Super PA3-8, Super PA4-4, Super PA4-8, Super PB3-4, Super PB4-4, Super PB5-4, Super PF1-1. When the remaining number of re-variable display operations executed until the final decorative symbol that is the final stop symbol is stopped and displayed in response to being one of the special PG1 to 3, is “1”. Left temporary stop symbol KZ2-1, which is the left symbol to be temporarily stopped in the “left” decorative symbol display area, and right temporary stop symbol KZ2-, which is the right symbol, to be temporarily stopped in the “right” decorative symbol display area. 2. It is selected as a use table for determining the intermediate temporary stop symbol KZ2-3 which is the intermediate symbol to be temporarily stopped and displayed in the “medium” decorative symbol display area.

  The temporary stop symbol determination table 167C has a variation pattern of Super PA 3-4, Super PA 3-8, Super PA 4-4, Super PA 4-8, Super PB 3-4, Super PB 4-4, Super PB 5-4, Super PF1. -1 or special PG1-3, the remaining number of re-variable display operations executed until the final decorative symbol that is the final stop symbol is stopped and displayed is “2” Next, the left temporary stop symbol KZ3-1, which is the left symbol to be temporarily stopped in the “left” decorative symbol display area, and the right temporary stop symbol, which is the right symbol to be temporarily stopped in the “right” decorative symbol display area. KZ3-2 is selected as a use table for determining the intermediate temporary stop symbol KZ3-3 that becomes the intermediate symbol to be temporarily stopped and displayed in the “medium” decorative symbol display area. The temporary stop symbol determination table 167D has a variation pattern of Super PA3-4, Super PA3-8, Super PA4-4, Super PA4-8, Super PB3-4, Super PB4-4, Super PB5-4, Super PF1-1. If the remaining number of all re-variable display operations executed until the final decorative symbol that is the final stop symbol is stopped and displayed is “3”, the “left” ornament Left temporary stop symbol KZ4-1, which is the left symbol to be temporarily stopped in the symbol display area, right temporary stop symbol KZ4-2, which is the right symbol to be temporarily stopped in the "right" decorative symbol display area, "middle" Is selected as a use table for determining the intermediate temporary stop symbol KZ4-3 to be the intermediate symbol to be temporarily stopped and displayed in the decorative symbol display area. When the variation pattern is non-reach PA 1-5, the specific effect pattern is determined as the pseudo-continuous TP2-1 based on the setting of the specific effect pattern determination table 164B shown in FIG. Since the total re-variation display operation to be re-variable after the stop display is performed only once, there is no need to select the temporary stop symbol determination table 167C or the temporary stop symbol determination table 167D as the use table. When the variation pattern is the special PG1-3, the specific effect pattern is determined to be the pseudo continuous TP2-1 or the pseudo continuous TP2-2 based on the setting of the specific effect pattern determination table 164B shown in FIG. Since the number of executions of the total re-variation display operation for re-variation after displaying the symbol temporarily stopped is performed at most twice, it is not necessary to select the temporary stop symbol determination table 167D as the use table.

  The temporary stop symbol determination table 167A shown in FIG. 32A and the temporary stop symbol determination table 167B shown in FIG. 32B are the left final stop symbols as the final stop symbols in the “left” decorative symbol display area, respectively. In accordance with the symbol numbers “1” to “8” of the decorative symbols, the random number SR4-1 for determining the first pseudo-temporary temporary stop symbol is set to the left middle right temporary stop symbols KZ2-1, KZ2-2, KZ2-. 3 is composed of data for determination assigned to the pseudo consecutive chances GC1 to GC8 constituted by a combination of three. The temporary stop symbol determination table 167C shown in FIG. 32C includes a left temporary stop symbol KZ2-1, a right temporary stop symbol KZ2-2, and a middle temporary stop symbol 2-3 determined using the temporary stop symbol determination table 167B. The random number SR4-2 for determining the second pseudo-temporary temporary stop symbol is converted into the left middle right temporary stop symbols KZ3-1 and KZ3-2 according to which of the pseudo-continuous chance GC1 to GC8. , KZ3-3, and the like are determined data to be assigned to the pseudo consecutive chances GC1 to GC8. The temporary stop symbol determination table 167D shown in FIG. 32D includes a left temporary stop symbol KZ3-1, a right temporary stop symbol 3-2, and a middle temporary stop symbol KZ3-3 determined using the temporary stop symbol determination table 167C. The random number SR4-3 for determining the third pseudo-temporary temporary stop symbol is converted into the left middle right temporary stop symbols KZ4-1, KZ4-2, depending on which of the pseudo consecutive chances GC1 to GC8 is selected. , KZ4-3, and the like are determined data to be assigned to the pseudo consecutive chances GC1 to GC8.

  By determining temporary stop symbols using such temporary stop symbol determination tables 167A to 167D, for example, as shown in FIG. Depending on the number of executions of the change, any one of the pseudo-continuous chance items GC1 to GC8 may be used as the decorative symbols that are temporarily stopped and displayed in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas. Can be determined.

  Further, in the determination table stored in the ROM 112, for example, a temporary stop symbol determination table shown in FIG. 34 is used as a table for determining a decorative symbol that is temporarily stopped and displayed when the “development chance” specific effect is executed. 168 is included. The temporary stop symbol determination table 168 indicates the chance of slipping / development according to the symbol numbers “1” to “8” of the decorative symbols that become the left final stop symbol as the final stop symbol in the “left” decorative symbol display area. The random number SR3 for determining the temporary stop symbol is composed of determination data assigned to the development chance items HC1 to HC8 constituted by combinations of the left middle right temporary stop symbols KZ6-1, KZ6-2, and KZ6-3. Yes.

  The determination table stored in the ROM 112 includes, for example, a temporary stop symbol determination table 169 shown in FIG. 35 as a table for determining a decorative symbol to be temporarily stopped when the changing promotion effect is executed. ing. The temporary stop symbol determination table 169 has the same left middle right final stop symbol FZ3- that is displayed in a stop manner in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” ornament symbol display areas as the final symbol combination that is a jackpot combination. In accordance with the symbol numbers “1” to “8” of the decorative symbols which are 1, FZ3-2 and FZ3-3, the random number SR2 for determining the temporary stop symbol for promotion effect is set to the left middle right temporary stop symbol KZ7-1. , KZ7-2, KZ7-3, etc., are composed of data for determination assigned to the symbol numbers “2”, “4”, “6”, “8” of the normal symbols.

  Further, the determination table stored in the ROM 112 includes a notice pattern type determination table 170 shown in FIG. The advance notice pattern type determination table 170 is a table that is referred to in order to determine one of a plurality of advance notice pattern types based on the random number SR7 for determining the advance notice pattern type. In the notice pattern classification determination table 170, when the variation pattern is any one of non-reach PA1-1, non-reach PA1-2, non-reach PB1-1, non-reach PC1-1, or non-reach PA1-3. , Non-reach PA1-4, non-reach PA1-6, non-reach PB1-2, non-reach PC1-2, super PA3-3, super PA3-7, super PA4-3, super PA4-7, super PA5 -3, super PB3-3, super PB4-3, or super PB5-3, depending on the variation pattern other than these variation patterns, the random number SR7 for determining the notice pattern type is It is composed of data for determination assigned to the notice pattern types of no notice or CY1 to CY3.

  Here, in the notice pattern type determination table 170, the variation pattern is non-reach PA1-6, super PA3-3, super PA3-7, super PB3-3, super PA4-3, super PA4-7, super PA5-3, Corresponding to a variation pattern (see FIGS. 8 and 9) in which a specific effect of “intro” is executed, such as super PB 4-3 and super PB 5-3, a random value SR7 for determining a notice pattern type is set. All assigned without notice. Therefore, when the specific effect of “intro” is executed, execution of the effect operation that becomes the notice effect is limited. Here, in the specific effect of “Intro”, the effect display in the specific effect is started within a short period of time after the decorative symbols start to change in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas. When a notice effect is performed, the execution period overlaps. Therefore, in the notice pattern type determination table 170, when a variation pattern in which a specific effect of “intro” is executed, a random number SR7 for determining the notice pattern type is assigned so that there is no notice at all times, thereby “intro” The notice effect in which the specific effect of "" and the execution period overlap each other can be prevented from being executed.

  In addition, the determination table stored in the ROM 112 includes, for example, notice pattern determination tables 171A to 171C shown in FIGS. 37 to 39 as tables for determining any of a plurality of kinds of notice patterns. When the notice pattern type is determined to be notice CY1, the notice pattern determination table 171A indicates that there is no notice or the notice pattern is given as notice YP1-1 to notice YP1 based on the random number SR8-1 for determining the first notice pattern. -4 is a table that is referred to in order to determine one of them. The notice pattern determination table 171A determines the random number value SR8-1 for determining the first notice pattern according to the variation pattern, for example, without the notice or assigning to the notice patterns of the notices YP1-1 to YP1-4. It is composed of

  Here, in the notice patterns of notice YP1-1 to notice YP1-4, the effect display in the notice effect of “character display” is performed in different effect display modes. In the “character display” notice effect, a character image corresponding to each notice pattern of notice YP1-1 to notice YP1-4 is displayed in the display area of the image display device 9.

  When the notice pattern type is determined to be notice CY2, the notice pattern determination table 171B indicates that there is no notice or the notice pattern is given as notice YP2-1 to notice YP2 based on the random number SR8-2 for determining the second notice pattern. -4 is a table that is referred to in order to determine one of them. The notice pattern determination table 171B is composed of determination data assigned to the notice pattern of the notice YP2-1 to notice YP2 without the notice or the random number SR8-2 for determining the second notice pattern according to the variation pattern. Has been.

  Here, in the notice patterns of the notice YP2-1 to the notice YP2-4, the effect display in the notice effect of the “step-up image” is performed in different effect display modes. In the notice effect of “step-up image”, after any one of a plurality of kinds of effect images prepared in advance is displayed in the display area of the image display device 9, each notice pattern of notice YP2-1 to notice YP2-4 is displayed. Correspondingly, a plurality of types of effect images may be switched and displayed according to a predetermined order, or the effect images may not be switched.

  When the notice pattern type is determined to be notice CY3, the notice pattern judgment table 171C has no notice or the notice pattern based on the random number SR8-3 for judging the third notice pattern, or the notice pattern YP3-1 to notice YP3. -3 is a table that is referred to in order to determine one of them. The notice pattern determination table 171C determines the random number SR8-3 for determining the third notice pattern according to the variation pattern, for example, the decision data to be assigned to the notice pattern without notice or the notice YP3-1 to notice YP3-3. It is composed of

  Here, in the notice patterns of the notice YP3-1 to the notice YP3-3, the effect display in the notice effect of “mail display” is performed in different effect display modes. In the “mail display” notice effect, an effect image that prompts the operation of the operation button 120 is displayed in the display area of the image display device 9, and then the notice YP3-1 to the notice is given in response to the operation button 120 being operated. While displaying the effect image corresponding to each notice pattern of YP3-3, if the operation button 120 is not operated, the effect image corresponding to each notice pattern is not displayed. As described above, in the “mail display” notice effect, the effect operation changes in response to the operation button 120 being operated.

  In the notice pattern determination table 171C shown in FIG. 39, a random number SR8-3 for judging the third notice pattern corresponding to the fluctuation patterns of non-reach PA1-4, PA1-5, PA1-7 in which the specific effect is executed. Of these, values in the range of “1” to “170” are assigned without notice. On the other hand, the random number SR8-3 having a smaller number than the variation patterns of non-reach PA1-4, PA1-5, PA1-7 corresponding to the variation pattern in which the variable display state of the decorative symbol is the reach state is not notified. Assigned to. For example, values in the range of “1” to “160” are assigned without notice corresponding to the fluctuation patterns of normal PA2-1 to normal PA2-4. In the other variation patterns that reach the reach state, the random display value SR8− for determining the third notice pattern depends on whether the variable display result is “big hit” or “small hit” and the type of reach (normal or super). The assignment of 3 is different. On the other hand, non-reach PA1-4, PA1-5 corresponding to the fluctuation patterns of non-reach PA1-1 to non-reach PA1-3, non-reach PB1-1, and non-reach PC1-1 where the specific effect is not executed. A larger number of random values SR8-3 than the variation pattern of PA1-7 are assigned without notice. In other words, values in the range of “1” to “190” are assigned without notice. With such a setting, the variation pattern corresponding to “non-reach” is a variation pattern in which a specific effect is executed, compared to the variation pattern in which the decorative display variable display state is the reach state. The ratio of executing the effect is reduced, and the ratio of executing the notice effect is higher than that when the variation pattern corresponds to “non-reach” and the specific effect is not executed. In addition, when the variation pattern corresponds to “non-reach” and the specific effect is executed, the variation pattern corresponds to “non-reach” and the variation pattern does not execute the specific effect. Higher reliability (the possibility that the variable display result will be “big hit”) is higher, while the proportion of the decorative display variable display mode is a reachable variation pattern. The ratio of executing a high-priority notice effect is low.

  The control pattern table stored in the ROM 112 includes, for example, a symbol variation control pattern table 180 shown in FIG. 40A, a notice effect control pattern table 181 shown in FIG. 40B, and various effect control pattern tables shown in FIG. 182 and the like are included. In the symbol variation control pattern table 180 shown in FIG. 40 (A), the display area of the image display device 9 in the period from when the variation of the ornament symbol is started until the confirmed ornament symbol that is the final stop symbol is stopped and displayed. It is only necessary to store a plurality of types of data indicating control contents of various effect operations such as variable display operation of decorative symbols, effect display operations for reach effects, and effect display operations for specific effects as symbol variation control patterns. Each symbol variation control pattern includes various effects according to variable display of decorative symbols such as effect control process timer setting value, effect control process timer judgment value, effect display control data, sound control data, lamp control data, and end code. It is composed of control data for controlling the operation, and it is only necessary to set the contents of various effects control, timing control switching timings, and the like in time series.

  In the notice effect control pattern table 181 shown in FIG. 40 (B), data indicating the control content of the effect operation corresponding to the notice effect, such as the effect display operation in the notice effect, corresponding to each of the plurality of types of the notice pattern. However, it is only necessary to store a plurality of types as the notice effect control pattern. Each notice effect control pattern is a control for controlling various effect operations corresponding to variable display of decorative symbols such as effect control process timer judgment value, effect display control data, sound control data, lamp control data, and end code. It is composed of data, and it is only necessary to set the contents of various effects control, timing control switching timing, and the like in time series.

  As an example, the notice effect control pattern table 181 stores the notice effect control patterns of the notices CYP1-1 to CYP1-4 corresponding to the notice patterns of the notices YP1-1 to YP1-4. . Here, the notice effect control pattern of the notice CYP1-1 displays the character image MC101 corresponding to the notice pattern of the notice YP1-1. The notice effect control pattern of the notice CYP1-2 displays the character image MC101 and the character image MC102 corresponding to the notice pattern of the notice YP1-2. The notice effect control pattern of the notice CYP1-3 displays the character image MC101 and the character image MC103 corresponding to the notice pattern of the notice YP1-3. The notice effect control pattern of the notice CYP1-4 displays the character images MC101 to MC103 corresponding to the notice pattern of the notice YP1-4.

  Also, the notice effect control pattern table 181 stores notice effect control patterns of notice CYP2-1 to notice CYP2-4 corresponding to each of the notice patterns of notice YP2-1 to notice YP2-4. Here, the notice effect control pattern of the notice CYP2-1 displays the effect image of the first step corresponding to the notice pattern of the notice YP2-1, and ends the notice effect without switching the effect image. . The notice effect control pattern of the notice CYP2-2 displays the effect image of the second step corresponding to the notice pattern of the notice YP2-2, and ends the notice effect without switching the effect image. The notice effect control pattern of the notice CYP2-3 displays the effect image of the first step corresponding to the notice pattern of the notice YP2-3, and after switching the effect image to the effect image of the second step, the notice effect Exit. The notice effect control pattern of the notice CYP2-4 displays the effect image of the first step corresponding to the notice pattern of the notice YP2-4, switches the effect image to the effect image of the second step, and further the third step. After switching to the effect image, the notice effect is ended.

  In addition, the notice effect control pattern table 181 stores the notice effect control patterns of the notice CYP3-1-1 and the notice CYP3-1-2 corresponding to the notice pattern of the notice YP3-1. The notice effect control patterns of the notice CYP3-2-1 and the notice CYP3-2-2 are stored corresponding to the notice pattern, and the notice CYP3-3-1 and the notice CYP3-3 are corresponded to the notice pattern of the notice YP3-3. -2 notice effect control pattern is stored. Here, the notice effect control pattern of the notice CYP3-1-1 displays the effect image before the operation of the operation button 120 is detected corresponding to the notice pattern of the notice YP3-1. The notice effect control pattern of the notice CYP3-1-2 displays the effect image after the operation of the operation button 120 is detected corresponding to the notice pattern of the notice YP3-1. The notice effect control pattern of the notice CYP3-2-1 displays an effect image before the operation of the operation button 120 is detected, corresponding to the notice pattern of the notice YP3-2. The notice effect control pattern of the notice CYP3-2-2 displays the effect image after the operation of the operation button 120 is detected corresponding to the notice pattern of the notice YP3-2. The notice effect control pattern of the notice CYP3-3-1 displays the effect image before the operation of the operation button 120 is detected corresponding to the notice pattern of the notice YP3-3. The notice effect control pattern of the notice CYP3-3-2 displays the effect image after the operation of the operation button 120 is detected corresponding to the notice pattern of the notice YP3-3.

  In the various effect control pattern table 182 shown in FIG. 41, a plurality of types of data indicating the contents of various effect controls in the period controlled to the big hit game state or the small hit game state are stored as the effect control patterns. That's fine. Each effect control pattern includes, for example, an effect control process timer setting value, an effect control process timer determination value, an effect display control data, an audio control data, a lamp control data, an end code, etc. The contents of the various effects control according to the progress, the switching timing of the effects control, and the like may be set in time series.

  The RAM 113 mounted on the effect control board 80 is provided with an effect control data holding area 190 as shown in FIG. 42, for example, as an area for holding various data used for controlling the effect operation. The effect control data holding area 190 shown in FIG. 42 includes an effect control flag setting unit 191, an effect control timer setting unit 192, an effect control counter setting unit 193, and an effect control buffer setting unit 194.

  In the effect control flag setting unit 191, for example, a plurality of types of states whose states can be updated according to an effect operation state such as an effect image display state in the display area of the image display device 9, an effect control command transmitted from the main board 31, and the like. A flag is provided. For example, the effect control flag setting unit 191 stores data indicating flag values and data indicating an on state or an off state for each of the plurality of types of flags.

  The effect control timer setting unit 192 is provided with a plurality of types of timers used for controlling the progress of various effect operations, such as an effect image display operation in the display area of the image display device 9. For example, the production control timer setting unit 192 stores data indicating timer values in each of a plurality of types of timers.

  The effect control counter setting unit 193 is provided with a plurality of types of counters used for controlling the progress of various effect operations. For example, the production control counter setting unit 193 stores data indicating the count values in each of a plurality of types of counters.

  The effect control buffer setting unit 194 is provided with various buffers that temporarily store data used for controlling the progress of various effect operations. For example, the effect control buffer setting unit 194 stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

  Next, the operation of the gaming machine will be described. 43 and 44 show the main processing executed by the CPU 56 of the game control microcomputer 560 in response to the start of power supply to the game machine and the reset signal to the game control microcomputer 560 becoming high level. It is a flowchart which shows. When the input level of the reset terminal to which the reset signal is input becomes a high level, the CPU 56 of the game control microcomputer 560 executes a security check process that is a process for confirming whether the contents of the program are valid. The main processing after step S1 is started. In the main process, the CPU 56 first performs necessary initial settings.

  In the initial setting process, the CPU 56 first sets the interrupt prohibition (step S1). Next, an interrupt mode for maskable interrupts is set (step S2), and a stack pointer designation address is set for the stack pointer (step S3). In step S2, the address synthesized from the value (1 byte) of the specific register (I register) of the game control microcomputer 560 and the interrupt vector (1 byte: least significant bit 0) output from the built-in device is Set to the mode indicating the interrupt address. When a maskable interrupt occurs, the CPU 56 automatically sets the interrupt disabled state and saves the contents of the program counter in the stack.

  Next, the built-in device register is set (initialized) (step S4). By the processing in step S4, the CTC (counter / timer) and PIO (parallel input / output port), which are built-in devices (built-in peripheral circuits), are set (initialized).

  The game control microcomputer 560 used in this embodiment also incorporates an I / O port (PIO) and a timer / counter circuit (CTC) 504.

  Next, it is confirmed whether or not the power-off signal is in an OFF state depending on the state of bit 0 of the input port 1 (step S5). When the power supply to the gaming machine is started, the output voltage of various power sources such as the + 5V power source gradually reaches the specified value, but the power-off signal is not output by the process of step S5, that is, the high power By confirming that the power supply voltage is stable, the CPU 56 can confirm that the power supply voltage is stable.

  When the power-off signal is in the on state, the CPU 56 confirms again whether the power-off signal is in the off state after a delay time of a predetermined period (for example, 0.1 second) (step S80). To do. If the power-off signal is off, the RAM 55 is set to an accessible state (step S6), and the process proceeds to a clear signal check process.

  When the power-off signal is in the off state, software delay processing for delaying the start timing of the gaming device control processing (game control processing) for controlling the progress of the game by software may be executed. By such software delay processing, the start timing of the game control processing can be delayed as compared with the case where the software delay processing is not executed. When the delay process is executed, a situation occurs in which the microcomputer of the other control board cannot receive the command transmitted from the game control board (main board 31) to the other control board (for example, the payout control board 37). Can be prevented.

  Next, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the clear switch is turned on (step S7). The CPU 56 may confirm the state of the clear signal only once via the input port 0, but may confirm the state of the clear signal a plurality of times. For example, if it is confirmed that the clear signal is off, a delay time of a predetermined time (for example, 0.1 seconds) is set, and then the clear signal is reconfirmed. If it is confirmed that the clear signal is in the ON state at that time, it is determined that the clear signal is in the ON state. Further, at this time, if it is confirmed that the clear signal is in the OFF state, after a predetermined delay time, the clear signal state may be reconfirmed. Here, the number of reconfirmations is not limited to once or twice, but may be three or more times. It is also possible to check twice and check again when the check results do not match.

  If the clear switch is not turned on in step S7, whether or not data protection processing of the backup RAM area (for example, power supply stop processing such as addition of parity data) was performed when power supply to the gaming machine was stopped Confirm (step S8). In this embodiment, when power supply is stopped, a process for protecting data in the backup RAM area is performed. When it is confirmed that such power supply stop processing has been performed, the CPU 56 determines that the power supply stop processing has been performed, that is, the control state at the time of power supply stop is stored. . When it is confirmed that the power supply stop process is not performed, the CPU 56 executes an initialization process.

  Whether or not the power supply stop process has been performed is determined by the value of the backup monitoring timer stored in the backup RAM area in the power supply stop process corresponding to the execution of the power supply stop process (for example, 2). ) Is confirmed by whether or not. Note that such a confirmation method is an example. For example, a flag indicating that the power supply stop process has been executed is set in the backup flag area in the power supply stop process, and the flag is set in step S8. If it is confirmed that the power supply is stopped, it may be determined that the power supply stop process has been performed.

  If it is determined that the control state at the time of stopping power supply is stored, the CPU 56 performs data check (parity check in this example) in the backup RAM area (step S9). In this embodiment, clear data (00) is set in the checksum data area, and the checksum calculation start address is set in the pointer. Also, the number of checksum calculations corresponding to the number of data to be checked is set. Then, the exclusive OR of the contents of the checksum data area and the contents of the RAM area pointed to by the pointer is calculated. The calculation result is stored in the checksum data area, the pointer value is incremented by 1, and the checksum calculation count value is decremented by 1. The above process is repeated until the value of the checksum calculation count becomes zero. When the value of the checksum calculation count becomes 0, the CPU 56 inverts the value of each bit of the contents of the checksum data area and uses the inverted data as a checksum.

  In the power supply stop process, a checksum is calculated by the same process as described above, and the checksum is stored in the backup RAM area. In step S9, the calculated checksum is compared with the stored checksum. When the power supply is stopped after an unexpected power failure or the like, the data in the backup RAM area should be saved, so the check result (comparison result) is normal (matched). That the check result is not normal means that the data in the backup RAM area may be different from the data when the power supply is stopped. In such a case, since the internal state cannot be returned to the state when the power supply is stopped, the initialization process (the process of steps S10 to S14) executed when the power is turned on, not when the power supply is stopped is stopped. Execute.

  If the check result is normal, the CPU 56 performs a game state restoration process for returning the internal state of the game control means and the control state of the electrical component control means such as the effect control means to the state when the power supply is stopped. Specifically, the start address of the backup setting table stored in the ROM 54 is set as a pointer (step S91), and the contents of the backup setting table are sequentially set in the work area (area in the RAM 55) (step S92). ). The work area is backed up by a backup power source. In the backup setting table, initialization data for an area that may be initialized in the work area is set. As a result of the processing in steps S91 and S92, the saved contents of the work area that should not be initialized remain. The parts that should not be initialized include, for example, data indicating the gaming state before the power supply is stopped (special symbol process flag, etc.), the area where the output state of the output port is saved (output port buffer), unpaid prize balls This is the part where data indicating the number is set.

  Further, the CPU 56 sets the start address of the backup command transmission table stored in the ROM 54 as a pointer (step S93), and issues a power failure recovery designation command for designating notification of power failure recovery in accordance with the contents. Processing to transmit to the sub board (effect control board) is executed (step S94). Then, the process proceeds to step S15.

  In the initialization process, the CPU 56 first performs a RAM clear process (step S10). Note that the predetermined data may be left as it is without initializing the entire area of the RAM 55. Also, the initial address of the initialization setting table stored in the ROM 54 is set as a pointer (step S11), and the contents of the initialization setting table are sequentially set in the work area (step S12).

  Control states such as a normal symbol determination random number counter, a normal symbol determination buffer, a special symbol buffer, a total prize ball number storage buffer, a special symbol process flag, an award ball flag, an out-of-ball flag, etc. An initial value is set in a flag for selectively performing processing according to the above. In addition, a bit corresponding to the output port that outputs the connection confirmation signal in the output port buffer is set (corresponding to the ON state of the connection confirmation signal).

  Further, the CPU 56 sets the head address of the initialization command transmission table stored in the ROM 54 as a pointer (step S13), and transmits an initialization command for initializing the sub board according to the contents to the sub board. Processing is executed (step S14). As an initialization command, a command indicating an initial symbol displayed on the variable display device 9, an initialization command to the payout control board 37, or the like can be used.

  Next, the CPU 56 executes random number circuit confirmation processing for confirming the state of the random number circuit built in the game control microcomputer 560 (step S95). In the random number circuit confirmation process, when the random number circuit is built in the gaming machine 1, the CPU 56 sets the random number circuit (for example, starts the operation of the random number circuit). Further, the CPU 56 monitors a random number confirmation signal output from the random number circuit for a predetermined time. The random number confirmation signal is ON when the clock signal generation circuit built in the random number circuit normally outputs the internal clock signal, and otherwise (for example, when the level of the internal clock signal decreases) Will be off). When the CPU 56 detects an off state of the random number confirmation signal continuously for a predetermined time, the CPU 56 determines that an abnormality has occurred in the random number circuit built in the game control microcomputer 560 and notifies the random circuit error of the main board 31. A process of transmitting a main board error designation command for designating to the sub board is executed. If the OFF state of the random number confirmation signal is not detected continuously for a predetermined time, the CPU 56 determines that the random number circuit is operating normally, and proceeds to step S15 as it is.

  Note that the random number circuit 503 that generates the hardware random number may be built in the gaming machine 1 or may be externally provided in the gaming machine 1. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 2, the random number circuit 503 is built in one chip (specifically, the game control microcomputer 560) together with the ROM 54 and the RAM 55.

  Then, the CPU 56 executes a timer interrupt setting process for setting a CTC register built in the game control microcomputer 560 so that a timer interrupt is periodically taken every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms) ( Step S15). That is, a value corresponding to, for example, 2 ms is set in a predetermined register (time constant register) as an initial value. In this embodiment, it is assumed that a timer interrupt is periodically taken every 2 ms.

  When the timer interrupt setting is completed, the CPU 56 repeatedly executes the display symbol random number update process (step S17) and the initial value determination random number update process (step S18). When the display symbol random number update process and the initial value determination random number update process are executed, the CPU 56 disables the interrupt (step S16), and when the display symbol random number update process and the initial value determination random number update process are finished, The interrupt is permitted (step S19).

  The display symbol random number is a random number for determining the display of the special symbol indicator 8. In this embodiment, a normal symbol determining random number for determining a stop symbol of the normal symbol is used as the display symbol random number. Further, for example, a random number value MR1 for determining a special figure display result, a random value MR2-1 for determining a jackpot type, a random value MR2-2 for determining a reach, a random value MR3 for determining a variation pattern type, and a variation pattern determining When there is a random number to be updated by software among the random number values MR4 for use, the random number is also a display design random number. The display symbol random number update process is a process for updating the count value of the counter for generating the display symbol random number.

  The initial value determining random number update process is a process of updating the count value of the counter for generating the initial value determining random number. The initial value determination random number is the initial value of a count value such as a counter (determination random number generation counter) for generating a normal symbol determination random number for determining whether or not to generate a hit based on a normal symbol. It is a random number for determining the value. Further, for example, a random number value MR1 for determining a special figure display result, a random value MR2-1 for determining a jackpot type, a random value MR2-2 for determining a reach, a random value MR3 for determining a variation pattern type, and a variation pattern determining When there is a random number to be updated by software among the random number values MR4 for use, the random number for determining the initial value of the counter value for generating the random number is also the initial value determining random number. Game control processing described later (a game control microcomputer controls itself a game device such as a variable display device 9, a variable winning ball device 15, a ball payout device 97 provided in the game machine, or In a process of transmitting a command signal to cause another microcomputer to control, also referred to as a gaming apparatus control process), when the count value of the determination random number generation counter makes one round, an initial value is set in the counter.

  Note that when the display symbol random number update process and the initial value determination random number update process are executed, the interrupt is disabled. The display symbol random number update process and the initial value determination random number update process are described later. This is to avoid contention with the process in the timer interrupt process because the process is also executed (that is, the same process is also executed in steps S25 and S26 of the timer interrupt process). That is, if a timer interrupt is generated during the processing of steps S17 and S18 and the counter value for generating the display symbol random number and the initial value determining random number is updated during the timer interrupt processing, The continuity of the count value may be impaired. However, such an inconvenience does not occur if the interrupt disabled state is set during the processes of steps S17 and S18.

  As described above, a game store clerk or the like can easily perform initialization processing by starting power supply to the gaming machine (eg, turning on the power switch) while the clear switch is turned on and the clear signal is output. Can be executed. That is, RAM clear or the like can be performed.

  Next, the game control process will be described. FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing the timer interrupt process. When a timer interrupt occurs during execution of the main process, specifically, during a period in which interruption is permitted during execution of the loop process of steps S16 to S19, the CPU 56 of the game control microcomputer 560 A game control process is executed in a timer interrupt process activated in response to the occurrence of a timer interrupt. In the timer interrupt process, the CPU 56 first executes a power-off process (power-off detection process) for detecting whether or not a power-off signal is output (whether the power-on signal is turned on) (step S20). Subsequently, detection signals of switches such as the gate switch 32a, the start port switch 14a, the count switch 23, and the winning port switches 29a, 30a, 33a, and 39a are input via the switch circuit 58, and their state is determined (switch Process: Step S21). Specifically, if the state of the input port for inputting the detection signal of each switch is ON, the value of the switch timer provided corresponding to each switch is incremented by one.

  Next, the CPU 56 executes display control processing for outputting and clearing the DG signal to various displays such as the special symbol display 8, the normal symbol display 10, and the status indicator (step S22). Next, the CPU 56 executes an abnormal winning notification process for notifying that an abnormal winning to the special winning opening has been detected (step S23). Specifically, the count switch 23 is turned on in spite of the fact that it is before opening the big prize opening in the special symbol process process described later (specifically, in the process of steps S300 to S303 described later). Is detected, it is determined that an abnormal winning in the special winning opening has been detected, and control is performed to notify.

  Next, a process of updating the count value of each counter for generating each determination random number used for game control is performed (random number update process: step S24). Further, the CPU 56 performs a process of updating the count value of the counter for generating the initial value determining random number (initial value determining random number updating process: step S25). Furthermore, CPU56 performs the process which updates the count value of the counter for producing | generating a display symbol random number (display symbol random number update process: step S26).

  When the random number update process, the initial value determination random number update process, and the display symbol random number update process are performed, the CPU 56 performs a special symbol process process (step S27). In the special symbol process, the corresponding process is selected and executed according to a special symbol process flag for controlling the pachinko gaming machine 1 in a predetermined order according to the gaming state. The value of the special symbol process flag is updated during each process according to the gaming state. Further, normal symbol process processing is performed (step S28). In the normal symbol process, the corresponding process is selected and executed according to the normal symbol process flag for controlling the display state of the normal symbol display 10 in a predetermined order. The value of the normal symbol process flag is updated during each process according to the gaming state.

  Next, the CPU 56 performs a process of sending an effect control command by setting an effect control command related to a decorative symbol synchronized with the change of the special symbol in a predetermined area of the RAM 55 (effect symbol command control process: step S29). Note that the fact that the variation of the decorative symbol is synchronized with the variation of the special symbol means that the variation time (variable display period) is the same.

  Next, the CPU 56 performs an information output process for outputting data such as jackpot information, starting information, probability variation information supplied to the hall management computer, for example (step S30).

  Further, the CPU 56 executes prize ball processing for setting the number of prize balls based on the detection signals from the prize opening switches 29a, 30a, 33a, 39a, etc. (step S31). Specifically, a payout command command such as a prize ball number command indicating the number of prize balls is output to the payout control board 37 in response to winning detection based on the winning opening switches 29a, 30a, 33a, 39a being turned on. . The payout control microcomputer 370 mounted on the payout control board 37 drives the ball payout device 97 in response to receiving a prize ball number command indicating the number of prize balls.

  Further, the CPU 56 executes a test terminal process which is a process for outputting a test signal for enabling the control state of the gaming machine to be confirmed outside the gaming machine (step S32). In this embodiment, a RAM area (output port buffer) corresponding to the output state of the output port is provided, but the CPU 56 outputs the contents related to the solenoid in the RAM area of the output port 2 to the output port. (Step S33: Output processing). And CPU56 performs the memory | storage process which checks the increase / decrease in a pending | holding memory | storage number (step S34).

  Further, the CPU 56 performs special symbol display control processing for setting special symbol display control data for effect display of the special symbol in the output buffer for setting the special symbol display control data according to the value of the special symbol process flag ( Step S35). The CPU 56 outputs a drive signal in step S22 in accordance with the display control data set in the output buffer, whereby the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 8a and the second special symbol display 8b and Variable display of the second special symbol is executed.

  Next, the CPU 56 performs a normal symbol display control process for setting normal symbol display control data for effect display of the normal symbol in an output buffer for setting the normal symbol display control data according to the value of the normal symbol process flag ( Step S36).

  Further, the CPU 56 performs a status display lamp display process for setting status display control data for displaying each status display lamp in an output buffer for setting the status display control data (step S37). In this case, when the gaming state is a high probability state (for example, a probability variation state), state display control data for displaying the state indicator lamp 1 indicating the high probability state is set in the output buffer. Further, when the gaming state is the short time state, the state display control data for displaying the state indicator lamp 2 indicating the short time state is set in the output buffer.

  In this embodiment, the game control process is started periodically (for example, every 2 ms). In this embodiment, the game control process is executed by the timer interrupt process. However, in the timer interrupt process, for example, only a flag indicating that an interrupt has occurred is set, and the game control process has a flag. It may be executed in the main process based on the setting. In this embodiment, the processing of steps S21 to S37 (excluding steps S30 and S32) corresponds to a game control process for controlling the progress of the game.

  Thereafter, the CPU 56 sets the interrupt permitted state (step S38) and ends the process.

  FIG. 46 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a plurality of types of decorative symbols variably displayed on each of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” variable display portions on the display screen of the image display device 9. In this embodiment, in each of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” variable display portions provided on the display screen of the image display device 9, the symbols indicating the numbers “1” to “9” are, for example, It is variably displayed in combination with a predetermined figure such as a quadrangle, a circle, a substantially diamond, or a star hexagon. A corresponding symbol number is assigned to each of the decorative symbols. The arrangement of decorative symbols displayed in each variable display section includes a common symbol displayed in the same display mode regardless of whether the production state (production mode) is production mode # 1 to # 3, and production. Selection symbols displayed in different display modes according to modes # 1 to # 3 are included.

  For example, symbols indicating numbers “1” to “6”, “8”, and “9” are combined with a rectangular figure regardless of which of the production modes # 1 to # 3. The symbol indicating the number “7” is combined with a circular figure when in the production mode # 1, combined with a substantially rhombus figure when in the production mode # 2, and a star-shaped hexagon when in the production mode # 3. Combined with the figure. The decorative symbols corresponding to the symbol numbers “1” to “6”, “8”, and “9” are common symbols, and the decorative symbol corresponding to the symbol number “7” is a selected symbol.

  In this embodiment, the effect mode is controlled to effect mode # 1 when the game state is the normal state, and the effect mode is controlled to effect mode # 2 when the game state is the short time state, and the game state The production mode is controlled to the production mode # 3 when is in a certain change state. However, such a method of dividing the production mode is an example. For example, the player can select the production mode by operating means such as a push button provided on the gaming machine, or according to the time. You may comprise so that production mode may be switched.

  Next, the special symbol process (step S27) in the main process will be described. FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol process processing program executed by the game control microcomputer 560 (specifically, the CPU 56 of the game control microcomputer 560). In the special symbol process, the game control microcomputer 560 has a first start port switch 13a or a second start for detecting that a game ball has won a first start winning port 13 provided in the game board 6. If the second start opening switch 14a for detecting that the game ball has won the winning opening 14 is turned on, that is, the start winning in which the game ball wins the first start winning opening 13 or the second start winning opening 14 is made. If it has occurred (step S311), after performing the start port switch passing process (step S312), any one of steps S300 to S310 is performed according to the internal state. If the first start winning opening 13 or the second start opening switch 14a is not turned on, any one of steps S300 to S310 is performed according to the internal state.

  In step S311, the game control microcomputer 560 determines whether the bit corresponding to the first start winning port 13 or the second start port switch 14a is on in the input data input from the input port, for example. You may check. Further, for example, in the switch process (see step S21), the flag is set based on the fact that the first start winning port 13 or the second start port switch 14a is continuously turned on twice, and the game control is performed. The microcomputer 560 may confirm whether or not the flag is set in step S311.

  Special symbol normal processing (step S300): Executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is zero. When the game control microcomputer 560 is in a state where the variable symbol special display can be started, the game control microcomputer 560 checks the number of stored numerical data (total number of reserved memories) stored in the reserved memory number buffer. The number of numerical data stored in the reserved storage number buffer can be confirmed by the count value of the total reserved storage number counter. If the count value of the total reserved memory number counter is not 0, it is determined whether or not the display result of variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is a big hit or a small hit. In case of big hit, set big hit flag. In the case of a small hit, a small hit flag is set. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (1 in this example) according to step S301. The big hit flag and the small hit flag are reset when the big hit game or the small hit game ends.

  Fluctuation pattern setting process (step S301): executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 1. The variation pattern of variable display of the special symbol (corresponding to the variation time here) is determined in advance according to the value of the random number MR3 for variation pattern type determination and the random value MR4 for variation pattern extraction extracted at the time of start winning. Select from multiple types of variation patterns. Further, control is performed to transmit information for instructing a variation pattern (a variation pattern command, that is, a variable display pattern command) to the production control microcomputer 100. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (2 in this example) according to step S302.

  In this embodiment, each random number value is extracted at the time of starting winning. However, a random value for determining a variation pattern such as a random number MR3 for variation pattern type determination or a random value MR4 for variation pattern determination. May be extracted at the start of the variation of the special symbol (that is, at the timing of variation pattern determination (see steps S331 and S333)).

  Special symbol variation process (step S302): This is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 2. When the variation time of the variation pattern selected in the variation pattern setting process elapses (the special symbol process timer set in step S301 times out, that is, the value of the special symbol process timer becomes 0), the internal state (special symbol process flag) Is controlled to shift to a value (3 in this example) according to step S303.

  Special symbol stop process (step S303): The special symbol on the special symbol display 8 is stopped. If the stop symbol of the special symbol is a big hit symbol, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to shift to step S304. If not, the internal state is updated to shift to step S300.

  Preliminary winning opening process (step S304): executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 4. In the pre-opening process for the big prize opening, control for opening the big prize opening is performed. Specifically, a counter (for example, a counter that counts the number of game balls that have entered the big prize opening) is initialized, and the solenoid 21 is driven to open the special variable winning ball apparatus to open the big prize opening. To do. Also, the execution time of the special winning opening opening process is set by the process timer, and the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (5 in this example) according to step S305.

  Large winning opening opening process (step S305): executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 5. A control for sending a presentation control command for a round display during the big hit gaming state to the microcomputer 100 for the presentation control, a process for confirming the establishment of the closing condition of the big prize opening, and the like are performed. Further, when the closing condition for the special winning opening is established, the control for closing the special winning opening is performed. Specifically, the solenoid 21 is driven to close the special variable winning ball apparatus to close the special winning opening. In addition, the execution time of the post-hit opening process is set by the process timer, and the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (6 in this example) according to step S306.

  Post-winner opening process (step S306): This process is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 6. Processing such as checking whether there is a remaining round in the big hit gaming state is performed. If there is still a remaining round, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to shift to step S304. When all the rounds are finished, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (7 in this example) according to step S307.

  Big hit end process (step S307): executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 7. Control is performed to cause the microcomputer 100 for effect control to perform display control for notifying the player that the big hit gaming state has ended. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value corresponding to step S300 (in this example, 0).

  Pre-opening process for small hits (step S308: executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 8. In the pre-opening process for small hits, control is performed to open the big winning opening. Specifically, a counter (for example, Etc.), and the solenoid 21 is driven to open the special variable winning ball apparatus to open the big winning opening. The execution time of the process during the hit release is set, and the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (9 in this example) according to step S309. However, in the case of starting a round, the process for opening a small hit game is a process for starting a small hit game.

  Small hit release processing (step S309): executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 9. A control for sending an effect control command for round display during the small hit gaming state to the effect control microcomputer 100, a process for confirming that the closing condition for the big prize opening is satisfied, and the like are performed. If the closing condition for the big prize opening is satisfied and there are still remaining rounds, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to shift to step S308. When all the rounds are finished, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (10 in this example) according to step S310.

  Small hit end processing (step S310): executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 10. Control to end the small hit gaming state. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value corresponding to step S300 (in this example, 0).

  FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing the start-port switch passing process in step S312. In the start port switch passing process executed when at least one of the first start port switch 13a and the second start port switch 14a is on, the CPU 56 is turned on by the first start port switch 13a. Whether or not (step S211). If the first start port switch 13a is on, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the value of the first reserved memory number counter for counting the first reserved memory number is 4 (step S212). If the value of the first reserved memory number counter is 4, the process proceeds to step S221.

  If the value of the first reserved memory number counter is not 4, the CPU 56 increments the value of the first reserved memory number counter by 1 (step S213). Further, the CPU 56 corresponds to the value of the total reserved storage number counter in the reserved storage specific information storage area (hold specific area) for storing the winning order to the first start winning opening 13 and the second start winning opening 14. Data indicating “first” is set in the area (step S214).

  In this embodiment, when the first start opening switch 13a is turned on (that is, when a game ball starts and wins the first start winning opening 13), data indicating “first” is set, When the second start opening switch 14a is turned on (that is, when a game ball starts and wins the second start winning opening 14), data indicating “second” is set. For example, the CPU 56 sets 01 (H) as data indicating “first” when the first start port switch 13 a is turned on in the reserved storage specifying information storage area (holding specified area), and the first 2 When the start port switch 14a is turned on, 02 (H) is set as data indicating “second”. In this case, when there is no corresponding reserved storage, 00 (H) is set in the reserved storage specific information storage area (hold specific area).

  FIG. 49A is an explanatory diagram showing a configuration example of a reserved storage specifying information storage area (holding specified area). As shown in FIG. 49A, an area corresponding to the maximum value (8 in this example) of the total reserved memory number counter is secured in the reserved specific area. FIG. 49A shows an example in which the value of the total pending storage number counter is 5. As shown in FIG. 49 (A), an area corresponding to the maximum value (8 in this example) of the total reserved memory number counter is secured in the reserved specific area. Data indicating “first” or “second” is set in the order of winning based on winning in the 2-start winning opening 14. Accordingly, in the reserved storage specific information storage area (hold specific area), the winning order to the first start winning opening 13 and the second starting winning opening 14 is stored. Note that the reserved specific area is formed in the RAM 55.

  In this embodiment, either the first special symbol variation display or the second special symbol variation display is preferentially executed depending on whether or not the gaming state is the probability variation state or the time reduction state. The reserved storage specific information storage area (hold specific area) may not be provided. In other words, in this embodiment, if the gaming state is in the short-time state, the variable display of the second special symbol is always executed on condition that the second reserved memory number is not 0, and if the gaming state is not in the short-time state, the first Since the control is performed so that the variable display of the first special symbol is always executed on condition that the reserved memory number is not 0, the winning order of the first starting winning port 13 alone and the winning order of the second starting winning port 14 alone are controlled. As long as it can be specified, it is not always necessary to specify the winning order to the first start winning opening 13 and the second starting winning opening 14.

  In addition, you may make it perform the fluctuation | variation display of a special symbol in order of winning to the start winning opening 13,14. In this case, when the CPU 56 starts changing the special symbol, the data set in the first area of the reserved storage specifying information storage area (holding specified area) is “first” or “second”. If the data indicating that it is “first” is set, the variable display of the first special symbol is executed. When data indicating “second” is set, the variable display of the second special symbol is executed.

  Also, in this embodiment, when the game state is in a probabilistic state or a short-time state, priority is given to either the first special symbol variation display or the second special symbol variation display. However, regardless of whether it is in the probabilistic state or the short-time state, the variable display of the second special symbol may always be prioritized and executed on condition that the second reserved memory number is not 0. Good. Conversely, the variable display of the first special symbol is always executed with priority on the condition that the first reserved memory number is not 0, regardless of whether the state is the probability change state or the time reduction state. Good.

  FIG. 49B is an explanatory diagram showing a configuration example of an area (hold buffer) for storing random numbers and the like corresponding to the hold memory. As shown in FIG. 49B, a storage area corresponding to the upper limit value (4 in this example) of the first reserved storage number is secured in the first reserved storage buffer. In addition, a storage area corresponding to the upper limit value of the second reserved storage number (4 in this example) is secured in the second reserved storage buffer. The first reserved storage buffer and the second reserved storage buffer are formed in the RAM 55.

  Next, the CPU 56 selects each random number value (random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, random number value MR2-1 for determining the big hit type, reach determination) from among the numerical data updated by the random number circuit 503 or the random counter. Random number value MR2-2, random number value MR3 for variation pattern type determination, random number value MR4 for variation pattern determination) are extracted and stored in the storage area in the first reserved storage buffer (step S3). Step S215).

  Next, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a first start port winning designation command (step S216). Further, the CPU 56 increments the value of the total reserved memory number counter indicating the total reserved memory number, which is the sum of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number (step S217). Then, the CPU 56 transmits a reserved memory number notification command indicating the total reserved memory number based on the value of the total reserved memory number counter (step S218). In addition, you may transmit a pending | holding memory | storage number notification command before a 1st start opening winning designation | designated command.

  Next, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the second start port switch 14a is turned on (step S221). If the second start port switch 14a is on, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the value of the second reserved memory number counter for counting the second reserved memory number is 4 (step S222). If the value of the second reserved memory number counter is 4, the process is terminated. If the value of the second reserved memory number counter is 4, the CPU 56 may perform the process of confirming again whether the first start port switch 13a is on (see step S211).

  If the value of the second reserved memory number counter is not 4, the CPU 56 increments the value of the second reserved memory number counter by 1 (step S223). In addition, the CPU 56 sets data indicating “second” in an area corresponding to the value of the total reserved memory number counter in the reserved storage specifying information storage area (holding specified area) (step S224).

  Next, the CPU 56 selects each random number value (random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, random number value MR2-1 for determining the big hit type, reach determination) from among the numerical data updated by the random number circuit 503 or the random counter. Random number value MR2-2, random number value MR3 for variation pattern type determination, random number value MR4 for variation pattern determination) are extracted, and a process of storing them in the storage area in the second reserved storage buffer is executed ( Step S225).

  Next, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a second start opening winning designation command (step S226). Further, the CPU 56 increases the value of the total reserved memory number counter by 1 (step S227). Then, the CPU 56 transmits a pending storage count notification command based on the value of the total pending storage count counter (step S228). In addition, you may transmit a pending | holding memory | storage number notification command before a 2nd start opening winning designation | designated command.

  When transmitting an effect control command to the effect control microcomputer 100, the CPU 56 sets the address of a command transmission table (preliminarily set for each command in the ROM) corresponding to the effect control command as a pointer. And the address of the command transmission table according to an effect control command is set to a pointer, and an effect control command is transmitted in an effect control command control process (step S29).

  Moreover, in this embodiment, the case where the first reserved memory number buffer and the second reserved memory number buffer are separately provided is taken as an example, but the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number are common. A reserved storage number buffer may be provided. FIG. 50 is an explanatory diagram showing a configuration example of a common reserved memory number buffer provided in common for the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number. As shown in FIG. 50, the common reserved storage number buffer includes eight areas obtained by combining the reserved storage specifying information storage area and the random value storage area. In the common reserved storage number buffer, consecutive addresses are assigned to the reserved storage specific information storage area and the random value storage area.

  When using the common reserved memory number buffer, the CPU 56 increments the value of the first reserved memory number counter by 1 in step S213, and then replaces the process in step S214 with the first reserved memory in the free area of the common reserved memory number buffer. A process of setting data indicating “first” in the specific information storage area is executed. Further, after incrementing the value of the second reserved memory number counter by 1 in step S223, the CPU 56 replaces the process in step S224 with the reserved information specifying information storage area at the head of the empty area of the common reserved memory number buffer. A process of setting data indicating “second” is executed. Specifically, the CPU 56 determines the position of the pointer that specifies the address of the data storage destination based on the total number of reserved memories (which may be obtained by adding the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number each time). By updating, data is set in the reserved storage specific information storage area at the head of the empty area of the common reserved storage number buffer.

  When specifying the head of the free area of the common reserved memory number buffer, for example, the value obtained by multiplying the total number of reserved memories by the number of data to be stored in the common reserved memory number buffer per one reserved memory (that is, hold A value obtained by adding one storage specific information storage area) is obtained as an address offset value, and the pointer is updated according to the obtained offset value. For example, in the example shown in FIG. 50, two data storage areas, a reserved storage specific information storage area and a random number storage area, are provided for each reserved storage in the common reserved storage number buffer. Therefore, a value obtained by adding 1 (that is, one area of the reserved storage specific information storage area) to a value obtained by doubling the total number of reserved memories is obtained as an address offset value, and the pointer is updated according to the obtained offset value. For example, when the total number of reserved memories is 3, as shown in FIG. 50, the reserved memory specifying information storage area corresponding to the offset value +7 (a value obtained by doubling the total number of reserved memories 3 and adding 1). Set the data to. In this case, when the process of step S214 is performed, the data indicating “first” is set in the reserved storage specifying information storage area, and when the process of step S224 is performed, the data indicating “second” is specified as the reserved storage. Set in the information storage area. For example, in the common reserved storage number buffer, the reserved storage specific information storage area and the two random number storage areas (for example, for the random value MR1 for the special figure display result determination and for the jackpot type determination) When a total of three data storage areas (for random number MR2-1) are provided, 1 is added to the value obtained by multiplying the total number of reserved memories by three (that is, one area for the reserved storage specific information storage area) The obtained value may be obtained as an address offset value, and the pointer may be updated according to the obtained offset value.

  When the initial position of the pointer for designating the data storage destination address is set as the first area of the common reserved memory number buffer (the reserved storage specific information storage area for the reserved storage 1 shown in FIG. 50), the CPU 56 The value obtained by multiplying the total number of reserved memories by the number of data stored in the common reserved memory number buffer for one reserved memory may be obtained as the offset value of the address. For example, in the example shown in FIG. 50, a value obtained by doubling the total number of reserved memories may be obtained as the address offset value. Then, the CPU 56 may control to update the pointer by setting the position of the pointer to a position moved by an offset value from the initial position. For example, in the common reserved storage number buffer, the reserved storage specific information storage area and the two random number storage areas (for example, for the random value MR1 for the special figure display result determination and for the jackpot type determination) When a total of three data storage areas for the random number MR2-1) are provided, a value obtained by multiplying the total number of reserved storages by three may be obtained as an address offset value.

  In addition, the CPU 56 replaces the processing of steps S215 and S225 with each random number value (random number value MR1 for special figure display result determination, random value MR2-1 for jackpot type determination, random number value MR2-2 for reach determination. The random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type and the random value MR4 for determining the variation pattern) are extracted and stored in the random value storage area at the head of the free area of the common reserved storage number buffer. Specifically, after setting the data in the reserved storage specific information storage area, the CPU 56 updates the position of the pointer that designates the address by one, and stores the random value in the random value storage area at the address pointed to by the updated pointer. Is stored. Note that the CPU 56 may perform the same processing for the number of types of random number values to be stored.

  FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing the special symbol normal process (step S300) in the special symbol process. In the special symbol normal process, the CPU 56 first checks the value of the total number of reserved storage (step S1501). Specifically, the count value of the total pending storage number counter is confirmed. In the special symbol normal process, the CPU 56 first determines whether or not the total reserved memory number that is the total value of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number is “0” based on the total reserved memory number count value or the like. Is determined (step S1501).

  If the total reserved storage number is “0”, the CPU 56 executes a demo display setting process for producing a customer waiting demonstration (step S1502). Specifically, the CPU 56 checks whether or not a demonstration display flag indicating that a customer waiting demonstration effect is being executed is set. If it is set, the special symbol normal process is terminated as it is. If not set, the CPU 56 sets a demonstration display flag and transmits a demonstration display command for designating display of a customer waiting demonstration to the production control microcomputer 100.

  If the total number of reserved memories is not “0”, the CPU 56 checks whether or not a probability change flag indicating that the gaming state is a probability change state or a time reduction flag indicating that the game state is a time reduction state is set. (Step S1503). If neither the probability change flag nor the time reduction flag is set, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the first reserved storage number is “0” (step S1504). Specifically, the count value of the first reserved memory number counter is confirmed. If the first reserved memory number is not “0”, a special symbol pointer (a flag indicating whether special symbol process processing is being performed for the first special symbol or special symbol process processing is being performed for the second special symbol) Data indicating “first” is set (step S1506). If the first reserved storage number is “0”, data indicating “second” is set in the special symbol pointer (step S1507). That is, since the gaming state is the normal state, the first start winning opening 13 is easier to start and win and the first reserved memory number is more likely to accumulate than the second starting winning opening 14. Control is performed so that the variable display of the first special symbol is preferentially executed on condition that the number of reserved memories is not “0”.

  If the probability change flag or the time reduction flag is set, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the second reserved storage number is “0” (step S1505). Specifically, the count value of the second reserved memory number counter is confirmed. If the second reserved memory number is not “0”, data indicating “second” is set in the special symbol pointer (step S1507). If the second reserved storage number is “0”, data indicating “first” is set in the special symbol pointer (step S1506). That is, the gaming state is a probable change state or a short time state, and the second start winning port 14 is easier to start and wins than the first start winning port 13, and the second reserved memory number is more likely to accumulate. Control is performed so that the variable display of the second special symbol is preferentially executed on condition that the second reserved memory number is not “0”.

  In the RAM 55, the CPU 56 reads out each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the reserved storage number = 1 indicated by the special symbol pointer, and stores it in the random number buffer area of the RAM 55 (step S1508). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates “first”, the CPU 56 determines each disturbance stored in the storage area corresponding to the first reserved memory number = 1 in the first reserved memory number buffer. Numeric values (specifically, numeric data indicating the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result and numerical data indicating the random value MR2-1 for determining the big hit type) are read out and stored in the random number buffer area of the RAM 55. When the special symbol pointer indicates “second”, the CPU 56 determines each random number value (specifically, stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved memory number = 1 in the second reserved memory number buffer). Specifically, the numerical data indicating the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result and the numerical data indicating the random value MR2-1 for determining the jackpot type are read out and stored in the random number buffer area of the RAM 55.

  Then, the CPU 56 decrements the count value of the reserved storage number counter indicated by the special symbol pointer and shifts the contents of each storage area (step S1509). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates “first”, the CPU 56 decrements the count value of the first reserved storage number counter by 1 and shifts the contents of each storage area. When the special symbol pointer indicates “second”, the count value of the second reserved memory number counter is decremented by 1, and the contents of each storage area are shifted.

  Next, the CPU 56 subtracts 1 from the value of the total reserved memory number counter (step S1510), and transmits a reserved memory number notification command based on the value of the total reserved memory number counter after the subtraction (step S1511).

  Next, the CPU 56 sets the special figure display result determination table indicated by the special symbol pointer (step S1512). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates “first”, as a use table for determining whether the variable display result is “lost”, “big hit”, or “small hit” The first special figure display result determination table 130A shown in FIG. 10A is selected and set. In this case, for example, in the process of step S1512, the storage address (first address) of the first special figure display result determination table 130A in the ROM 54 may be set in a determination table pointer or the like provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 55. Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates “second”, as a use table for determining whether the variable display result is “lost”, “big hit”, or “small hit”, FIG. The second special figure display result determination table 130B shown in (B) is selected and set. In this case, for example, in the processing of step S1512, the storage address (first address) of the second special figure display result determination table 130B in the ROM 54 may be set in a determination table pointer or the like provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 55.

  Next, the CPU 56 refers to the first special figure display result determination table 130A or the second special figure display result determination table 130B set in step S1512, thereby reading the random number value for special figure display result determination read in step S1508. It is determined whether or not the numerical data indicating MR1 matches the jackpot determination value data (step S1513). In this case, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the probability variation flag is in the on state. If the probability variation flag is in the on state, the CPU 56 determines whether or not the jackpot determination value data corresponding to the probability variation flag on shown in FIG. Determine. Further, if the probability variation flag is in an off state, it is determined whether or not the jackpot determination value data corresponding to the probability variation flag off shown in FIG. By doing so, when the gaming state is a probable change state, it is determined that a big hit is made at a higher rate than in the normal state or the short time state.

  When the numerical data indicating the random value MR1 matches the big hit determination value data (Y in step S1513), the CPU 56 sets a big hit flag indicating that the big hit is determined to be in an on state (step S1514). Next, the CPU 56 selects and sets the jackpot type determination table 131 shown in FIG. 11 as a use table for determining the jackpot type as one of a plurality of types (step S1515). The CPU 56 refers to the jackpot type determination table 131 set in step S1515 based on the numerical data indicating the random number value MR2-1 for jackpot type determination read out in step S1508, and determines the jackpot type as “normal”. ”,“ First probability variation ”,“ second probability variation ”,“ third probability variation ”, and“ surprising probability ”are determined (step S1516). In this case, when the value of the special symbol pointer is “1”, the CPU 56 determines the type of jackpot based on the jackpot type buffer value corresponding to the special symbol pointer “1” shown in FIG. . When the value of the special symbol pointer is “2”, the type of jackpot is determined based on the jackpot type buffer value corresponding to the special symbol pointer “2” shown in FIG.

  When the processing of step S1507 is executed and the special symbol pointer value is set to “2”, as shown in FIG. 11, the big hit type determination is made for the big hit type of “surprise” in the big hit type determination table 131. Since the random number value MR2-1 for use is not assigned, the jackpot type is not determined to be “surprising”.

  Then, the CPU 56 sets the jackpot type buffer value to any one of “00” to “04” corresponding to the jackpot type determined in step S1517 (step S1517).

  If the numerical data indicating the random value MR1 does not match the big hit determination value data (N in step S1513), the numerical data indicating the special figure display result determination random value MR1 read in step S1508 is the small hit determination. It is determined whether or not the value data matches (step S1518). In this case, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the probability variation flag is in the on state. If the probability variation flag is in the on state, the CPU 56 determines whether or not the small hit determination value data corresponding to the probability variation flag on shown in FIG. Determine whether. Further, if the probability variation flag is in the OFF state, it is determined whether or not the small hit determination value data corresponding to the probability variation flag OFF shown in FIG.

  When the process of step S1507 is executed and the special symbol pointer value is set to “2”, the small hit determination value data is assigned in the second special diagram display result determination table 130B as shown in FIG. Because it is not, it is not determined to be a small hit. Therefore, in this embodiment, only when the process of step S1507 is executed and the special symbol pointer value is set to “2” (that is, only when the variable display of the first special symbol is performed), the small hit is determined. There is a case.

  If the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result matches the small hit determination value data (Y in step S1518), the CPU 56 sets the small hit flag indicating that the small hit is determined to be in the ON state. (Step S1519). Then, control goes to a step S1520. If the numerical data indicating the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result does not match the small hit determination value data (N in step S1518), the process proceeds to step S1521.

  Next, the CPU 56 sets a maximum value for the number of times of winning a prize opening (step S1520). In this case, for example, as shown in FIG. 52, if the big hit type is “normal” or “first probability variation” to “third probability variation”, the CPU 56 sets the maximum value of the number of winning prize openings to 15 times. Set to “15” corresponding to the open game. In addition, when the big hit type is “surprise” or the small hit type is “small hit”, the CPU 56 sets the maximum number of big winning opening to “2” corresponding to the double open game. To do. Note that the CPU 56 may set the maximum value of the number of times of winning the big winning opening before the start of the big hit game (for example, special symbol stop processing or pre-opening of the big winning opening).

  Next, the CPU 56 sets a confirmed special symbol corresponding to the result of determining the variable display result and determining the jackpot type (step S1521). As an example, if the numerical value data indicating the random number MR1 does not match the small hit determination value data in step S1518, a lost symbol is obtained corresponding to the determination result that the variable display result is “lost”. The special symbol indicating the symbol “−” is set as the confirmed special symbol. If the numerical data indicating the random number MR1 matches the small hit determination value data in step S1518, the small hit symbol is displayed corresponding to the determination result that the variable display result is “small hit”. The special symbol indicating the number “5” is set as the confirmed special symbol. Further, when the numerical data indicating the random number MR1 matches the big hit determination value data in step S1513, “1”, “3”, “7” which become the big hit symbols according to the determination result of the big hit type in step S1516. Any of the special symbols indicating the numbers "" is set as the confirmed special symbol. That is, according to the determination result that the jackpot type is “normal”, the special symbol indicating the number “3” that is the normal jackpot symbol is set as the confirmed special symbol. Further, according to the determination result that the big hit type is any one of “first probability variation” to “third probability variation”, the special symbol indicating the number “7” that becomes the probability variation big hit symbol is set as the confirmed special symbol. Further, according to the determination result that the big hit type is “surprise”, the special symbol indicating the number “1” that becomes the two round big hit symbol is set as the confirmed special symbol.

  Then, the CPU 56 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the variation pattern setting process (step S301) (step S1522).

  FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing the variation pattern setting process (step S301) in the special symbol process. In the variation pattern setting process, the CPU 56 first determines whether or not the big hit flag is on (step S321). If the big hit flag is on (Y in step S321), the CPU 56 determines whether the gaming state is the normal state, the probability change state, or the time reduction state (specifically, whether the probability change flag is set or the time reduction As shown in FIG. 12 and FIG. 13, fluctuations for jackpots are used as a use table for determining one of a plurality of fluctuation pattern types according to the table selection setting shown in FIG. Any one of the pattern type determination tables 132A to 132I is selected and set (step S322). Then, the process proceeds to step S331.

  When the big hit flag is off (N in step S321), the CPU 56 determines whether or not the small hit flag is on (step S323). If the small hit flag is on (Y in step S323), the CPU 56 determines whether the gaming state is the normal state, the probability variation state, or the time reduction state (specifically, whether the probability variation flag is set, 14 is used as a use table for determining one of a plurality of variation pattern types in accordance with the table selection setting shown in FIG. 14D, based on whether the time reduction flag is set. Any one of the type determination tables 133A to 133C is selected and set (step S324). Then, the process proceeds to step S331.

  When the small hit flag is off (N in step S323), that is, when it is out of play, it is based on whether the gaming state is a normal state, a probability change state, or a short-time state (specifically, For determining whether or not the variable display state of the decorative symbol is set to the reach state according to the table selection setting shown in FIG. 15D) (based on whether the probability variation flag or the time reduction flag is set). As the use table, one of the reach determination tables 134A to 134C shown in FIG. 15 is selected and set (step S325).

  Next, the CPU 56 specifies the total reserved memory number by, for example, reading the count value of the total reserved memory number counter (step S326). Next, the CPU 56 determines whether or not there is a reach state by referring to one of the reach determination tables 134A to 134C set in step S325 based on the specified total number of reserved storage and the random number MR2-2 for determination of reach. (Step S327). In this case, the CPU 56 reads the random number value MR2-2 for reach determination stored in the storage area corresponding to the reserved storage number = 1 indicated by the special symbol pointer, and reads the read random number value MR2 for reach determination. -2 determines whether or not a reach state exists.

  When the determination result indicating that the reach state is present is obtained (Y in step S328), the CPU 56 determines whether one of the reach HA2-1 to the reach HA2-3, the reach HB2-1, or the reach HC2-1 in step S328. As a use table for determining the variation pattern type as one of a plurality of types according to the determination result of the reach state (see FIG. 15), reach variation pattern type determination table 135A to 135 shown in FIG. One of 135C is selected and set (step S329). If a determination result indicating that there is no reach state is obtained (N in step S328), the CPU 56 determines in step S328 that non-reach HA1-1 to non-reach HA1-5, non-reach HB1-1, non-reach HB1. -2, use to determine the variation pattern type as one of a plurality of types depending on whether the non-reach HC1-1 or the non-reach HC1-2 is determined to have no reach state (see FIG. 15) As the table, any one of the non-reach variation pattern type determination tables 136A to 136C shown in FIG. 18 is selected and set (step S330). Then, the process proceeds to step S331.

  Next, the CPU 56 refers to the use table set in any one of steps S322, S324, S329, and S330 based on the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern type, and sets the variation pattern type to one of a plurality of types. Determine (step S331). In this case, the CPU 56 reads the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type stored in the storage area corresponding to the number of reserved storages = 1 indicated by the special symbol pointer, and reads the random number value for determining the variation pattern type. The variation pattern type is determined based on the numerical value MR3.

  In the process of step S331, based on the establishment of the first start condition, the first special symbol display 8a determines the variation pattern type of the decorative symbol corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol, or the second start condition is Regardless of whether the variation pattern type of the decorative symbol corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol is determined by the second special symbol indicator 8b based on the establishment, the variation pattern type determination updated by a common random counter or the like Using the numerical data indicating the common random number value MR3 to be used, the variation pattern type is determined as one of a plurality of types. Further, in the process of step S331, regardless of the determination result of the presence or absence of the reach state in step S327, using the numerical data indicating the common random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type, the variation pattern type is determined by a common processing module. Can be determined as one of a plurality of types. As an example, in the process of step S331, the variation pattern type may be determined with reference to the determination table stored in the address of the ROM 54 set in the determination table pointer.

  Next, the CPU 56 uses hit variation pattern determination tables 137A to 137C (see FIGS. 19 and 20) and loss variation as use tables for determining one of a plurality of variation patterns based on the determination result of the variation pattern type. One of a plurality of types of variation pattern determination tables such as pattern determination tables 138A and 138B (FIGS. 21 and 22) is selected and set (step S332). Next, the CPU 56 refers to the variation pattern determination table set in step S332 based on the variation pattern determination random value MR4, and thereby, among the plurality of types of variation patterns included in the variation pattern type determined in step S331. Either one is determined (step S333). In this case, the CPU 56 reads the random number value MR4 for determining the variation pattern stored in the storage area corresponding to the number of reserved storages = 1 indicated by the special symbol pointer, and reads the random number MR4 for determining the variation pattern thus read out. Based on this, the variation pattern is determined.

  In the process of step S333, based on the fact that the first starting condition is satisfied, the first special symbol display 8a determines a variation pattern of the decorative symbol corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol, or the second starting condition is satisfied. Regardless of whether or not the second special symbol display unit 8b determines the variation pattern of the decorative symbol corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol, the variation pattern is updated by a common random counter or the like. One of a plurality of types of variation patterns included in the variation pattern type determined in step S331 is determined using numerical data indicating the common random value MR4. Further, in the process of step S333, regardless of the determination result of the presence or absence of the reach state in step S327, a plurality of variation patterns are generated by a common processing module using numerical data indicating the common random value MR4 used for variation pattern determination. Can be determined to any of the types. As an example, in the process of step S333, the variation pattern may be determined with reference to the determination table stored in the address of the ROM 54 set in the determination table pointer.

  Next, the CPU 56 starts changing the special symbol indicated by the special symbol pointer (step S334). Further, the CPU 56 sets the special figure fluctuation time in the fluctuation time timer according to the determination result of the fluctuation pattern in step S333 (step S335).

  Next, the CPU 56 performs settings for transmitting various commands for use in starting the special symbol variation (step S336). For example, when the special symbol pointer value is 1, the CPU 56 performs control to sequentially transmit the first variation start command, the variation pattern designation command, and the display result command from the main substrate 31 to the effect control substrate 80. When the special symbol pointer value is 2, the CPU 56 performs control to sequentially transmit the second variation start command, the variation pattern designation command, and the display result command from the main substrate 31 to the effect control substrate 80. Note that in step S336, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the time reduction flag is set when it is out of place. If the time reduction flag is set, control is performed so as to transmit the first display result command among the display result commands shown in FIG. If the time reduction flag is not set, control is performed so as to transmit the second display result command among the display result commands shown in FIG. Note that the command is specifically transmitted by the effect symbol command control process (see step S29) performed by the CPU 56 in accordance with the setting in step S336.

  In this embodiment, the CPU 56 performs the process of step S336, and executes the effect symbol command control process (see step S29) according to the setting of step S336, thereby shifting to at least the specific gaming state (big hit gaming state). Whether or not and a variable display pattern (variation pattern) can be specified is transmitted. As shown in this embodiment, the command transmission means may transmit the variation pattern command that can identify the variation pattern and the display result command that can identify the display result as separate commands. Only one command (for example, a variation pattern command that can specify both the variation pattern and the display result) may be transmitted.

  Then, the CPU 56 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol variation process (step S302) (step S337).

  In this embodiment, in step S327, based on the total reserved storage number, the determination process is performed using any one of the reach determination tables 134A to 134C illustrated in FIG. When the gaming state is the normal state, when the total number of reserved memories (that is, the total number of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number) is large, the frequency of executing the reach effect during the variable display is reduced. Thus, the presence or absence of the reach state is determined.

  Further, in this embodiment, in step S331, using the non-reach variation pattern type determination table set in step S330 according to the determination result in which the presence or absence of the reach state is determined based on the total number of reserved storage in step S327. When the variation pattern type is determined and the variation pattern is finally determined in step S333, the variation pattern for the shortened variation is determined when the total number of reserved memories is large when the reach effect is not executed and the reach effect is not executed. Is done. Specifically, when the gaming state is the normal state and the total number of reserved memories is 3 or 4, it is determined to be non-reach PA1-2, which is a variation pattern for shortening, and the total number of reserved memories is When the number is 5 to 8, it is determined to be non-reach PA1-3 which is a variation pattern for shortening. Further, when the gaming state is a probable change state and the total number of reserved memories is 2 to 8, it is determined to be non-reach PB1-2 which is a shortening variation pattern. Further, when the gaming state is the short-time state and the total number of reserved memories is 2 to 8, it is determined to be non-reach PC1-2 that is a variation pattern for shortening.

  In this embodiment, the special figure display result is obtained from the numerical data updated by the random number circuit 503 or the random counter at the time of winning the game ball to the first start winning opening 13 or the second starting winning opening 14. All of random number MR1 for determination, random value MR2-1 for jackpot type determination, random value MR2-2 for reach determination, random value MR3 for variation pattern type determination, and random value MR4 for variation pattern determination Although the case where it is extracted and stored in the storage area in the first reserved storage buffer or the second reserved storage buffer is shown, the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type and the random value MR4 for determining the variation pattern are started. You may make it extract not at the time of winning a prize, but at the time of a change start of a 1st special symbol or a 2nd special symbol.

  For example, when the random number values MR3 and MR4 are extracted at the start of fluctuation of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the CPU 56 performs the first start port switch 13a or the second start port switch in the start port switch passing process. When ON of 14a is detected (see steps S211 and S221), a random number MR1 for determining a special figure display result and a random for determining a big hit type are selected from the numerical data updated by the random number circuit 503 or the random counter. Only the numerical value MR2-1 and the random number MR2-2 for reach determination are extracted and stored in the storage area in the first reserved storage buffer or the second reserved storage buffer (see steps S215 and S225). In step S331 of the variation pattern setting process, the CPU 56 extracts the variation pattern type determination random number MR3 from the numerical data updated by the random number circuit 503 and the random counter, and extracts the extracted variation pattern type determination. The variation pattern type is determined based on the random number MR3. Further, in step S333 of the variation pattern setting process, the CPU 56 extracts the variation pattern determination random value MR4 from the numerical data updated by the random number circuit 503 and the random counter, and extracts the extracted variation pattern determination. A variation pattern is determined based on the random value MR4.

  For example, all random values including the random number value MR3 for variation pattern type determination and the random value MR4 for variation pattern determination are extracted at the time of starting winning and stored in the storage area in the first reserved storage buffer or the second reserved storage buffer. Then, when a game ball wins the first start winning opening 13 and the second starting winning opening 14 by chance at the same time, the storage area of the first reserved storage buffer and the storage area of the second reserved storage buffer May store the same random value. If it does so, the situation where a fluctuation display will be performed according to the same fluctuation pattern by the fluctuation display of the 1st special symbol and the fluctuation display of the 2nd special symbol which are performed after that will arise. On the other hand, as described above, if the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type and the random value MR4 for determining the variation pattern are extracted at the start of variation, the first start winning opening 13 and the second Even if a game ball wins at the start winning opening 14 by chance, the variation pattern of the variation display of the first special symbol and the variation display of the second special symbol executed after that may be made different. it can.

  Further, in this embodiment, the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random value MR2-1 for determining the jackpot type, the random value MR2-2 for determining the reach, and the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type In the above description, the random value MR4 for determining the variation pattern is configured to be updated at any time using the random number circuit 503 or the random counter. For example, the random value is updated at random using a refresh register. May be. By doing so, the variation pattern used for the variation display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol can be determined more randomly, and the interest in the game can be improved.

  FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing the special symbol variation process (step S302) in the special symbol process. In the special symbol variation process, first, the CPU 56 decrements the value of the special symbol process timer by 1 (step S351). Then, it is confirmed whether or not the special symbol process timer has expired (that is, whether or not the value of the special symbol process timer is 0), and if it has not expired (N in step S352), it remains as it is. The special symbol variation process is terminated. If the special symbol process timer has expired (Y in step S352), the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value corresponding to step S303 (step S353).

  FIG. 55 is a flowchart showing the special symbol variation stop process (step S303) in the special symbol process. In the special symbol variation stop process, the CPU 56 stops the variation of the special symbol on the special symbol display 8 and derives and displays the stopped symbol (step S1301). Further, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a decoration design stop designation command (8F00 (H)) for designating the stop of the variation of the decoration design in the variable display device 9 to the effect control microcomputer 100 (step S1302). Then, it is confirmed whether or not the big hit flag is set (step S1303).

  If the jackpot flag is set (Y in step S1303), the CPU 56 displays the jackpot symbol after stopping the jackpot symbol on the jackpot control timer that measures the time for controlling the opening / closing of the jackpot. Is set (step S1304). The execution time (big hit display time (eg, 3 seconds)) of the effect (fanfare effect) for notifying the player that the game is started is set (step S1304). Then, the CPU 56 transmits a hit start designation command (fanfare designation command) to the effect control microcomputer 100 (step S1305).

  Next, the CPU 56 resets the big hit flag (step S1306), and if it is set, resets the probability variation flag, the time reduction flag, and the time reduction counter (step S1307). Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value corresponding to step S304 (step S1308).

  If the big hit flag is not set in step S1303, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the hourly flag is set (step S1309). If not set, the process proceeds to step S1313. If it is set, the CPU 56 subtracts 1 from the value of the time reduction counter (step S1310) and checks whether the value after subtraction of the time reduction counter is 0 (step S1311). The time reduction counter is a counter for counting the number of execution times of the special symbol and decorative symbol change display after shifting to the time reduction state.

  If the value of the time reduction counter is not 0, the CPU 56 proceeds to step S1313 as it is. If the value of the time reduction counter is 0, the CPU 56 resets the time reduction flag (step S1312). That is, after shifting to the time-saving state after the big hit, the special symbol and the decorative symbol change display are completed a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times), so the time-saving flag is reset and the normal state is entered.

  Next, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the small hit flag is set (step S1313). If the small winning flag is set (Y in step S1313), the CPU 56 stops displaying the small winning symbol on the large winning opening control timer that measures the time for controlling the opening / closing of the large winning opening. An execution time (small hit display time (for example, 3 seconds)) for informing the player that the small hit game is started is set (step S1314). Then, the CPU 56 transmits a hit start designation command (fanfare designation command) to the effect control microcomputer 100 (step S1315).

  Next, the CPU 56 resets the small hit flag (step S1316). Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value corresponding to step S308 (step S1317).

  If the small hit flag is not set in step S1313, the CPU 56 updates the internal state (special symbol process flag) to a value corresponding to step S300 (step S1318).

  FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing the jackpot end process (step S307) in the special symbol process. In the big hit end process, the CPU 56 decrements the value of the big prize opening control timer by -1 (step S461). Then, it is confirmed whether or not the value of the big prize opening control timer is 0 (step S462). If the value of the big prize opening control timer is not 0 (N in step S462), the process is terminated.

  If the value of the big prize control timer is 0 (Y in step S462), the CPU 56 reads the big hit type buffer value determined in step S1516 (step S463). Next, the CPU 56 determines whether or not the read jackpot type buffer value is “00” corresponding to the “normal” jackpot type (step S464). In this case, if the big hit type buffer value is “00” (Y in step S464), the CPU 56 sets the time reduction flag (step S465) and starts the time reduction counter to start the control to the time reduction state. A predetermined value (for example, “100”) is set (step S466). Then, control goes to a step S470.

  If the big hit type buffer value is other than “00” in step S464 (N in step S313), a probability variation flag is set (step S467) and a time reduction flag is set to start control to the probability variation state. (Step S468). In addition, a predetermined value (for example, “100”) is set in the time reduction counter (step S469). Then, control goes to a step S470. Note that the time reduction state may be continued until the next big hit occurs without setting a predetermined value in the time reduction counter in step S469.

  Then, the CPU 56 updates the internal state (special symbol process flag) to a value corresponding to step S300 (step S470).

  FIG. 57 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a customer waiting demonstration effect. In FIG. 57, (1) to (n) respectively show images of frames constituting a moving image effect. Also, the rectangles in FIGS. 57 (1) to 57 (n) indicate the display screen of the image display device 9. In the example shown in FIG. 57, the last stopped display of the decorative design is displayed as it is on the variable display unit as it is, but a moving image is displayed in an area other than the variable display unit on the display screen.

  FIG. 58 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a method of using the frame buffer 85. As shown in FIG. 58, two areas (areas 0 and 1) corresponding to the screen of the image display device 9 are secured in the frame buffer 85. Areas 0 and 1 are called virtual areas or frame memories. In the areas 0 and 1 in the frame memory, part images such as character images are developed from the CGROM 83 via the VRAM 84 as appropriate (for example, when image data is needed). If image data exists in the area of the VRAM 84, the image data is expanded from the area to the areas 0 and 1. When the component image is developed in the area 0, an image signal based on the image data of the area 1 is output to the image display device 9, and when the component image is expanded in the area 1, the image based on the image data of the area 0 is output. A signal is output to the image display device 9. When the component image is expanded in the area 0, the area 0 is a drawing area, and when the component image is expanded in the area 1, the area 1 is the drawing area. Further, when image data is read from the area 0 and an image signal based on the image data is output to the image display device 9, the area 0 is a display area, the image data is read from the area 1, and the image When an image signal based on the data is output to the image display device 9, area 1 is the display area. Thus, the areas 0 and 1 are used as a double buffer.

  FIG. 59 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of how to use the VRAM 84. In the VRAM 84, a buffer area (transfer area from the CGROM) for component images is secured. The transfer destination area from the CGROM stores a part image (specifically, source data of the part image) that is highly likely to be used at that time, that is, highly likely to be drawn in the drawing area of the frame memory. The It is also used as a temporary storage area for image data developed from the CGROM to the frame memory.

  In this embodiment, the frame buffer 85 and the VRAM 84 are provided outside the drawing processor 109, but the drawing processor 109 incorporating the frame buffer 85 and the VRAM 84 may be used.

  FIG. 60 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of an address map of the frame memory. In FIG. 60, a region 0 is illustrated. In the frame memory, the portion corresponding to the upper left of the display screen of the image display device 9 is assigned to the smallest address, the next address is assigned to the portion corresponding to the right on the display screen, and the rightmost of the row on the display screen. The address next to the address of the portion corresponding to is assigned to the portion corresponding to the leftmost of the next row. In the same manner, the address next to the address corresponding to the rightmost part of a certain row is assigned to the part corresponding to the leftmost position of the next line. The address value shown in FIG. 60 is an example.

  FIG. 61 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a method of developing image data from the CGROM 83 to the frame memory. As shown in FIG. 61A, image data may be transferred from a fixed area of the VRAM 84 to the frame memory. The fixed area is an area in which the image data of the component image is constantly stored. For example, decorative pattern image data is stored in the fixed area. The image data is transferred from the fixed area to the frame memory by the drawing processor 109. The drawing processor 109 reads the image data from the fixed area word by word and writes the read image data to the frame memory. Instead, the image data is transferred by DMA (Direct Memory Access) transfer. That is, the drawing processor 109 includes a built-in DMA circuit (data transfer circuit 94) having a DMA transfer function. In the DMA transfer, the read address is output to the VRAM bus, the read signal is output, the write address is output to the VRAM bus, and the write signal is output while the read address and the write address are incremented by one. This is the transfer method.

  In this embodiment, DMA transfer is used as an example, but the drawing processor 109 may read image data word by word from the fixed area and write the read image data to the frame memory. In this case, the read image data is temporarily stored, for example, in a register of the drawing processor 109, and is written from the register to the frame memory.

  As shown in FIG. 61B, image data is read from the CGROM 83, and the read image data may be stored in the temporary storage area in the VRAM 84 and transferred from the temporary storage area to the frame memory. . Such image data transfer is also executed by the drawing processor 109. The drawing processor 109 writes the image data read from the CGROM 83 and stored in the temporary storage area into the frame memory by DMA transfer.

  As described above, the image data of the component image is constantly stored in the fixed area. As shown in FIG. 61C, the image data stored in the fixed area is referred to as advance transfer data. Therefore, the image data of the component image other than the pre-transfer data is temporarily stored in the temporary storage area.

  FIG. 62 is an explanatory diagram showing a data bus in the CG bus between the drawing control unit 91 and the CGROM 83 in the drawing processor 109. In FIG. 62, the CG bus I / F 93 (see FIG. 4) is not shown. As shown in FIG. 62, the data bus physically has 64 bits, but a 64-bit mode in which all 64 bits are used as a data bus, and a 32-bit mode in which lower 32 bits are used as a data bus. Can be switched to.

  In this embodiment, when the image data is read from the ROM 83C in which the moving image data is stored, the image data is read from the ROMs 83A and 83B in which the 32-bit mode is set and the still image (sprite image) data is stored. When reading, the 64-bit mode is set. Therefore, the image data of the sprite image is read from the CGROM 83 in 64-bit units, and the moving image data is read from the CGROM 83 in 32-bit units. In FIG. 62, for convenience of drawing, the ROM 83C is described as having a data bus extending from the ROM 83A. Wired.

  FIG. 63 is an explanatory diagram for describing an example of each register in the drawing control register 95. In the example shown in FIG. 63, a CGROM start address register for designating the start address of the CGROM 83 at the time of reading the image data, the image data when storing the image data in the temporary storage area of the VRAM 84, or the image data from the temporary storage area of the VRAM 84 VRAM head address register for designating the top address when reading data, VRAM transfer data size register for designating the size of transfer data when transferring image data to VRAM 84, and data transfer from CGROM 83 to a fixed area of VRAM 84 There is a VRAM fixed area transfer execution instruction register for instructing data transfer, and a VRAM automatic transfer execution instruction register for instructing data transfer from the CGROM 83 to the fixed area of the VRAM 84 via the temporary storage area of the VRAM 84.

  In addition, a frame memory head address register for designating a head address when developing image data in the frame memory, a frame memory transfer data size register for designating the size of transfer data, and a temporary storage area of the VRAM 84 from the CGROM 83 There is a frame memory transfer execution instruction register for instructing data transfer to the frame memory.

  Furthermore, a fixed area start address register for specifying the start address of the fixed area of the VRAM 84, a fixed area end address register for specifying the final address of the fixed area of the VRAM 84, and a fixed area for specifying an arbitrary address of the fixed area of the VRAM 84 There is an arbitrary head address register and a fixed area data transfer execution instruction register for instructing data transfer from the fixed area of the VRAM 84 to the frame memory.

  Also, a data bus mode register for instructing whether the data bus mode is set to the 32-bit mode or the 64-bit mode, moving image data in the CGROM 83 is read out, temporarily stored in the temporary storage area, and the moving image data is stored in the temporary storage area. There are a decoding execution instruction register for decoding and instructing data transfer to the frame memory, and a display area register indicating the current display area.

  The values set in the VRAM fixed area transfer execution instruction register, VRAM automatic transfer execution instruction register, frame memory transfer execution instruction register, fixed area data transfer execution instruction register, and decoding execution instruction register may each be 1 bit. The values set in these registers are set to predetermined bits in each register, for example.

  The configuration of the drawing control register 95 as shown in FIG. 63 is an example, and the registers constituting the drawing control register 95 may be configured differently from the configuration shown in FIG. For example, the register classification method for designating the start address may be different from the example shown in FIG.

  FIG. 64 is a block diagram showing an actual wiring diagram of the data bus in the CG bus between the drawing control unit 91 and the CGROM 83 in the drawing processor 109. As shown in FIG. 64, the lower 32 bits of the 64-bit data bus from the drawing control unit 91 are actually branched and wired to the ROM 83A and the ROM 83C, respectively.

  FIG. 65 is an explanatory diagram for describing decorative design image data stored in the CGROM 83. As shown in FIG. 65A, the decorative pattern and graphic image data of “7” are stored in the selected image data area in the CGROM 83. The decorative pattern indicating the number “7” combined with the circular figure is used in the production mode # 1. In addition, the decorative pattern indicating the number “7” combined with the approximately rhombus graphic is used in the production mode # 2. The decorative design indicating the number “7” combined with the star-shaped hexagonal figure is used in the production mode # 3. A decorative design corresponding to the image data stored in the selected image data area is the selection identification information.

  In addition, the image data of other decorative designs is stored in the common image data area in the CGROM 83 as shown in FIG. Each image data stored in the common image data area is transferred from the CGROM 83 to the fixed area of the VRAM 84 at a predetermined time. Each image data stored in the selected image data area is transferred from the CGROM 83 to the fixed area of the VRAM 84 when the effect mode is switched. A decorative design corresponding to the image data stored in the common image data area is the common identification information. Each image data may be transferred from the CGROM 83 to the fixed area of the VRAM 84 instead of being directly transferred to the fixed area of the VRAM 84.

  In this embodiment, the case where the image data of the decorative design stored in the common image data area is pre-transferred to the fixed area of the VRAM 84 as the pre-transfer data is illustrated. The image data is not limited to decorative design image data. For example, it may be image data (moving image data) of a moving image constituting a background symbol. In this case, the drawing processor 109 switches the data bus width in the CG bus from 64 bits to the lower 32 bits, and transfers the moving image data to the fixed area of the VRAM 84.

  FIG. 66 is an explanatory diagram showing a data structure of moving image data among the image data of component images stored in the CGROM 83. The moving image data has a configuration in which a file header is set at the first address, and then a frame header and compressed data of each frame are sequentially set. In the stream, frame headers and compressed data of frames 1 to N (frame images 1 to n) are set in order from image 1. The moving image data is encoded by, for example, MPEG2 (Moving Picture Experts Group phase 2) encoding method. Since the amount of image data before encoding is reduced by encoding, the encoded image data is referred to as compressed data.

  In FIG. 66, two moving image data (super reach moving image data and customer waiting demonstration moving image data) are illustrated, but more moving image data may be stored in the CGROM 83. .

  The compressed data is stored in the CGROM 83 in a ROM having 32 bits as one word. When the drawing processor 109 reads compressed data from the CGROM 83, the bus width of the CG bus is set to 32 bits. Therefore, the drawing processor 109 reads compressed data from the CGROM 83 in units of 32 bits.

  Next, a method of decoding moving image data (compressed data) compressed by the moving image decompression unit 89 will be described with reference to the explanatory diagram of FIG. The frame number shown in FIG. 67A is a serial number of frames in the moving image data shown in FIG. 66 (frames 1 to N). The compressed data of frames 1 to N in the moving image data is composed of I pictures, B pictures, or P pictures defined by the MPEG2 encoding method in the order shown in FIG. 67 (B). For example, frame 1 is an I picture, frames 2, 3, 5, and 6 are B pictures, and frames 4 and 7 are P pictures. The subscripts attached to I, B, and P are serial numbers for each picture type.

  As described above, frames 1 to N (frame images 1 to n) are stored as moving image data in order from frame 1 (image 1) (see FIG. 66). For example, frame 1 (image 1) in the stream is an I picture, frames 2, 3, 5, 6 (images 2, 3, 5, 6) are B pictures, and frames 4, 7 (images 4, 7). Is a P picture.

  When decoding an I picture (image 1), the moving picture decompression unit 89 performs a decoding process using only the I picture. In addition, when decoding a B picture, the moving picture decompression unit 89 refers to the I picture or P picture before one or more pictures and the I picture or P picture after one or more pictures together with the B picture. The decryption process is performed. In the example shown in FIG. 67, for example, when decoding the image 2, the decoding process is performed with reference to the image 1 that is the previous I picture and the image 4 that is the second P picture. When decoding a P picture, the moving picture decompression unit 89 performs decoding processing with reference to the previous I picture or P picture together with the P picture. In the example illustrated in FIG. 67, for example, when decoding the image 4, the decoding process is performed with reference to the image 1 which is the 23 previous I picture.

  Next, the operation of the effect control means will be described. FIG. 68 is a flowchart showing a main process executed by the effect control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the effect control CPU 101) mounted on the effect control board 80. The effect control CPU 101 starts executing the main process when the power is turned on. In the main processing, first, initialization processing is performed for clearing the RAM area, setting various initial values, and initializing a timer for determining the activation control activation interval (for example, 33 ms) (step S701). . Next, initial data transfer processing is performed (step S702). The initial data transfer process is a process for setting a fixed area in the VRAM 84 and transferring the image data (see FIG. 65B) stored in the common image data area of the CGROM 83 to the fixed area of the VRAM 84. . In this case, the rendering processor 109 sets the bus width of the data bus in the CG bus to 64 bits and transfers the joint moving image data to the fixed area of the VRAM 84.

  Next, effect mode # 1 data transfer control processing is performed (step S703). In the effect mode # 1 data transfer control process, the image data of the decorative design showing the numeral “7” combined with the circular figure stored in the selected image data area (see the upper part of FIG. 65A) is stored in the VRAM 84. It is a process for transferring to. In this embodiment, even when the game control microcomputer 560 executes the game state restoration process, the effect control microcomputer 100 executes the processes of steps S702 and S703, so that it is combined with the circular figure. The decorative design image data indicating the number “7” is transferred to the VRAM 84, but the effect control microcomputer 100 recovers the power failure when the game control microcomputer 560 executes the game state recovery process. When it is configured to transmit a designated command and an effect control command (for example, a display result specifying command) indicating the restored gaming state, the step is performed when the effect control command indicating the restored gaming state is received. In addition to executing the processing of S702, it responds to the received display result specifying command. The effect mode # 1 data transfer control process, the effect mode # 3 data transfer control process, or the effect mode # 3 data transfer control process is executed to indicate the number “7” combined with the figure that matches the gaming state. It is preferable to control so that the image data of the decorative design is transferred to the VRAM 84. In addition, when the production control microcomputer 100 starts to supply power to the gaming machine and the production control microcomputer 100 starts up (becomes an operable state), a moving image that constitutes a background pattern that is frequently used. The drawing processor 109 may be instructed to transfer image data of an image (for example, a customer waiting demonstration screen using moving images) from the CGROM 83 to a fixed area of the VRAM 84 in advance.

  Thereafter, the production control CPU 101 executes random number update processing for updating the counter value of the counter for generating a predetermined random number (see FIG. 23) (step S704), and monitors the timer interrupt flag (step S705). Move on to loop processing. When a timer interrupt occurs, the effect control CPU 101 sets a timer interrupt flag in the timer interrupt process. If the timer interrupt flag is set in the main process, the effect control CPU 101 clears the flag (step S706) and executes the effect control process.

  In the effect control process, the effect control CPU 101 first analyzes the received effect control command and executes a process of setting a flag according to the received effect control command (command analysis process: step S707). Next, the effect control CPU 101 executes effect control process processing (step S708). In the effect control process, a process corresponding to the current control state (effect control process flag) is selected from the processes corresponding to the control state, and display control of the image display device 9 is executed. Furthermore, when a customer waiting demonstration designation command is received from the game control microcomputer 560, a customer waiting demonstration control process for starting a customer waiting demonstration effect on the image display device 9 and effect parts (direction devices) such as lamps and speakers 27 is performed. Execute (Step S709). Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S704.

  FIG. 69 is a flowchart showing an effect control process (step S708) in the main process shown in FIG. In the effect control process, the effect control CPU 101 performs one of steps S800 to S806 according to the value of the effect control process flag. In each process, the following process is executed.

  Fluctuation start command reception waiting process (step S800): It is confirmed whether the first variation start command or the second variation start command has been received from the game control microcomputer 560. Further, it is confirmed whether or not a variation pattern command is received from the game control microcomputer 560. Specifically, it is confirmed whether the first variation start command reception flag, the second variation start command reception flag, and the variation pattern command reception flag set in the command analysis processing are set. If either the first variation start command or the second variation start command and the variation pattern command are received, the value of the effect control process flag is changed to a value corresponding to the decorative symbol variation start process (step S801).

  Decoration symbol variation start processing (step S801): Control is performed so that the variation of the ornament symbol is started. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the decorative symbol changing process (step S802).

  Decoration symbol variation processing (step S802): Controls the switching timing of each variation state (variation speed) constituting the variation pattern and monitors the end of the variation time. When the variation time ends, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the decorative symbol variation stop process (step S803).

  Decoration symbol variation stop process (step S803): Based on the reception of the effect control command (design determination designation command) for instructing all symbols to stop, the variation of the ornament symbol is stopped and the display result (stop symbol) is derived and displayed. Take control. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the jackpot display process (step S804) or the variation start command reception S wait process (step S800).

  Big hit display process (step S804): After the end of the variation time, control is performed to display a screen for notifying the image display device 9 of the occurrence of the big hit. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the big hit game processing (step S805).

  Big hit game processing (step S805): Control during big hit game is performed. For example, when an effect control command for display before opening the big winning opening or display when opening the big winning opening is received, display control of the number of rounds in the image display device 9 is performed. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the big hit end process (step S806).

  Big hit end process (step S806): In the image display device 9, display control is performed to notify the player that the big hit gaming state has ended. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the variation pattern command reception waiting process (step S800).

  FIG. 70 is a flowchart showing a decorative symbol variation start process (step S801) in the effect control process shown in FIG. In the decorative symbol variation start process, the effect control CPU 101 reads the display result command or data indicating the display result command from the display result command storage area (step S820). Then, the production control CPU 101 determines whether or not the variable display result is “lost” (step S821). If the variable display result is “losing” (Y in step S821), the effect control CPU 101 reads the variation pattern command or data indicating the variation pattern command from the variation pattern command storage area (step S822). Then, the production control CPU 101 determines whether or not the designated variation pattern is a non-reach variation pattern corresponding to the case where the decorative symbol variable display mode is “non-reach” (step S823).

  When it is determined that the variation pattern is a non-reach variation pattern (step S502; Yes), the effect control CPU 101 performs a variation in which the variation pattern designated by the variation pattern designation command executes a specific effect of "end of development chance eye". It is determined whether or not it is a pattern (step S824). As an example, if it is determined in step S823 that the pattern is a non-reach variation pattern, if the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern designation command is a variation pattern of non-reach PA 1-7 (see FIG. 8), “ It is determined that the variation pattern is to execute a specific effect of “end of development opportunity”.

  When it is determined that the variation pattern is to execute the specific effect of “end of development opportunity” (Y in step S824), the effect control CPU 101 determines the final stop symbol constituting one of the development chance points HC1 to HC8. The combination of the determined decorative symbols is determined (step S825). As an example, in the process of step S825, the effect control CPU 101 selects and sets the final stop symbol determination table 160D shown in FIG. Next, the effect control CPU 101 extracts numerical data indicating the first final stop symbol determining random number SR1-1 from, for example, a random counter provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 or the like. Then, by referring to the final stop symbol determination table 160D based on the numerical data indicating the extracted random value SR1-1, the left middle right final stop symbols FZ1-4 and FZ1- that become one of the development chances HC1 to HC8. 5. The combination of FZ1-6 is determined as a confirmed decorative pattern.

  When it is determined that the variation pattern is not the execution pattern for executing the specific effect “end of development chance” (N in step S824), the effect control CPU 101 determines the final decorative symbol that is the final stop symbol constituting the non-reach combination. A non-reach symbol determination process for determining a combination is executed (step S826).

  FIG. 71 is a flowchart illustrating an example of non-reach symbol determination processing. In the non-reach symbol determination process, the production control CPU 101 first selects and sets the final stop symbol determination table 160A shown in FIG. 24A as a use table (step S2601). Next, the effect control CPU 101 extracts numerical data indicating the first final stop symbol determining random number SR1-1 from, for example, a random counter provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 (step S2602). Then, based on the numerical data indicating the extracted random number value SR1-1, the decorative symbol to be the left final stop symbol FZ1-1 is determined by referring to the final stop symbol determination table 160A (step S2603). Next, the effect control CPU 101 selects and sets the final stop symbol determination table 160B shown in FIG. 24B as a use table (step S2604). Next, the effect control CPU 101 extracts numerical data indicating the random number SR1-2 for determining the second final stop symbol from, for example, a random counter provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 (step S2605). Then, based on the numerical data indicating the extracted random number value SR1-2, the decorative symbol to be the right final stop symbol FZ1-2 is determined by referring to the final stop symbol determination table 160B (step S2606).

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 refers to the left and right output determination table 161 as shown in FIG. 25 based on the combination of the left final stop symbol FZ1-1 and the right final stop symbol FZ1-2, thereby determining the left and right output points. It is determined which type DC1-1 is a plurality of types. Then, the production control CPU 101 selects and sets the final stop symbol determination table 160C shown in FIG. 24C as a use table according to the determined left and right outcome type (step S2607). Next, the effect control CPU 101 extracts the random number SR1-3 for determining the third final stop symbol from, for example, a random counter provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 (step S2608). Then, based on the extracted random value SR1-3 and the left and right outcome type DC1-1, the decorative symbol to be the middle final stop symbol FZ1-3 is determined by referring to the final stop symbol determination table 160C (step) S2609).

  As described above, in the non-reach symbol determination process in step S826, the left middle right final stop symbols FZ1-1 to FZ1-3 are referred to with reference to the final stop symbol determination tables 160A to 160C and the left / right outcome determination table 161. By determining the decorative pattern, the combination of the confirmed decorative pattern does not become a reach combination or a jackpot combination, and even if the combination is not a reach combination or a jackpot combination, the pseudo consecutive chances shown in FIG. GC1 to GC8, development chance items HC1 to HC8 shown in FIG. 5B, sudden chance items TC1 to TC4 shown in FIG. 5C, and a certain non-reach combination as shown in FIG. Nor.

  When it is determined that the pattern is not a non-reach variation pattern (N in step S823), the production control CPU 101 executes a reach symbol determination process for determining a combination of a definite decorative symbol as a final stop symbol constituting a reach combination. (Step S827).

  FIG. 72 is a flowchart illustrating an example of reach symbol determination processing. In the reach symbol determination process, the production control CPU 101 first selects and sets the final stop symbol determination table 162A shown in FIG. 27A as a use table (step S2701). Next, the effect control CPU 101 extracts numerical data indicating the first final stop symbol determination random number SR1-1 from, for example, a random counter provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 (step S2702). Then, by referring to the final stop symbol determination table 162A based on the numerical data indicating the extracted random number value SR1-1, the same decorative symbols as the left final stop symbol FZ2-1 and the right final stop symbol FZ2-2 are displayed. Determine (step S2703). Next, the effect control CPU 101 selects and sets the final stop symbol determination table 162B shown in FIG. 27B as a use table (step S2704). Next, the effect control CPU 101 extracts numerical data indicating the third final stop symbol determining random number SR1-3 from, for example, a random counter provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 (step S2705). Then, by referring to the final stop symbol determination table 162B based on the numerical data indicating the extracted random number values SR1-3, the left and right final stop symbols FZ2-1, FZ2-2, and the middle final stop symbol FZ2- The design difference from the decorative design of 3 is determined. Then, the effect control CPU 101 determines a decorative symbol to be the middle final stop symbol FZ2-3 according to the determined symbol difference (step S2706).

  As described above, in the reach symbol determination process of step S827, first, using the final stop symbol determination table 162A, “left” and “left” other than the “medium” ornament symbol display area where the ornament symbol is stopped and displayed last. The left and right final stop symbols FZ2-1 and FZ2-2 that are stopped and displayed in the “right” decorative symbol display area are determined. Thereafter, using the final stop symbol determination table 162B, the decorative symbol that becomes the middle final stop symbol FZ2-3 and the left and right final stop symbol FZ2-1 in the “medium” ornament symbol display area where the ornament symbol is stopped and displayed last. , FZ2-2 is determined as the symbol difference with the decorative symbol, and the decorative symbol as the middle final stop symbol FZ2-3 is determined according to the determined symbol difference.

  When the variable display result is other than “losing” (N in step S821), the effect control CPU 101 indicates that the variable display result is “small hit” or the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit. It is determined whether the type is “surprise” or any other one (step S828). When the variable display result is “small hit”, or when the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “surprise” (Y in step S828), the effect control CPU 101 in step S822. It is determined whether the read variation pattern is one of the variation patterns of special PG1-1 to special PG1-4 or any other variation (step S829).

  As shown in FIG. 9, all of the variation patterns of the special PG 1-1 to the special PG 1-4 specify that the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is “non-reach”. Therefore, when the CPU 101 for effect control determines that the variation pattern is any of the special PG 1-1 to the special PG 1-4 (Y in step S829), the process proceeds to the process in step S824, and in steps S825 and S826. By one of the processes, a final decorative symbol that is the final stop symbol is determined. If it is determined in step S829 that the variation pattern is one of the special PG1-1 to special PG1-4, the variation pattern designated by the variation pattern designation command in step S824 is the special PG1- If the variation pattern is 4 (see FIG. 9), it is determined that the variation pattern is to execute the specific effect of “end of the development chance”.

  When it is determined that the variation pattern is other than the special PG 1-1 to the special PG 1-4 (N in step S829), the effect control CPU 101 determines that the designated variation pattern is the special PG 2-1 to the special PG 2-3. It is determined whether the pattern is any one of the fluctuation patterns or other patterns (step S830).

  As shown in FIG. 9, all of the variation patterns of the special PG 2-1 to the special PG 2-3 specify that the “normal” reach effect is to be performed after the decorative symbol variable display state is set to the reach state. Therefore, if the CPU 101 for effect control determines that the variation pattern is any of the special PG2-1 to the special PG2-3 (Y in step S830), the process proceeds to the process in step S827 to configure the reach combination. Determine the final decorative symbol that will be the final stop symbol.

  When it is determined that the variation pattern is other than the special PG2-1 to special PG2-3 (N in step S830), the effect control CPU 101 determines that the designated variation pattern is a special PG3-1 to special PG3-3. One of the fluctuation patterns.

  As shown in FIG. 9, all of the variation patterns of the special PG 3-1 to the special PG 3-3 are such that the combination of the confirmed decorative pattern that results in the variable display of the decorative pattern is any one of the chance chance items TC 1 to TC 4. It is specified. In response to the designation of any of the variation patterns of the special PG 3-1 to the special PG 3-3, the effect control CPU 101 determines the final decoration that becomes the final stop symbol constituting one of the chance chance items TC1 to TC4. A combination of symbols is determined (step S831). As an example, in the process of step S831, the final stop symbol determination table 163C shown in FIG. 28C is selected and set as a use table. Next, the effect control CPU 101 extracts numerical data indicating the first final stop symbol determining random number SR1-1 from, for example, a random counter provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 or the like. Then, by referring to the final stop symbol determination table 163C based on the numerical data indicating the extracted random value SR1-1, the left middle right final stop symbols FZ4-1 and FZ4- that become one of the chances of success TC1 to TC4 are obtained. 2, The combination of FZ4-3 is determined as a confirmed decorative pattern. Then, control goes to a step S835.

  When the variable display result is not “small hit” and the big hit type is not “surprise” (N in step S828), the effect control CPU 101 determines the big hit type among the cases where the variable display result is “big hit”. Is one of “normal big hit” and “third probability variation” or other than that (step S832). When the big hit type is “normal big hit” or when the big hit type is “third probability variation” (Y in step S832), the effect control CPU 101 becomes the final stop symbol constituting the normal big hit combination. A combination of confirmed decorative symbols is determined (step S833). As an example, in the process of step S833, the CPU 101 for effect control selects and sets the final stop symbol determination table 163A shown in FIG. Next, the effect control CPU 101 extracts numerical data indicating the first final stop symbol determining random number SR1-1 from, for example, a random counter provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 or the like. Then, by referring to the final stop symbol determination table 163A based on the numerical data indicating the extracted random value SR1-1, the left middle right final stop symbols FZ3-1, FZ3-2, FZ3, which are any of the normal jackpot combinations, are obtained. The combination of -3 is determined as a confirmed decorative pattern. Then, control goes to a step S835.

  When the big hit type is neither “normal” nor “third probability variation” (N in Step S832), the effect control CPU 101 determines that the big hit type is either “first probability variation” or “second probability variation”. Corresponding to the above, the combination of the confirmed decorative symbols that are the final stop symbols constituting the probability variation jackpot combination is determined (step S834). As an example, in the process of step S834, the CPU 101 for effect control selects and sets the final stop symbol determination table 163B shown in FIG. Next, the effect control CPU 101 extracts numerical data indicating the first final stop symbol determining random number SR1-1 from, for example, a random counter provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 or the like. Then, by referring to the final stop symbol determination table 163B based on the numerical data indicating the extracted random value SR1-1, the left middle right final stop symbols FZ3-1, FZ3-2, FZ3 that become one of the probable big hit combinations. The combination of -3 is determined as a confirmed decorative pattern. Then, control goes to a step S835.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 executes a specific effect setting process (step S835). FIG. 73 is a flowchart showing an example of the specific effect setting process executed in step S835. In the specific effect setting process, the effect control CPU 101 first determines whether or not the variation pattern designated by the variation pattern designation command is a variation pattern including a specific effect (step S3501). If the variation pattern does not include the specific effect (N in step S3501), the specific effect setting process is terminated as it is.

  When it is determined that the variation pattern includes a specific effect (Y in step S3501), the specific effect is any one of “slip”, “pseudo train”, “intro”, or other specific effects. It is determined whether or not there is (step S3502). If it is one of the specific effects of “sliding”, “pseudo train”, and “intro”, the effect control CPU 101 selects and sets a specific effect pattern determination table corresponding to the specific effect as a use table ( Step S3503). As an example, the specific effect pattern determination table 164A shown in FIG. 29A is set in the case of the “slip” specific effect, and shown in FIG. 29B in the case of the “pseudo-continuous” specific effect. The specific effect pattern determination table 164B is set, and in the case of the “intro” specific effect, the specific effect pattern determination table 164C shown in FIG. 29C is set.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 determines the specific effect pattern as one of a plurality of types (step S3504). As an example, in the case of a “slip” specific effect, the effect control CPU 101 uses a random counter SR6-1 for determining the first specific effect pattern, for example, from a random counter provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 or the like. The numerical data indicating is extracted. Then, based on the numerical data indicating the extracted random value SR6-1, the specific effect pattern is set to one of the slips TP1-1 to TP1-4 by referring to the specific effect pattern determination table 164A set in step S3503. decide. In the case of the “pseudo-continuous” specific effect, the effect control CPU 101 indicates a random value SR6-2 for determining the second specific effect pattern from, for example, a random counter provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 or the like. Extract numerical data. Then, based on the numerical data indicating the extracted random value SR6-2, the specific effect pattern is set to any one of the pseudo-continuous TP2-1 to the pseudo-continuous TP2-3 by referring to the specific effect pattern determination table 164B set in step S3503. Decide on. In the case of the “Intro” specific effect, the effect control CPU 101 uses a numerical value indicating the third specific effect pattern determination random value SR6-3 from, for example, a random counter provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 or the like. Extract data. In this case, when the variation pattern is non-reach PA 1-6, the previous effect buffer value stored in the effect control buffer setting unit 194 is read. When the variation pattern is non-reach PA 1-6, based on the numeric data indicating the extracted random number SR6-3 and the previous effect buffer value, when the variation pattern is other than non-reach PA 1-6, Based on the numerical data indicating the extracted random number SR6-3, the specific effect pattern is determined as one of intro TP3-1 to intro TP3-3 by referring to the specific effect pattern determination table 164C.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 determines whether or not the specific effect is “intro” (step S3505). If the specific effect is “intro” (Y in step S3505), it is determined in step S3504. In accordance with the specific effect patterns of intro TP3-1 to intro TP3-3, the previous effect buffer value is updated with the previous effect buffer update setting value in specific effect pattern determination table 164C (step S3506). For example, if the specific effect pattern of intro TP3-1 is determined in step S3504, the previous effect buffer value is updated to 1. If the specific effect pattern of intro TP3-2 is determined in step S3504, the previous effect buffer value is updated to 2. If the specific effect pattern of intro TP3-3 is determined in step S3504, the previous effect buffer value is updated to 3.

  As described above, by executing the processing of step S3506, intro TP3-1 to intro TP3-3 prepared for each type of effect operation corresponding to the variation pattern for executing the specific effect of “intro” Each time it is determined as one of the specific effect patterns, it can be updated so that the previous effect buffer value corresponding to the determined specific effect pattern of the intro TP3-1 to intro TP3-3 is set. That is, each time the effect operation in the specific effect of “Intro” is determined as one of a plurality of types, the determined type of effect operation can be stored as the previous effect buffer value in an updatable manner. In the process of step S3504, when the variation pattern is non-reach PA 1-6, the previous effect buffer value is read and the determination using the specific effect pattern determination table 164C as shown in FIG. 29C is performed. Thus, the specific effect pattern can be determined so that the same type of effect operation as the effect operation type stored as the previous effect buffer value is not executed.

  If it is determined in step S3502 that the specific effect is other than “slip”, “pseudo-run”, or “intro”, or if it is determined in step S3505 that the specific effect is other than “intro”, the process of step S3506 is executed. After that, the effect control CPU 101 determines whether the specific effect is any one of “sliding”, “pseudo-ream”, “development opportunity”, or other specific effects (step S3507). ). If it is a specific effect other than “slip”, “pseudo train”, or “expansion chance” (N in step S3507), the specific effect setting process is terminated. If it is one of the specific effects of “sliding”, “pseudo-ream”, and “expansion chance” (Y in step S3507), the temporary stop symbol to be displayed for temporary stop in the specific effect is determined (step S3508). Then, the specific effect setting process is terminated.

  In the process of step S3508, as an example, in the case of a specific effect of “slip”, the CPU 101 for effect control is based on the table selection setting shown in FIG. 31E based on the specific effect pattern determined in step S3504. Any one of the stop symbol determination tables 166A to 166D is selected and set as a use table. Next, the effect control CPU 101 extracts numerical data indicating a random value SR3 for determining the temporary stop symbol for the slip / development chance from, for example, a random counter provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193. Then, by referring to any of the set temporary stop symbol determination tables 166A to 166D based on the extracted random number SR3, the right temporary stop symbol KZ1-1, the left temporary stop symbol KZ1-2, the right temporary stop symbol 1 -3, the decorative symbol to be one of the left temporary stop symbols KZ1-4 is determined.

  As another example, in the case of a specific production of “pseudo-continuous”, the production control CPU 101 first sets the number of executions of the pseudo-continuous change to a constant M based on the specific production pattern determined in step S3504. To do. For example, the constant M is set to “1” in the case of the specific effect pattern of the pseudo-continuous TP2-1, and the constant M is set to “2” in the case of the specific effect pattern of the pseudo-continuous TP2-2. In the case of the specific effect pattern of the pseudo-continuous TP2-3, the constant M is set to “3”. In this case, the production control CPU 101 sets a variable N indicating the determined number of temporary stop symbol combinations to “0”. When the variation pattern is non-reach PA 1-5, the temporary stop symbol determination table 167A shown in FIG. 32A is selected and set as a use table, while the variation pattern is super PA 3-4, super In the case of any one of PA3-8, super PA4-4, super PA4-8, super PB3-4, super PB4-4, super PB5-4, super PF1-1, and special PG1-3, FIG. The temporary stop symbol determination table 167B shown in B) is selected and set as a use table. Next, the effect control CPU 101 extracts numerical data indicating the random value SR4-1 for determining the first pseudo-temporary temporary stop symbol from, for example, a random counter provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 or the like. Then, based on the numerical data indicating the extracted random value SR4-1, by referring to either the set temporary stop symbol determination table 167A or the temporary stop symbol determination table 167B, any one of the pseudo consecutive chances GC1 to GC8 is obtained. The combination of left middle right temporary stop symbols KZ2-1, KZ2-2, and KZ2-3 is determined. In this case, the effect control CPU 101 adds 1 to the variable N and updates it, and determines whether or not the updated variable N matches the constant M.

  As described above, if the updated variable N matches the constant M, the effect control CPU 101 ends the process of step S3508. If the updated variable N does not match the constant M, the effect control CPU 101 selects and sets the temporary stop symbol determination table 167C shown in FIG. Next, the effect control CPU 101 extracts numerical data indicating the random number SR4-2 for determining the second pseudo-temporary temporary stop symbol from, for example, a random counter provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193. Then, referring to the temporary stop symbol determination table 167C based on the numerical data indicating the extracted random value SR4-2, the left middle right temporary stop symbols KZ3-1 and KZ3 that become any one of the pseudo consecutive chances GC1 to GC8. -2, KZ3-3 combination is determined. In this case, the effect control CPU 101 adds 1 to the variable N and updates it, and determines whether or not the updated variable N matches the constant M.

  As described above, if the updated variable N matches the constant M, the effect control CPU 101 ends the process of step S3508. If the updated variable N does not match the constant M, the effect control CPU 101 selects and sets the temporary stop symbol determination table 167D shown in FIG. Next, the effect control CPU 101 extracts numerical data indicating the random number SR4-3 for determining the third pseudo-temporary temporary stop symbol from, for example, a random counter provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 or the like. Then, referring to the temporary stop symbol determination table 167D based on the numerical data indicating the extracted random number value SR4-3, the left middle right temporary stop symbol KZ4-1, KZ4, which becomes one of the pseudo consecutive chances GC1 to GC8. -2 and a combination of KZ4-3 are determined. After the combination of the left middle right temporary stop symbols KZ4-1, KZ4-2, and KZ4-3 is determined by such processing, the processing in step S3508 is terminated.

  As yet another example, in the case of a specific effect of “Development Chance”, the effect control CPU 101 selects and sets the temporary stop symbol determination table 168 shown in FIG. 34 as a use table. Next, the effect control CPU 101 extracts numerical data indicating a random value SR3 for determining the temporary stop symbol for the slip / development chance from, for example, a random counter provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193. Then, by referring to the temporary stop symbol determination table 168 based on the extracted random value SR3, the left middle right temporary stop symbols KZ6-1, KZ6-2, and KZ6-3 that become one of the development chances HC1 to HC8 are displayed. Determine the combination.

  After executing the specific effect setting process, the effect control CPU 101 executes the changing effect setting process (step S836). FIG. 74 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the changing promotion effect setting process executed in step S836. In the fluctuating promotion effect setting process, the effect control CPU 101 first determines whether or not the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is other than “surprise” (step S3601). . If the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is other than “surprise” (N in step S3601), the changing promotion effect setting process is terminated.

  When it is determined that the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is other than “surprise” (Y in step S3601), the presentation control CPU 101 is promoted during fluctuation shown in FIG. The effect execution determination table 165A is selected and set as a use table (step S3602). Next, the effect control CPU 101 extracts numerical data indicating the promotion effect execution determination random value SR5 from, for example, a random counter provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 (step S3603). Then, based on the numerical data indicating the random value SR5 extracted in step S3603, by referring to the changing promotion promotion execution determination table 165A set in step S3602, the big hit types are “normal”, “first certain change” to “ The presence / absence of the promotion effect during change is determined according to which of the “third probability change” (step S3604). In this case, if it is determined that there is no changing promotion effect (N in step S3605), the effect control CPU 101 ends the changing promotion effect setting process.

  If it is determined that there is a changing promotion effect (Y in step S3605), the effect control CPU 101 determines a temporary stop symbol to be displayed for temporary stop in the changing promotion effect (step S3606), and then the changing promotion. The effect setting process ends. In the process of step S3606, for example, the effect control CPU 101 selects and sets the temporary stop symbol determination table 169 shown in FIG. 35 as the use table. Next, the effect control CPU 101 extracts numerical data indicating the random number SR2 for determining the temporary stop symbol for the promotion effect, for example, from a random counter provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 or the like. Then, referring to the temporary stop symbol determination table 169 based on the numerical data indicating the extracted random value SR2, the decorative symbols determined as the left middle right final stop symbols FZ3-1, FZ3-2 and FZ3-3 are displayed. The combination of the left middle right temporary stop symbols KZ7-1, KZ7-2, and KZ7-3 is determined according to the symbol number.

  After executing the changing promotion effect setting process, the effect control CPU 101 executes the notice effect setting process (step S837). FIG. 75 is a flowchart showing an example of the notice effect setting process executed in step S837. In the notice effect setting process, the effect control CPU 101 first selects and sets the notice pattern type determination table 170 shown in FIG. 36 as a use table (step S3701). Next, the effect control CPU 101 extracts numerical data indicating the random number SR7 for determining the notice pattern type from, for example, a random counter provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 (step S3702). Then, by referring to the notice pattern type determination table 170 based on the numerical data indicating the random value SR7 extracted in step S3702, there is no notice or the notice pattern types of notice CY1 to notice CY3 according to the variation pattern. Either one is determined (step S3703). In this case, if it is determined that there is no previous notice (N in step S3704), the effect control CPU 101 ends the notice effect setting process.

  When it is determined to be one of the notice pattern types of the notice CY1 to the notice CY3 (Y in step S3704), the effect control CPU 101 determines the notice pattern determination table 171A shown in FIG. 37 according to the decided notice pattern type. 38, any one of the notice pattern determination table 171B shown in FIG. 38 and the notice pattern determination table 171C shown in FIG. 39 is selected and set as a use table (step S3705). That is, if the notice pattern type of the notice CY1 is determined in step S3703, the notice pattern determination table 171A is set, and if the notice pattern type of the notice CY2 is decided, the notice pattern determination table 171B is set. When the CY3 notice pattern type is determined, the notice pattern determination table 171C is set. Thereafter, the effect control CPU 101 determines any one of a plurality of types of notice patterns (step S3706), and ends the notice effect setting process.

  In the process of step S3706, as an example, when the notice control CPU 101 determines the notice pattern type as notice CY1, for example, from the random counter provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193, the first notice pattern determination Numerical data indicating the random value SR8-1 is extracted. Then, based on the numeric data indicating the extracted random value SR8-1, the notice pattern determination table 171A set in step S3705 is referred to, so that the notice pattern of the notice YP1-1 to notice YP1-4 is displayed. Decide on one.

  As another example, when the CPU 101 for effect control determines the notice pattern type to notice CY2, for example, from the random counter provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193, the second notice pattern determination disturbance Numerical data indicating the numerical value SR8-2 is extracted. Then, based on the numerical data indicating the extracted random value SR8-2, the notice pattern determination table 171B set in step S3705 is referred to, so that the notice pattern of the notice YP2-1 to notice YP2-4 is displayed. Decide on one.

  As yet another example, when the notice pattern type is determined to be the notice CY3, the effect control CPU 101 uses, for example, a random counter for determining the third notice pattern from a random counter provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193. Numerical data indicating SR8-3 is extracted. Then, based on the numerical data indicating the extracted random value SR8-3, by referring to the notice pattern determination table 171C set in step S3705, there is no notice or the notice patterns of the notice YP3-1 to notice YP3-3. Decide on one.

  Then, the production control CPU 101 selects a process table corresponding to the variation pattern (step S838). Then, the process timer corresponding to the effect execution data 1 in the selected process data is started (step S839). Next, the production control CPU 101 performs the production device (the image display device 9 as the production component, the production component as the production component according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number data 1). Control of the various lamps and the speaker 27 as a production component is executed (step S840). For example, in order to display an image according to the variation pattern on the image display device 9, a command is output to the drawing processor 109. In addition, a control signal (lamp control execution data) is output to the lamp driver board 35 in order to perform on / off control of various lamps. In addition, a control signal (sound number data) is output to the sound output board 70 in order to output sound from the speaker 27.

  If the variation pattern is accompanied by a super reach effect, the process table corresponding to the variation pattern includes process data indicating transfer of moving image data. Specifically, the process data display control execution data corresponding to the time after the start time of “moving image effect” includes data as exemplified in FIG. In this embodiment, the variation pattern command is an effect control command for designating only a variation pattern, right or wrong of big hit or small hit, reach production, and specific production. The change pattern command for designating that the display result is to be displayed may be different from the change pattern command for designating that the display result together with the change pattern is not a display result reminiscent of a big hit.

  In this embodiment, the effect control CPU 101 performs control so that the decorative pattern is variably displayed by the change pattern corresponding to the change pattern command on a one-to-one basis. The variation pattern to be used may be selected from a plurality of types of variation patterns corresponding to.

  Then, the value corresponding to the variation time specified by the variation pattern command is set in the variation time timer (step S841), the process data valid flag is set (step S842), and the value of the effect control process flag is changed to the decorative pattern variation. A value corresponding to the intermediate process (step S802) is set (step S843). In this embodiment, the effect control CPU 101 appropriately outputs a command to the drawing processor 109 on condition that a process data valid flag is set in a V blank interrupt process described later. However, if data that needs to be output to the drawing processor 109 has been set in step S840, the command is output to the drawing processor 109 according to the data.

  FIG. 76A is an explanatory diagram showing a configuration example of the process table. The process table is a table in which process data referred to when the effect control CPU 101 executes control of the effect device is set. That is, the effect control CPU 101 controls effect devices (effect components) such as the image display device 9 in accordance with data set in the process table. The process table includes data in which a plurality of combinations of process timer set values, display control execution data, lamp control execution data, and sound number data are collected. The display control execution data includes data indicating each variation mode constituting the variation mode during the variable display time (variation time) of the variable display of the decorative symbols. Specifically, data relating to the change of the display screen of the image display device 9 is described. The process timer set value is set with a change time in the form of the change. In the V blank interrupt process, the effect control CPU 101 refers to the process table, and performs control for displaying the decorative pattern in the variation mode set in the display control execution data for the time set in the process timer set value. Do.

  The process table shown in FIG. 76A is stored in the ROM of the effect control board 80. A process table is prepared for each variation pattern. Furthermore, different process tables are prepared according to the difference in the notice effect mode (notice type) when the notice effect is executed.

  FIGS. 76B and 76C are explanatory diagrams illustrating an example of display control execution data. FIG. 76B illustrates display control execution data related to a still image. The display control execution data related to a still image includes a frame memory start address indicating the start address of an area in which image data of a component image is expanded in the frame memory. , Frame memory final address indicating the final address of the area where the image data of the component image is expanded in the frame memory, a flag indicating that the image is a still image, component image specifying data specifying the component image (the leading address and data length in the CGROM 83, etc.) ) Is set. FIG. 76B illustrates display control execution data related to a moving image. The display control execution data related to a moving image includes, for example, a frame memory indicating a start address of an area in which image data of a moving image is expanded in the frame memory. Start address, frame memory final address indicating the final address of the area where the image data of the moving image is expanded in the frame memory, flag indicating that it is a moving image, flag indicating that decoding processing is necessary, movie data designation data (CGROM 83) The start address and data length in the are set. Further, when combining a plurality of images, data specifying a plurality of images to be combined is also set in the display control execution data.

  In this embodiment, the CPU 56 executes the processing of steps S825, S826, S827, S831, S833, and S834, thereby identifying identification information that is derived and displayed as a display result on the plurality of variable display units in the image display device 9. An identification information determining means for determining from a plurality of types is realized. Note that the identification information determining means may also be configured for a portion where the CPU 56 determines a temporary stop symbol such as step S3508.

  FIG. 77 is a flowchart showing a decorative symbol variation stop process (step S803) in the effect control process. In the decorative symbol variation stopping process, the effect control CPU 101 performs control for deriving and displaying the stopped symbol in accordance with the data stored in the decorative symbol display result storage area (data indicating the left middle right stop symbol) (step S861). . Specifically, an address or the like where the stop symbol image data in the fixed area of the VRAM 84 is specified, and a command to transfer the stop symbol image data to the frame memory is output to the drawing processor 109. The drawing processor 109 transfers the image data of the stop symbol to the frame memory in response to the command. Then, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not it is determined to be a big hit (step S862). Whether or not it is determined to be a big hit is confirmed by, for example, a display result specifying command stored in the display result specifying command storage area.

  If it is determined to be a big hit, the address pointer is set to 0 (step S863) and the fixed area data transfer control process is executed (step S864). The fixed area data transfer control process is a process for transferring the image data (see FIG. 65 (B)) stored in the common image data area of the CGROM 83 to the fixed area of the VRAM 84, and the initial data in step S702. This process is similar to the process executed in the transfer process. Although it is not essential to execute the fixed area data transfer control process at this stage, for example, by executing the fixed area data transfer control process when it is determined to be a big hit, for example (for example, When the data is garbled in the fixed area of the VRAM 84 due to noise or the like, the image data in the fixed area of the VRAM 84 can be returned to the correct data. Thereafter, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the jackpot display process (step S804) (step S865).

  If it is decided not to win, if the display result 1 designation command (outgoing designation / time reduction designation) has been received, the probability variation state flag is reset and the time reduction state flag is set (steps S871, S872). , S873). Then, the effect mode # 2 data transfer control process (process for effect mode # 2 corresponding to the process shown in FIG. 96) is performed (step S874). That is, since the game mode is determined to be in the short time state, the effect mode # 2 data transfer control process is executed. In this embodiment, the symbol shown in the middle of FIG. 65 (A) is used as the decorative symbol “7” in the short-time state. In the effect mode # 2 data transfer control process, the decorative pattern image data (refer to the middle part of FIG. 65A) indicating the number “7” combined with the approximately rhombus figure stored in the selected image data area is used. This is a process for transferring to the VRAM 84.

  If the display result 2 designation command (outgoing designation / low probability designation) has been received, the time reduction state flag is reset (steps S875, S876). Then, effect mode # 1 data transfer control processing (processing shown in FIG. 96) is performed (step S877). That is, since the game mode is determined to be in the low probability state (normal state), the effect mode # 1 data transfer control process is executed. In this embodiment, in the normal state, the symbol shown in the upper part of FIG. 65 (A) is used as the decorative symbol “7”. In the effect mode # 1 data transfer control process, the image data of the decorative design showing the numeral “7” combined with the circular figure stored in the selected image data area (see the upper part of FIG. 65A) is stored in the VRAM 84. It is a process for transferring to.

  Thereafter, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the variation start command reception waiting process (step S800) (step S878).

  FIG. 78 is a flowchart showing the jackpot display process (step S804) in the effect control process. In the jackpot display process, the effect control CPU 101 determines whether or not a fanfare flag indicating that a jackpot start designation command has been received (set when a jackpot start designation command is received in the command analysis process) is set. Confirmation is made (step S891). If the fanfare flag is set, the fanfare flag is reset (step S892), and the process data corresponding to the big hit effect is selected (step S893). Then, the process timer corresponding to the production execution data 1 in the selected process data is started (step S894). Further, the rendering device is controlled according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, and sound number data 1) (step S895). Then, a process data valid flag is set (step S896). Thereafter, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the big hit game processing (step S805) (step S897).

  FIG. 79 is a flowchart showing the big hit game processing (step S805) in the effect control process. In the big hit control effect process, the effect control CPU 101 first determines whether or not an ending flag indicating that an ending command has been received is set (step S1970). The ending flag is set based on the receipt of the ending command in the command analysis process (step S707). If the ending flag is set (Y in step S1970), the effect control CPU 101 resets the ending flag (step S1971) and starts the effect period measurement timer (step S1972). Then, the effect control CPU 101 sets the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the jackpot end effect process (step S806) (step S1973).

  If the ending flag is not set (N in step S1970), the effect control CPU 101 determines whether or not the promoted effect flag provided in the effect control flag setting unit 191 is on (step S1974). The promotion effect in-progress flag is set to an on state by executing a process in step S1986 described later, and is cleared to an off state by executing a process in step S1978. In addition, when the process of step S1971 is executed, the flag indicating that the promotion effect is being performed may be cleared to be in an off state.

  When the promotion effect flag is off (N in step S1974), the effect control CPU 101 is making a big hit depending on, for example, whether the effect control process timer value matches a predetermined effect start determination value. It is determined whether or not the execution timing of the promotion effect has come (step S1979). In this case, since the execution period of each round is short in the 2 round big hit state, it is only necessary to set the production control process timer value so as not to reach the production start determination value.

  When it is determined that it is the execution timing of the jackpot promotion effect (Y in step S1979), the effect control CPU 101 selects the jackpot promotion effect execution determination table 165B shown in FIG. 30B as the use table. (Step S1980). Next, the effect control CPU 101 extracts numerical data indicating the promotion effect execution determination random value SR5 from, for example, a random counter provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 (step S1981). Based on the numerical data indicating the random value SR5 extracted in step S1981, the jackpot type is “normal”, “first probability variation” to “third probability variation” by referring to the jackpot middle promotion effect execution determination table 165B. Depending on which is the jackpot promotion effect, such as determining whether or not there is a jackpot promotion effect, and if there is a jackpot promotion effect, whether it is a success or a failure promotion effect A determination is made regarding the execution of (step S1982).

  When it is determined that it is not the execution timing of the jackpot promotion effect (N in step S1979), or when it is determined not to execute the jackpot promotion effect (N in step S1983), the process proceeds to step S1987. That is, in this case, by executing the processing of steps S1987 to S1991, an effect during a normal jackpot game that does not include a jackpot promotion effect is executed.

  When it is determined to execute the jackpot promotion effect (Y in step S1983), the effect control CPU 101 selects a process table corresponding to the jackpot promotion effect (step S1984). Next, a process timer corresponding to the production execution data 1 in the selected process data is started (step S1985). Then, a promotion effect in-progress flag indicating that the jackpot promotion effect is being executed is set (step S1986).

  If it is determined that the promotion effect flag is on (Y in step S1974), the effect control CPU 101 determines whether, for example, the effect control process timer value matches the effect end determination value indicated in the effect control pattern. It is determined whether or not it is the end timing of the promotion effect during jackpot (step SS1975). If it is not the end timing of the jackpot promotion effect (N in step S1975), the process proceeds to step S1978. In other words, in this case, by executing the processing of steps S1987 to S1991, the jackpot promotion effect is continuously executed.

  When it is determined that it is the end timing of the jackpot promotion effect (Y in step S1975), the effect control CPU 101 selects a process table corresponding to the normal jackpot promotion effect that does not include the jackpot promotion effect (step) S1976). Next, a process timer corresponding to the effect execution data 1 in the selected process data is started (step S1977). Then, the promotion effect flag is reset (step S1978).

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 controls the effect device (image display device 9, speaker 27, lamps 28a to 28c, etc.) according to the contents of the process data n (step S1987). For example, the image display device 9 displays a jackpot display symbol, and an effect of displaying characters indicating the number of rounds, other characters, etc. (effect during the jackpot) is executed. Further, when process data corresponding to the jackpot promotion effect is selected, for example, a character string such as “promotion to probability change!” Is displayed, and the effect of promotion to probability change is performed. Further, the effect control CPU 101 subtracts 1 from the value of the process timer (step S1988).

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 checks whether or not the process timer has timed out (step S1989), and if the process timer has timed out, switches the process data (step S1990). That is, the process data (display control execution data, lamp control execution data, and sound number data) set next in the process table is switched. Then, the process timer set value in the next process data is set in the process timer, and the process timer is started (step S1991).

  FIG. 80 is a flowchart showing the jackpot end effect process (step S806) in the effect control process. In the ending effect process, the effect control CPU 101 first determines whether or not an ending effect flag provided in the effect control flag setting unit 191 is on (step S971). The ending effect flag is set to an on state by executing a process in step S981 described later, and is cleared to an off state by executing a process in step S991.

  When the ending effect flag is OFF (N in step S971), the effect control CPU 101 reads the display result command or the data indicating the display result command from the display result command storage area, for example, to determine the big hit type Whether or not is a normal big hit that is “normal” is determined (step S972). If it is not a normal big hit (N in step S972), the CPU 101 for effect control determines whether or not the big hit type is “third probability variation” (step S973). When the big hit type is “third probability variation” (Y in step S973), the effect control CPU 101 determines the promotion success effect from the notification content buffer value stored in the effect control buffer setting unit 194, for example. It is determined whether or not it has been executed (step S974). As an example, when the notification content buffer value is “1”, it is determined that the jackpot promotion promotion effect is executed, and when the notification content buffer value is “0”, the jackpot promotion promotion effect is executed. What is necessary is just to determine that it is not.

  When it is determined that the big hit type is other than “third probability variation” (N in step S973), or when it is determined that the promotion success effect has been executed (Y in step S974), the effect control CPU 101 A process table corresponding to a predetermined non-promotion ending effect is selected (step S977). As an example, in the process of step S977, the effect control CPU 101 reads either the display result command or the data indicating the display result command from the display result command storage area, so that either the 15 round big hit state or the 2 round big hit state Determine whether to end. Then, according to the determination result of the jackpot gaming state to be finished, the effect control pattern that does not execute the promotion effect is read from the various effect control pattern table 182 shown in FIG. 41, and the effect control process timer is set. Next, a process timer corresponding to the effect execution data 1 in the selected process data is started (step S978).

  When it is determined that the promotion success effect has not been executed (N in step S974), the effect control CPU 101 selects a process table corresponding to the ending promotion success effect (step S975). As an example, in the process of step S975, the effect control CPU 101 reads the effect control pattern for executing the promotion success effect from the various effect control pattern tables 182 in response to the end of the 15th round big hit state, and the effect control process. Set the timer. Next, a process timer corresponding to the effect execution data 1 in the selected process data is started (step S976).

  When it is determined that it is a normal big hit (Y in step S972), the effect control CPU 101 selects a process table corresponding to the ending promotion failure effect (step S979). As an example, in the process of step S979, the effect control CPU 101 reads effect control patterns for executing the promotion failure effect from the various effect control pattern tables 182 in response to the end of the 15th round big hit state, and effects control process Set the timer. Next, a process timer corresponding to the production execution data 1 in the selected process data is started (step S980).

  Then, the effect control CPU 101 sets the ending effect flag to the on state (step S981), and ends the ending effect process.

  When it is determined that the ending effect flag is on (Y in step S971), the effect control CPU 101 subtracts 1 from the effect period measurement timer (step S982), and whether or not the effect period measurement timer has timed out. (Step S983). That is, the effect control CPU 101 determines whether or not the end timing of the ending effect has come. Here, the ending effect is an effect operation executed in response to the end of the big hit gaming state, including an unpromoted ending effect, an ending promotion success effect, and an ending promotion failure effect.

  If the effect period measurement timer has not timed out (N in step S983), the effect control CPU 101 executes control of the effect devices (image display device 9, speaker 27, lamps 28a to 28c, etc.) according to the contents of the process data n. (Step S984). For example, the image display device 9 is controlled to display a big hit end screen. Specifically, an address or the like where the image data of the big hit end screen in the CGROM 83 is stored, and a command to transfer the big hit end screen image data to the frame memory is output to the drawing processor 109. The drawing processor 109 reads the image data of the big hit end screen from the CGROM 83 according to the command, and transfers the read image data to the frame memory via the temporary storage area of the VRAM 84. Further, when process data corresponding to the jackpot promotion effect is selected, for example, a character string such as “promotion to probability change!” Is displayed, and the effect of promotion to probability change is performed. The effect control CPU 101 subtracts 1 from the value of the process timer (step S985).

  Next, the production control CPU 101 checks whether or not the process timer has timed out (step S986), and if the process timer has timed out, switches the process data (step S987). That is, the process data (display control execution data, lamp control execution data, and sound number data) set next in the process table is switched. Then, the process timer set value in the next process data is set in the process timer and the process timer is started (step S988).

  If the production period measurement timer has timed out, the production control CPU 101 determines whether a display result 4 designation command (first probability variation big hit designation) or a display result 5 designation command (second probability variation big success designation) has been received. Confirmation is made (step S989). If it has been received, the probability variation state flag is set (step S990) and the predetermined flag is reset (step S991). In step S991, for example, an ending effect flag or, if set, a time reduction state flag is reset. Then, an effect mode # 3 data transfer control process (a process for effect mode # 3 corresponding to the process shown in FIG. 96) is performed (step S992). That is, since the game mode is determined to be in a probable change state, the effect mode # 3 data transfer control process is executed. In this embodiment, in the probability variation state, the symbol shown in the lower part of FIG. 65 (A) is used as the decorative symbol “7”. In the effect mode # 3 data transfer control process, the decorative pattern image data indicating the number “7” combined with the star-shaped hexagonal figure stored in the selected image data area (see the lower part of FIG. 65A) ) Is transferred to the VRAM 84.

  Thereafter, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the variation start command reception waiting process (step S800) (step S993).

  Next, a specific example of the effect operation by displaying various effect images centering on the variable display of the decorative pattern in the display area of the image display device 9 will be described. In the effect control board 80, in response to the reception of the first change start command and the second change start command transmitted from the main board 31, for example, the effect is specified based on the change pattern specified by the change pattern specifying command. In the decorative symbol display areas “left”, “middle”, and “right” provided in the display area of the image display device 9 by the control CPU 101 supplying a predetermined display control command to the drawing processor 109 or the like, Start changing the decorative pattern.

  First, of the cases where the variable display result is “losing”, a specific example where the decorative symbol variable display mode is “non-reach” will be described with reference to FIGS. In addition, although the display examples shown in FIGS. 81 to 88 show the case where the decorative design is displayed on the image display device 9 without distinguishing which effect mode, specifically, Depending on which of the production modes # 1 to # 3, any type of decorative design shown in FIG. 46 is displayed.

  FIG. 81 shows that the specific effect of “slip” is executed when the specific effect is not executed among the cases where the decorative symbol variable display mode is “non-reach”, or when the “pseudo-continuous” specific effect is executed. In this case, a display operation example in the case where a specific effect of “end of development chance eyes” is executed is shown. For example, when the variation pattern of the non-reach PA1-1 is designated by the variation pattern designation command, the specific effect as shown in FIGS. 81 (C1) and (C2) is not executed, and the variation pattern of the non-reach PA1-4. 81 is designated, a specific effect of “slip” as shown in FIGS. 81 (E1) to (E4) is executed, and when a non-reach PA1-5 variation pattern is designated, FIG. 81 (D1) ˜ When a specific effect of “pseudo-continuous” as shown in (D6) is executed, and a variation pattern of non-reach PA1-7 is designated, “expansion chance” as shown in FIGS. 81 (F1) to (F6) This is a case where a specific effect of “eye end” is executed. In FIG. 81 (A), for example, in response to the start of variation of the special symbol in the variable symbol variable display, the variation of the decorative symbol is displayed in all the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas. Be started. Thereafter, for example, as shown in FIG. 81 (B), the decorative symbol indicating the number “6” is stopped (temporarily stopped) in the “left” decorative symbol display area.

  When the specific effect is not executed or when the “slip” specific effect is executed, “6” is set as the left final stop symbol FZ1-1 by referring to the final stop symbol determination table 160A shown in FIG. In response to the determination of the decorative symbol indicating the number "", the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed as shown in FIG. 81 (B). In addition, as shown in FIG. 29 (A), if the variation pattern of the non-reach PA1-4 in which the specific effect of “slip” is executed when the decorative symbol variable display mode is “non-reach”, the specific Since the effect pattern is always determined to be only the slip TP1-1 and the specific effect of “slip” is executed in the “right” decorative symbol display area to rapidly change the decorative symbol, the “left” decorative symbol is executed. The decorative pattern to be stopped and displayed in the display area is not changed depending on the specific effect of “slip”. Further, when the specific effect of “end of development chance eyes” is executed, the combination of decorative symbols constituting the development chance eyes HC6 is determined by referring to the final stop symbol determination table 160D shown in FIG. In response to the determination as the left middle right final stop symbols FZ1-4, FZ1-5, and FZ1-6, the decorative symbol stop display as shown in FIG. 81 (B) is performed. When a specific effect of “pseudo-continuous” is executed, a decorative symbol indicating the number “6” is determined as the left final stop symbol FZ1-1, and the display based on the left final stop symbol FZ1-1 is shown in FIG. The temporary stop symbol determination table 167A shown in FIG. 3) is referred to, and the combination of the decorative symbols constituting the pseudo-continuous chance GC6 is determined as the left middle right temporary stop symbols KZ2-1, KZ2-2, and KZ2-3. In response to this, the stop display of the decorative symbols as shown in FIG. 81 (B) is performed.

  Thereafter, when the specific effect is not executed, as an example, as shown in FIG. 81 (C1), the decorative symbol indicating the number “7” is stopped and displayed in the “right” decorative symbol display area (temporary stop display). Then, as shown in FIG. 81 (C2), after the decorative symbol indicating the number “4” is stopped (temporarily stopped) in the “medium” decorative symbol display area, the fixed ornament which is a non-reach combination is displayed. The symbol is stopped (final stop). At this time, the final decorative symbol determination table 160B shown in FIG. 24B is referred to for the final decorative symbol that is stopped and displayed in the “right” decorative symbol display area and the “middle” decorative symbol display area. By referring to the final stop symbol determination table 160C shown in FIG. 24C together with the left / right outcome determination table 161 shown in FIG. 25, the right final stop symbol FZ1-2 and the middle final stop symbol FZ1-3 are determined.

  On the other hand, when a specific effect of “pseudo-run” is executed, as an example, a decoration indicating a number “7” in the “right” decorative symbol display area as shown in FIG. 81 (D1). After the symbol is stopped (temporarily stopped), the decorative symbol indicating the number “6” is stopped (temporarily stopped) in the “medium” decorative symbol display area as shown in FIG. 81 (D2). As a result, the decorative symbol that becomes the pseudo consecutive chance GC6 is stopped and displayed. At this time, for example, temporary stop display such as decorative pattern fluctuation display may be performed, and then the decorative symbols may be changed again in all the decorative symbol display areas as shown in FIG. 81 (D3). Thereafter, for example, as shown in FIGS. 61 (D4) to (D6), decorative symbols indicating the numbers “6”, “7”, and “4” in a predetermined order such as “left” → “right” → “middle”. Are sequentially displayed in a stop (temporary stop display), and then the fixed decorative symbol that is a non-reach combination is stopped (final stop display).

  When the specific effect of “slip” is executed, as an example, as shown in FIG. 81 (E1), the decorative symbol indicating the number “5” is stopped and displayed in the “right” decorative symbol display area. After the stop display), as shown in FIG. 81 (E2), the decorative symbol is re-varied at high speed in the “right” decorative symbol display area. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 81 (E3), the decorative symbol to be stopped and displayed is changed so that the decorative symbol indicating the number “7” is displayed in the “right” decorative symbol display area. Here, as shown in FIG. 81 (E1), the decorative symbol displayed temporarily stopped in the “right” decorative symbol display area is, for example, based on the determined right final stop symbol FZ1-2. The temporary stop symbol determination table 166A shown in FIG. After that, for example, as shown in FIG. 81 (E4), after the decorative symbol indicating the number “4” is stopped (temporarily stopped) in the “medium” decorative symbol display area, the fixed ornament that becomes a non-reach combination is displayed. The symbol is stopped (final stop).

  When a specific effect of “end of development chance” is executed, as an example, as shown in FIG. 81 (F1), the decorative symbol indicating the number “7” is stopped in the “right” decorative symbol display area. After the display (temporary stop display), as shown in FIG. 81 (F2), the decorative symbol indicating the number “7” is also stopped (temporary stop display) in the “medium” decorative symbol display area. As a result, the decorative symbols constituting the development opportunity eye HC6 are temporarily displayed. At this time, for example, as shown in FIG. 81 (F3), an effect display is performed such that the temporarily stopped decorative design rotates in a certain direction, and then, as shown in FIG. 81 (F4), An effect display is performed in which the player is expected to develop that the variable display state becomes a reach state. Here, if the decorative symbol displayed temporarily stopped from the effect display as shown in FIG. 81 (F4) is rotated in the reverse direction, the development of the reach state occurs. In this example, the development that reaches the reach state does not occur, and, for example, as shown in FIG. 81 (F5), after the effect display is performed such that the temporarily stopped display of the decorative symbols in the rotation state is restored. The confirmed decorative symbols constituting the development chance eye HC6 are stopped and displayed (final stop display).

  FIG. 82 shows a display operation example in the case where the specific effect of “intro” is executed among the cases where the decorative symbol variable display mode is “non-reach”. For example, when the variation pattern of the non-reach PA 1-6 is designated by the variation pattern designation command, the “Intro” specific effect as shown in FIG. 82 is executed. In FIG. 82 (A), for example, in response to the start of variation of the special symbol in the variable symbol variable display, the variation of the decorative symbol is displayed in all of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas. Be started. Thereafter, for example, as shown in FIG. 82 (B), the decorative symbol indicating the number “3” is stopped (temporarily stopped) in the “left” decorative symbol display area, and the “right” decorative symbol display area is displayed. The decorative symbol indicating the number “2” is stopped (temporarily stopped), and the character image CH1 is displayed at a display position corresponding to the “medium” decorative symbol display area. Note that the character image CH1 only needs to appear as an effect image in a reach effect that is executed when the decorative symbol variable display state becomes the reach state later.

  Subsequently, for example, as shown in FIG. 82 (C), after an effect display is performed to update the decorative symbols temporarily displayed in the “left” and “right” decorative symbol display areas. As shown in FIG. 82 (D), in accordance with the change of the character image CH1, in the “left” decorative symbol display area, the updated display to the decorative symbol indicating the number “4” is changed to the “right” decorative symbol display area. Then, an update display to the decorative symbol indicating the number “3” is performed. Also, for example, as shown in FIG. 82 (E), after an effect display is performed to further update the decorative symbols updated and displayed in the “left” and “right” decorative symbol display areas, for example, FIG. As shown in (F), in accordance with the change of the character image CH1, in the “left” decorative symbol display area, the updated display of the decorative symbol indicating the number “2” is displayed, while in the “right” decorative symbol display area. Update display to the decorative symbol indicating the number “1” is performed. Then, for example, as shown in FIG. 82 (G), an effect display in which the decorative symbols temporarily displayed in the “left” and “right” decorative symbol display areas are updated in accordance with the change of the character image CH1. For example, as shown in FIGS. 82 (H) to (K), in the “left” decorative symbol display area, the decorative symbol indicating the number “2” is temporarily displayed, while the “right” In the decorative symbol display area “”, decorative symbols indicating numbers “1” to “3” are updated and displayed in a predetermined order. Thereafter, in the “right” decorative symbol display area, for example, as shown in FIG. 82 (L), an effect display that updates the decorative symbol is performed, and then “3” is displayed as shown in FIG. 82 (M). A decorative pattern indicating a number is temporarily stopped and displayed. When the specific effect of “intro” is completed in this way, for example, as shown in FIG. 82 (N), after the character image CH1 is erased, the fixed decorative symbol that is a non-reach combination is stopped (final stop display).

  FIG. 83 shows an example of the display operation when the specific effect of “intro” is executed among the cases where the decorative symbol variable display mode is “reach”. For example, the variation pattern designation command is used to change the variation pattern of Super PA3-3, Super PA3-7, Super PB3-3, Super PA4-3, Super PA4-7, Super PA5-3, Super PB4-3, Super PB5-3. When any one of them is designated, a specific effect of “intro” as shown in FIG. 83 is executed. In the display operation example shown in FIG. 83, the same effect display as in FIGS. 82 (A) to (L) is performed in the portions of FIGS. 83 (A) to (L). Thereafter, in the “right” decorative symbol display area, for example, as shown in FIG. 83 (M), the decorative symbol indicating the number “2” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the “left” decorative symbol display area. The variable display state becomes the reach state together with the decorative symbols displayed temporarily stopped. When the specific effect of “intro” is completed in this way, for example, as shown in FIG. 83 (N), after the character image CH1 is erased, a reach effect corresponding to the change of the variable display state to the reach state is started. After that, a confirmed decorative pattern that becomes a reach combination, a fixed decorative pattern that becomes a jackpot combination, and the like are stopped and displayed (final stop display).

  84 to 86 show display operation examples when the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is other than “surprise”. In FIG. 84 (A), for example, in response to the start of the change of the special symbol in the variable symbol display, the decorative symbol changes in all of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas. Be started. Thereafter, for example, as shown in FIG. 84B, the decorative symbol indicating the number “6” is stopped and displayed (temporary stop display) in the “left” decorative symbol display area.

  And, for example, when a specific effect of “slip” is executed, such as when the variation pattern is Super PA4-2, as shown in FIG. 84 (C1) to (C3), After temporarily displaying the decorative symbols in the “left” and “right” decorative symbol display areas, changing the decorative symbols again in the “right” decorative symbol display area, An effect display for changing the decorative pattern to be stopped and displayed is performed so that the variable display state becomes the reach state. Further, when a specific effect of “pseudo-continuous” is executed, for example, when the variation pattern is Super PA 4-4, for example, as shown in FIGS. 84 (D1) to (D5), After the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed in all the decorative symbol display areas, an effect display is performed in which the decorative symbols are changed again (pseudo-variable) in all the decorative symbol display areas. After that, the decorative symbols indicating the number “6” are aligned and stopped (temporarily stopped) in the “left” and “right” decorative symbol display areas, so that the variable display state of the decorative symbols becomes the reach state. Become. Furthermore, when a specific effect of “Development Chance” is executed, such as when the variation pattern is Super PC 4-1, for example, as shown in FIGS. 84 (E1) to (E6). In all the decorative symbol display areas, after the combination of decorative symbols that will become the development chance HC6 is stopped (temporary stop display), the effect display that the decorative symbols that are temporarily stopped are rotated in the reverse direction. Is performed, the decorative symbol variable display state becomes the reach state.

  After reaching the reach state as shown in FIG. 84 (C3) and FIG. 84 (D5), for example, as shown in FIG. 85 (A), the variation speed of the decorative symbol in the “medium” decorative symbol display area is increased. descend. For example, when the variation pattern is any one of normal PA2-5 to normal PA2-8, a number indicating “6” in the “medium” decorative symbol display area as shown in FIG. A “normal” reach effect is performed in which the display is stopped (temporarily stopped) together with the “left” and “right” decorative symbol display areas. In the example shown in FIG. 85 (B), the decorative symbols constituting the jackpot combination are stopped and displayed in correspondence with the case where the variable display result is “big hit”, but the variable display result is “lost”. In this case, for example, as shown in FIG. 85 (H), after displaying the effect image indicating that the number indicating “5” is stopped and displayed in the decorative symbol display area where “medium” is displayed, “medium” is displayed. Reach loss by stopping display of decorative symbols other than the number “6” in the “decorative” display area of “medium”, such as stopping display of the decorative symbol of the number “5” in the decorative symbol display area. What is necessary is just to stop-display the fixed decorative symbol which comprises a combination, and complete | finish the variable display of a decorative symbol. When any one of the reach effect α1 to the reach effect α3 and the reach effect β1 to the reach effect β3 is executed, for example, as shown in FIG. The fluctuating speed of the decorative pattern rises again, and various reach effects are displayed. For example, in the reach effect β1, after the character image CH2 as shown in FIG. 85D is displayed, the corresponding reach effect display proceeds. In the case of any one of the reach effects α1 to the reach effects α3, after the character image CH1 as shown in FIG. 85 (E) is displayed, the reach effect display as shown in FIG. 85 (F) proceeds. To do. Then, in the reach effect α1, for example, as shown in FIG. 85 (G), a decorative pattern that is stopped (temporarily stopped) in the first stage effect display appears. In the example shown in FIG. 85 (G), the decorative symbol constituting the jackpot combination is stopped and displayed corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “big hit”, but the variable display result is “lost”. In such a case, it is only necessary to stop and display the fixed decorative symbols constituting the reach-losing combination and to end the variable display of decorative symbols. On the other hand, in the reach effect α2 and the reach effect α3, for example, as shown in FIGS. 85 (H) and (I), the process proceeds to the second stage effect display. On the other hand, in reach effect β2 and reach effect β3, after a character image CH3 as shown in FIG. 85 (J) is displayed, the corresponding reach effect display proceeds.

  When the second stage effect display proceeds as shown in FIG. 85 (I), if the reach effect α2 is reached, for example, as shown in FIG. 86 (A), a stop display (temporary stop) is shown in the second stage effect display. A decorative pattern to be displayed appears. When the variable display result is “losing”, for example, as shown in FIG. 86B, the displayed decorative symbols are not changed, and the fixed decorative symbols constituting the reach-losing combination are stopped and displayed. What is necessary is just to finish the variable display of a decoration design. On the other hand, in the reach effect α3, for example, as shown in FIGS. 86 (B) to 86 (D), the process proceeds to the third stage effect display (also referred to as “relief effect”). Then, a decorative pattern that is stopped (temporarily stopped) in the stage 3 effect display appears. Here, for example, when it is decided not to execute the fluctuating promotion effect, as shown in FIG. 86 (E), the temporarily displayed decorative symbol is displayed as a final decorative symbol as a final decorative symbol. (Final stop display). On the other hand, when it is decided to execute the changing promotion effect, after temporarily displaying the decorative symbol that is a normal jackpot combination as shown in FIG. 86 (F), FIG. 86 (G) As shown in FIG. 5, the same symbol pattern is changed in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas. Then, when the changing promotion effect is executed in response to the big hit type being “first probability change”, for example, as shown in FIG. 86 (H), the decorative symbol displayed temporarily stopped is changed again. After that, the promotion success effect during change is performed to stop and display the confirmed decorative pattern that becomes the probability variation big hit combination. Note that when the promotion promotion effect during change is executed, after performing the change again of the decorative symbol as shown in FIG. 86 (G), for example, as in FIG. What is necessary is just to stop-display a decorative design.

  FIG. 87 shows an example of a display operation when the notice display effect of “mail display” is executed. In this display operation example, first, as shown in FIG. 87 (A), for example, in response to the start of variation of the special symbol in the variable symbol special display, the decorative symbols “left”, “middle”, and “right” are displayed. The decorative symbols that have been stopped and displayed in the display area start to change in all of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas as shown in FIG. Thereafter, for example, according to the effect display control data read from the notice effect control pattern of the notice CYP3-2-1 determined corresponding to the decided notice pattern of the notice YP3-2, for example, as shown in FIG. 87 (C). As described above, the effect image YH1 that prompts the player to operate the operation button 120 is displayed. When the player operates the operation button 120 within a predetermined period and the operation detection signal transmitted from the operation button 120 to the effect control board 80 is turned on accordingly, for example, the effect control CPU 101 By switching the notice effect control pattern of the notice CYP3-2-1 to the notice CYP3-2-2, the effect image YH2 indicating the mail message as shown in FIG. Change the direction. On the other hand, when the operation button 120 is not operated within a predetermined period, the effect image YH1 is deleted as shown in FIG. 87 (E), for example, without switching the notice effect control pattern, The notice effect ends. After that, for example, as shown in FIG. 87 (F), variable display of decorative symbols proceeds such as temporarily stopping display of decorative symbols in the “left” decorative symbol display area.

  FIG. 88 shows a display operation example when the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “surprise”. In FIG. 88 (A), for example, in response to the start of variation of the special symbol in the variable symbol variable display, the variation of the decorative symbol is displayed in all of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas. Be started. Thereafter, for example, as shown in FIGS. 88 (B) to 88 (D), decorative symbols indicating the numbers “1”, “5”, and “3” in a predetermined order such as “left” → “right” → “middle”. Are sequentially displayed in a stop (temporary stop display), and then the confirmed decorative symbol that becomes the chance of chance TC1 is stopped (final stop display). At this time, as the big hit effect in the two round big hit state, for example, as shown in FIG. 88 (E), an effect image for notifying the shift to a special effect mode such as the LIVE mode is displayed. Then, as an ending effect in response to the end of the two round big hit state, for example, an effect image as shown in FIG. 88 (F) is displayed, and the display enabling recognition of the LIVE mode is shown in FIG. 88, for example. As shown in (G), the display is kept displayed even after the next decorative pattern change is started. Even when the variable display result is “small hit”, the effect is executed in accordance with the display mode similar to the effect at the time of “probable” shown in FIG.

  FIG. 89 is a flowchart showing the V blank interrupt process executed by the effect control CPU 101 in response to the V blank interrupt from the drawing processor 109. The V blank interrupt is an interrupt generated by the drawing processor 109 in the same cycle as the cycle of the vertical synchronization signal supplied to the image display device 9. For example, when the screen change frequency (frame frequency) of the image display device 9 is 30 Hz, the generation period of the V blank interrupt is 33.3 ms, and when the frame frequency is 60 Hz, the occurrence of the V blank interrupt is generated. The period is 16.7 ms.

  In this embodiment, the effect control CPU 101 outputs a command to the drawing processor 109 in the V blank interrupt process, but the process shown in FIG. 89 may be executed in another process.

  In the V blank interruption process, the effect control CPU 101 refers to the data in the display area register (see FIG. 63) to check whether the current display area is the area 0 or the area 1 (step S901). If the current display area is area 0, data indicating area 1 is set in the display area register to set the display area to area 1 (step S902). If the current display area is area 1, data indicating area 0 is set in the display area register to set the display area to area 0 (step S903).

  Next, when the process data valid flag (flag indicating that the effect control based on the process data is being performed) is set (step S904), the effect control CPU 101 decrements the process timer value by -1 ( Step S905). When the value of the process timer becomes 0 (step S906), the process data pointer is incremented by 4 (step S907). Therefore, the process data pointer points to the next process timer set value (see FIG. 76A). The effect control CPU 101 loads the contents of the display control execution data set in the area next to the area pointed to by the process data pointer (area where the process timer set value is set) (step S908). Note that data indicating specific display control contents may be set in the display control execution data area, but an address of a ROM area where data indicating specific display control contents is set is set. It may be.

  When data indicating drawing of a component image, that is, development to a frame memory is set as display control execution data (step S909), a drawing control process is executed (step S910). For example, when a variable display of a decorative symbol is executed such that one decorative symbol moves up and down one frame at a time every 0.1 second (100 ms), the process timer is set to respond out in 100 ms. It is set. If the decorative pattern “5” was displayed before the process timer timed out, the display control execution data used when the process timed out is to expand the decorative pattern “6” in the frame memory. The data shown is set. In this case, the effect control CPU 101 determines that drawing of a component image is necessary.

  Then, the process timer set value pointed to by the process data pointer is set in the process timer (step S911). That is, the process timer is started.

  In this embodiment, the frame memory has a double buffer configuration with areas 0 and 1, but the frame memory may be configured with a single area. In that case, the drawing processor 109 writes the image data in a single area. The display signal control unit 87 creates an image signal based on the image data developed in the frame memory, and outputs the image signal to the image display device 9, but the frame memory is composed of a single area. In the drawing processor 109, the display signal control unit 87 reads the image data from the frame memory after the image data has been written so that the writing and reading of the image data to the frame memory do not compete with each other. Execute the process.

  Next, the operation when the production control CPU 101 outputs a command and the operation of the drawing processor 109 (specifically, the drawing control unit 91 in the drawing processor 109) according to the command will be described. In this embodiment, the instruction output from the rendering control CPU 101 to the drawing processor 109 is performed by setting predetermined data in a predetermined register in the drawing control register 95 of the drawing processor 109.

  FIG. 90 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a data table stored in the ROM 112. 90 exemplifies a data table used when image data stored in the selected image data area and the common image data area of the CGROM 83 shown in FIG. 65 is transferred to the VRAM 84.

  The fixed area data table is a data table used when transferring the image data stored in the common image data area shown in FIG. The effect mode # 1 data table is a data table used when the image data shown in the upper part of FIG. The effect mode # 2 data table is a data table used when the image data shown in the middle part of FIG. The effect mode # 3 data table is a data table used when transferring the image data shown in the lower part of FIG.

  FIG. 91 is a flowchart showing the initial data transfer process shown in FIG. In the initial data transfer process, the effect control CPU 101 sets the start address of the area used as the fixed area in the fixed area start address register (see FIG. 63) in order to secure the fixed area in the VRAM 84 (step S921). . Also, the final address of the area used as the fixed area is set in the fixed area final address register (see FIG. 63) (step S922).

  Next, with reference to the fixed area data table, an instruction for transferring the image data stored in the selected image data area and the common image data area of the CGROM 83 to the VRAM 84 is given to the drawing processor 109. That is, the production control CPU 101 sets the head address of the fixed area data table in the ROM 112, for example, in an internal register (step S923), and sets 0 in the address pointer (step S924). Then, the fixed area data transfer control process is executed (step S925).

  FIG. 92 is a flowchart showing fixed area data transfer control processing. In the fixed area data transfer control process, the effect control CPU 101 reads data at the address pointed to by the address pointer in the fixed area data table (data storage start address (transfer source start address) in the CGROM 83) (step S931). Since the head address of the fixed area data table in the ROM 112 is not 0000, when reading data from the fixed area data table, the head address of the fixed area data table is added as an offset value to the value of the address pointer. The effect control CPU 101 sets the data read from the fixed area data table in the CGROM head address register (see FIG. 63) (step S932). Then, the value of the address pointer is incremented by 1 (step S933).

  Next, data at the address pointed to by the address pointer in the fixed area data table (stored storage start address (transfer destination start address) of the VRAM 84) is read (step S934), and the read data is read into the VRAM start address register (see FIG. 63). Setting is made (step S935). Then, the value of the address pointer is incremented by 1 (step S936).

  Next, the data (data length) of the address pointed to by the address pointer in the fixed area data table is read (step S937), and the read data is set in the VRAM transfer data size register (see FIG. 63) (step S938). Then, the corresponding bit of the VRAM fixed area transfer execution instruction register is set (step S939).

  As described above, a command for transferring the image data stored in the common image data area of the CGROM 83 to the VRAM 84 is given from the rendering control CPU 101 to the drawing processor 109. .

  FIG. 93 shows a process in which the drawing processor 109 (specifically, the drawing control unit 91 in the drawing processor 109) transfers image data from the CGROM 83 to the fixed area of the VRAM 84 in response to a command from the CPU 101 for effect control. It is a flowchart. When the corresponding bit of the VRAM fixed area transfer execution instruction register is set (step S1001), the effect control CPU 101 uses the read source counter (for example, the drawing processor 109) as the transfer source start address set in the CGROM start address register. General-purpose registers and built-in RAM are used) (step S1002). Further, the transfer destination head address set in the VRAM head address register is set in a write address counter (for example, a general-purpose register or a built-in RAM in the drawing processor 109 is used) (step S1003). Further, the data length (transfer data amount) set in the VRAM transfer data size register is set in a transfer data amount storage area (for example, a general-purpose register or built-in RAM in the drawing processor 109 is used) (step). S1004).

  Then, the data transfer process is executed (step S1005). When the data transfer process is completed, the corresponding bit of the VRAM fixed area transfer execution instruction register is reset (step S1006). If necessary, the effect control CPU 101 can recognize that the transfer of the image data from the CGROM 83 to the fixed area of the VRAM 84 is completed by confirming that the corresponding bit of the VRAM fixed area transfer execution instruction register has been reset. .

  FIG. 94 is a flowchart showing the data transfer process in step S1005. The data transfer process as a subroutine shown in FIG. 94 is also executed in other processes described later.

  In the data transfer process, the drawing processor 109 sets 0 to a processing counter (for example, a general-purpose register or a built-in RAM in the drawing processor 109 is used) (step S1100). That is, the processing counter is initialized.

  Next, data is read from the address indicated by the read address counter (step S1101). In this case, image data is read from the CGROM 83. Then, the read data is written to the address indicated by the write address counter (step S1102). Next, the values of the read address counter, the write address counter, and the processing counter are each incremented by 1 (step S1105). If the value of the processing counter matches the value (transfer data amount) set in the transfer data amount storage area, all the image data has been written in the transfer destination area, and the process is terminated (step S1106). ). If they do not match, the process returns to step S1101.

  In this embodiment, image data of a decorative pattern that is frequently used is transferred in advance from the CGROM 83 to the fixed area of the VRAM 84. When power supply to the gaming machine is started and the drawing processor 109 becomes operable, the contents of the drawing control register 95 are initialized, but the data bus mode register (see FIG. 63) in the drawing control register 95 is initialized. The value is “0”. Therefore, when the decorative design image data is pre-transferred to the fixed area of the VRAM 84, the data bus mode register is set to “0”, and the data width of the CG bus is 64 bits. When image data of a moving image that constitutes a frequently used background symbol is transferred in advance from the CGROM 83 to the fixed area of the VRAM 84, the presentation control CPU 101 performs drawing control to reduce the data width of the CG bus to 32 bits. “1” is set in the data bus mode register (see FIG. 63) in the register 95. Then, for example, the start address of the area where the image data of the moving image is stored is set in the CGROM start address register. Further, the start address of the fixed area of the VRAM 84 is set in the VRAM start address register. Then, the corresponding bit of the decoding execution instruction register is set. Then, the rendering processor 109 operates in the same manner as a moving image decoding process described later, and forwards the decoded moving image image data to a fixed area of the VRAM 84 in advance. Thereafter, the CPU 101 for effect control sets “0” in the data bus mode register (see FIG. 63) in the drawing control register 95 in order to return the data width of the CG bus to 64 bits.

  Note that the drawing processor 109 may not transfer image data of a moving image to a fixed area of the VRAM 84 in advance. By doing so, it is possible to prevent a situation in which a large area of the VRAM 84 is occupied by transferring image data of a moving image having a large data capacity in advance.

  FIG. 95 shows a modification of the process in which the drawing processor 109 (specifically, the drawing control unit 91 in the drawing processor 109) transfers image data from the CGROM 83 to the fixed area of the VRAM 84 in response to a command from the CPU 101 for effect control. It is a flowchart which shows an example. Here, the drawing processor 109 transfers the image data from the CGROM 83 to the fixed area via the temporary storage area of the VRAM 84.

  When the corresponding bit of the VRAM fixed area transfer execution instruction register is set (step S1001), the effect control CPU 101 uses the read source counter (for example, the drawing processor 109) as the transfer source start address set in the CGROM start address register. General-purpose registers and built-in RAM are used) (step S1002). Further, the head address of the temporary storage area of the VRAM 84 is set in a write address counter (for example, a general-purpose register or built-in RAM in the drawing processor 109 is used) (step S1003A). Further, the data length (transfer data amount) set in the VRAM transfer data size register is set in a transfer data amount storage area (for example, a general-purpose register or built-in RAM in the drawing processor 109 is used) (step). S1004).

  Then, the data transfer process is executed (step S1005). When the data transfer process is completed, the start address of the transferred data, that is, the start address of the temporary storage area is set as the transfer source start address in the built-in DMA circuit ( In step S1007), the contents of the VRAM head address register are set as the transfer destination head address (step S1008). Further, the data length (transfer data amount) set in the VRAM transfer data size register is set in the built-in DMA circuit (step S1009A), and the built-in DMA circuit is activated (step S1009B).

  The built-in DMA circuit outputs the read address starting from the transfer source start address to the VRAM bus, the read signal output, the output of the write address starting from the transfer destination start address to the VRAM bus, and the write signal output to the read address and the write signal. The data transfer is performed continuously while adding 1 to the embedded address. When the data transfer for the set data length is completed, for example, an internal interrupt is generated. The drawing processor 109 recognizes that all data has been transferred to the selected image data setting area in the VRAM 84 due to the occurrence of an internal interrupt (step S10009C), and resets the corresponding bit in the VRAM fixed area transfer execution instruction register. (Step S1006).

  FIG. 96 is a flowchart showing effect mode # 1 data transfer control processing executed by the effect control CPU 101. The production mode # 1 data transfer control process is executed when the power supply to the gaming machine is started and the production control microcomputer 100 becomes operable (see FIG. 68). Also, it is executed when it is determined that the effect mode is effect mode # 1 (see FIG. 68). The execution time of the effect mode # 1 data transfer control process is not limited to when the power supply to the gaming machine is started, and the selected image data in the effect mode # 1 (the upper part of FIG. 65A) is used first. It only has to be executed by the time. When the decorative symbol “7” is not used as the so-called initial appearance, the effect mode # 1 data transfer control process may be executed by the time when the decorative symbol variable display is first executed.

  In the effect mode # 1 data transfer control process, the effect control CPU 101 sets the start address of the effect mode # 1 data table (see FIG. 90) in the ROM 112 in, for example, an internal register (step S941), and sets the address pointer to 0. Set (step S942). Then, the data of the address pointed to by the address pointer in the effect mode # 1 data table (data storage head address (transfer source head address) in the CGROM 83) is read (step S943). Since the start address of the effect mode # 1 data table in the ROM 112 is not 0000, when the data is read from the effect mode # 1 data table, the start address of the effect mode # 1 data table is set to the offset value as the address pointer value. Add as The effect control CPU 101 sets the data read from the effect mode # 1 data table in the CGROM head address register (see FIG. 63) (step S944). Then, the value of the address pointer is incremented by 1 (step S945).

  Next, the data at the address pointed to by the address pointer in the effect mode # 1 data table (stored storage start address (transfer destination start address) of the VRAM 84) is read (step S946), and the read data is stored in the VRAM start address register (see FIG. 63). ) (Step S947). Then, the address pointer value is incremented by 1 (step S948).

  Next, the data (data length) at the address pointed to by the address pointer in the effect mode # 1 data table is read (step S949), and the read data is set in the VRAM transfer data size register (see FIG. 63) (step S950). . Then, the corresponding bit of the VRAM automatic transfer execution instruction register is set (step S951).

  As described above, a command for transferring the image data stored in the selected image data area of the CGROM 83 to the VRAM 84 is given from the rendering control CPU 101 to the drawing processor 109. . Here, production mode # 1 data transfer control processing has been described, but production mode # 2 data transfer control processing and production mode # 3 data transfer control processing are configured in the same manner. However, in the effect mode # 2 data transfer control process, the data read target is the effect mode # 2 data table, and in the effect mode # 3 data transfer control process, the data read target is the effect mode # 3 data table.

  FIG. 97 shows a process in which the drawing processor 109 (specifically, the drawing control unit 91 in the drawing processor 109) transfers image data from the selected image data area of the CGROM 83 to the VRAM 84 in response to a command from the CPU 101 for effect control. It is a flowchart which shows. When the corresponding bit in the VRAM automatic transfer execution instruction register is set (step S1011), the effect control CPU 101 sets the transfer source head address set in the CGROM head address register in the read address counter (step S1012). . Further, the start address of the temporary storage area of the VRAM 84 is set in the write counter as the transfer destination start address (step S1013). Further, the data length (transfer data amount) set in the VRAM transfer data size register is set in the transfer data amount storage area (step S1014).

  Then, the data transfer process (see FIG. 94) is executed (step S1015). When the data transfer process is completed, the built-in DMA circuit sends the transferred data start address as the transfer source start address, that is, the start of the temporary storage area. The address is set (step S1016), and the start address of the selected image data setting area (0000 (H) to 6FFF (H) in the example shown in FIG. 65B) in the VRAM 84 is set as the transfer destination start address. (Step S1017). The start address of the selected image data setting area in the VRAM 84 is the transfer destination start address set in the VRAM start address register by the processing in step S947. Further, the data length (transfer data amount) set in the VRAM transfer data size register is set in the built-in DMA circuit (step S1018), and the built-in DMA circuit is activated (step S1019).

  The built-in DMA circuit outputs the read address starting from the transfer source start address to the VRAM bus, the read signal output, the output of the write address starting from the transfer destination start address to the VRAM bus, and the write signal output to the read address and the write signal. The data transfer is performed continuously while adding 1 to the embedded address. When the data transfer for the set data length is completed, for example, an internal interrupt is generated. The drawing processor 109 recognizes that all data has been transferred to the selected image data setting area in the VRAM 84 due to the occurrence of the internal interrupt (step S1020), and resets the corresponding bit in the VRAM automatic transfer execution instruction register. (Step S1021). If necessary, the effect control CPU 101 can recognize that the transfer of the image data from the CGROM 83 to the VRAM 84 is completed by confirming that the corresponding bit of the VRAM automatic transfer execution instruction register has been reset.

  In this embodiment, the selected image data is transferred to a fixed area in the VRAM 84, but may be transferred to an area other than the fixed area in the VRAM 84 and stored in that area.

  FIG. 98 shows processing in which the drawing processor 109 (specifically, the drawing control unit 91 in the drawing processor 109) transfers image data from the selected image data area of the CGROM 83 to the VRAM 84 in response to a command from the CPU 101 for effect control. It is a flowchart which shows the modification of. In this case, the drawing processor 109 directly transfers the image data from the CGROM 83 to the fixed area of the VRAM 84.

  When the corresponding bit of the VRAM automatic transfer execution instruction register is set (step S1011), the drawing processor 109 sets the transfer source start address set in the CGROM start address register in the read address counter (step S1012). Also, the transfer destination head address set in the VRAM head address register (the head address of the selected image data setting area in the VRAM 84) is set in the write address counter (step S1013A). Further, the data length (transfer data amount) set in the VRAM transfer data size register is set in the transfer data amount storage area (step S1004). Then, a data transfer process (see FIG. 94) is executed (step S1015).

  FIG. 99 is a flowchart showing a drawing control process in the V blank interrupt process (see FIG. 89). The effect control CPU 101 first specifies a component image to be updated (step S961). For example, when a variable display of a decorative symbol is executed such that one decorative symbol moves up and down one frame at a time every 0.1 second (100 ms), the process timer is set to respond out in 100 ms. It is set. If the decorative pattern “5” was displayed before the process timer timed out, the display control execution data used when the process timed out was expanded to display the decorative pattern “6” in the frame memory. The data shown is set. In that case, the CPU 101 for effect control determines that drawing of a component image is necessary in the process of step S909 in the V blank interrupt process. In step S961, the part image to be updated is identified as a decorative symbol “6”.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 determines whether or not to switch to the moving image on the condition that the moving image mode flag is not set (step S962). Whether or not to switch to a moving image is determined based on the contents of process data set in the process table. That is, it is determined by whether or not a flag indicating a moving image is set in the display control execution data (see FIG. 76C). When it is determined that switching to a moving image should be performed, “1” is set in the data bus mode register (see FIG. 63) in the drawing control register 95 (step S963). Then, the moving image mode flag is set (step S964).

  Further, the effect control CPU 101 determines whether or not to switch to the still image on the condition that the moving image mode flag is set (step S965). Whether or not to switch to a still image is determined based on the contents of process data set in the process table. That is, it is determined by whether or not a flag indicating a still image is set in the display control execution data (see FIG. 76B). When it is determined that switching to a still image should be performed, “0” is set in the data bus mode register (see FIG. 63) in the drawing control register 95 (step S966). Then, the moving image mode flag is reset (step S967).

  By the processing in step S963, the effect control CPU 101 instructs the bus width of the CG bus between the CGROM 83 and the rendering processor 109 to be 32 bits when moving image display is performed on the image display device 9. Become. In addition, when no moving image display is performed in the image display device 9, a command is given to set the bus width of the CG bus between the CGROM 83 and the drawing processor 109 to 64 bits.

  As described above, moving image data (compressed data) is stored in the CGROM 83 in a ROM capable of data input / output of 32 bits. Therefore, even if the bus width of the CG bus is 32 bits, the drawing processor 109 can read image data from the CGROM 83 without error.

  In this embodiment, the bus width of the CG bus is automatically set to 32 bits when “1” is set in the data bus mode register, and automatically when “0” is set in the data bus mode register. In particular, the rendering processor 109 is used to set the bus width of the CG bus to 64 bits. However, the drawing processor 109 (specifically, the drawing control unit 91) validates the upper 32 bits of the 64-bit data bus according to the value set in the data bus mode register (the bus width is set to 64 bits). A rendering processor 109 configured to perform control or invalidate control (set the bus width to 32 bits) may be used. When such a drawing processor 109 is used, when the value set in the data bus mode register changes, the drawing control unit 91 performs processing for setting the bus width of the CG bus according to the changed value. Do.

  In this embodiment, the rendering processor 109 sets the bus width to 32 bits and then returns the bus width to 64 bits when the still image data is read from the CGROM 83 next time, but reads the moving image data from the CGROM 83. When the processing is completed, the bus width may be returned to 64 bits.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 determines whether or not there is a part image to be updated (step S971). The process in step S971 is a process that takes into account that there may be a plurality of component images to be updated. If there is a part image to be updated, it is determined whether or not the part image exists in the fixed area of the VRAM 84 (step S972). In this embodiment, each decorative design is a component image that exists in a fixed area of the VRAM 84.

  If the component image exists in the fixed area, the start address of the area where the image data of the component image in the fixed area exists is set in the fixed area arbitrary address register (see FIG. 63) (step S973). Further, the head address of the area where the image data of the component image is developed in the frame memory is set in the frame memory head address register (see FIG. 63) (step S974). Further, the transfer data amount (data length) of the transferred image data is set in the frame memory transfer data size register (see FIG. 63) (step S975). Then, the corresponding bit of the fixed area data transfer execution instruction register (see FIG. 63) is set (step S976).

  For example, when compositing an image for a notice effect or an image for a decorative design, a plurality of component images are transferred to a fixed area of the VRAM 84 in advance. Then, the processing of steps S973 to S976 is executed, each part image is transferred to the frame buffer, and each part image is superimposed on the frame buffer, thereby synthesizing the image for the notice effect or the decorative design.

  If the component image does not exist in the fixed area, the effect control CPU 101 determines whether or not the component image is a moving image (step S980). If it is not a moving image, the head address of the image data of the component image (still image) in the CGROM 83 is set in the CGROM head address register (see FIG. 63) (step S981). Further, the head address of the area where the image data of the component image in the frame memory is developed is set in the frame memory head address register (step S982). Further, the transfer data amount (data length) of the transferred image data is set in the frame memory transfer data size register (step S983). Then, the corresponding bit of the frame memory data transfer execution instruction register (see FIG. 63) is set (step S984).

  If the component image is a moving image, the start address of the image data (movie data) of the component image (moving image) in the CGROM 83 is set in the CGROM start address register (step S985). Further, the head address of the area where the image data of the moving image is developed in the frame memory is set in the frame memory head address register (step S986). Further, the transfer data amount (data length) of the movie data is set in the frame memory transfer data size register (step S987). Then, the corresponding bit of the decoding execution instruction register (see FIG. 63) is set (step S988).

  FIG. 100 shows a process in which the drawing processor 109 (specifically, the drawing control unit 91 in the drawing processor 109) transfers image data from the fixed area of the VRAM 84 to the frame memory in response to a command from the CPU 101 for effect control. It is a flowchart to show. The drawing processor 109 transfers the image data using the area 1 as the drawing area when the area 0 in the frame memory is set as the display area, and draws the area 0 when the area 1 is set as the display area. Image data is transferred as an area. In order to enable such control, for example, the production control CPU 101 always instructs the address of the area 0 when commanding the address of the frame memory. Then, when transferring the image data with the area 1 as the drawing area, the drawing processor 109 adds the difference between the address of the area 1 and the address of the area 0 to the commanded address to obtain the transfer destination address. To do.

  When the corresponding bit of the fixed area transfer execution instruction register is set (step S1025), the effect control CPU 101 sets the transfer source head address set in the arbitrary head address register in the fixed area in the process of step S973 as the read address counter. (Step S1026). Further, the transfer destination start address set in the frame memory start address register is set in the write counter as the transfer destination start address (step S1027). Further, the data length (transfer data amount) set in the frame memory transfer data size register is set in the transfer data amount storage area (step S1028).

  Then, the data transfer process (see FIG. 94) is executed (step S1029). When the data transfer process is completed, the corresponding bit in the fixed area transfer execution instruction register is reset (step S1030). If necessary, the effect control CPU 101 can recognize that the transfer of the image data from the fixed area of the VRAM 84 to the frame memory has been completed by confirming that the corresponding bit of the fixed area transfer execution instruction register has been reset. .

  FIG. 101 is a flowchart showing processing in which the drawing processor 109 (specifically, the drawing control unit 91 in the drawing processor 109) transfers image data from the CGROM 83 to the frame memory in response to a command from the CPU 101 for effect control. is there.

  When the corresponding bit of the frame memory transfer execution instruction register is set (step S1031), the drawing processor 109 sets the transfer source start address set in the CGROM start address register in the read address counter (step S1032). Further, the start address of the temporary storage area of the VRAM 84 is set in the write counter as the transfer destination start address (step S1033). Further, the data length (transfer data amount) set in the frame memory transfer data size register is set in the transfer data amount storage area (step S1034).

  Then, the data transfer process (see FIG. 94) is executed (step S1035). When the data transfer process is completed, the built-in DMA circuit sends the start address of the transferred data, that is, the start of the temporary storage area, as the transfer source start address. The address is set (step S1036), the transfer destination start address set in the frame memory start address register is set as the transfer destination start address, and the data length (transfer data amount) set in the frame memory transfer data size register is set. ) Is set (step S1037), and the built-in DMA circuit is activated (step S1038).

  The built-in DMA circuit outputs the read address starting from the transfer source start address to the VRAM bus, the read signal output, the output of the write address starting from the transfer destination start address to the VRAM bus, and the write signal output to the read address and the write signal. The data transfer is performed continuously while adding 1 to the embedded address. When the data transfer for the set data length is completed, for example, an internal interrupt is generated. The drawing processor 109 recognizes that all the data has been transferred to the frame memory due to the occurrence of the internal interrupt (step S1039), and resets the corresponding bit in the frame memory transfer execution instruction register (step S1040). If necessary, the effect control CPU 101 can recognize that the transfer of the image data from the CGROM 83 to the frame memory is completed by confirming that the corresponding bit of the frame memory transfer execution instruction register has been reset.

  When it is necessary to transfer image data from the CGROM 83 to the frame memory, the rendering control CPU 101 simply designates the start address in the CGROM 83 and the start address in the frame memory with respect to the address (see steps S981 and S982). 109 reads the image data from the frame memory and expands the image data to the frame memory via the temporary storage area of the VRAM 84 (see steps S1032 to S1039). Therefore, even if the drawing processor 109 that transfers image data from the frame memory to the frame memory via the temporary storage area is used, the presentation control CPU 101 does not need to specify an address in the temporary storage area, and the CGROM 83 transfers to the frame memory. The control burden related to the transfer of image data is not increased.

  102 and 103, the drawing processor 109 (specifically, the drawing control unit 91 in the drawing processor 109) transfers the image data of the moving image from the CGROM 83 to the frame memory in response to an instruction from the CPU 101 for effect control. It is a flowchart which shows the moving image decoding process to perform. In the moving image decoding process, when the corresponding bit of the decoding execution instruction register is set (step S1041), the effect control CPU 101 sets the transfer source head address set in the CGROM head address register in the read address counter. (Step S1042). Further, the start address of the temporary storage area of the VRAM 84 is set in the write counter as the transfer destination start address (step S1043). Further, the data length (transfer data amount) set in the frame memory transfer data size register is set in the transfer data amount storage area (step S1044).

  Then, a data transfer process (see FIG. 94) is executed (step S1045). When the data transfer process ends, the moving image decompression unit 89 in the rendering processor 109 transfers the moving image data (compressed data) transferred to the temporary storage area of the VRAM 84. ) For example in units of 32 bits (step S1047).

  In this case, in the data transfer process, the image data is read from the CGROM 83 in units of 32 bits, and the image data is written in the temporary storage area in units of 32 bits. In the case where the VRAM 84 is configured to have 64 bits as one word, when the image data is read twice from the CGROM 83 in units of 32 bits, the two image data are written in the temporary storage area.

  Next, the decoded image data is stored in another area in the temporary storage area of the VRAM 85. If the moving image data is an I picture, decoding can be performed using only the moving image data transferred to the temporary storage area in step S1045. However, if the moving image data is a B picture or a P picture, it cannot be decoded using only the moving image data transferred to the temporary storage area in the process of step S1045. It is also necessary to use image data of frames that are decoded thereafter. Therefore, the drawing processor 109 stores image data of previously decoded frames necessary for decoding of the P picture in the temporary storage area of the VRAM 84. Further, when decoding a B picture, the compressed data of the B picture is stored in the temporary storage area until the image data of the frame necessary for decoding the B picture is decoded, and is necessary for decoding the B picture. When the frame image data is decoded, the B picture image data is decoded.

  As described above, when expanding the moving image data compressed from the CGROM 83 to the VRAM 85 in step S1047, the image data corresponding to one frame decoded by the moving image expansion unit 89 (decoder) is expanded in the VRAM 85. Then, a moving image is displayed on the image display device 9 based on the image data developed in the VRAM 85. When starting the display of the moving image, the effect control CPU 101 instructs to decode the image data first displayed on the image display device 9 in the moving image decoding process at least one interruption before the start of the moving image display. Decoded by the moving picture decompression unit 89.

  In this embodiment, the frame memory and the VRAM 84 are provided outside the drawing processor 109. However, when the frame memory and the VRAM 84 are built in the drawing processor 109, moving image data (compressed data). Is transferred from the CGROM 83 to a temporary storage area in the built-in RAM of the drawing processor 109, and the compressed data transferred to the built-in RAM is decoded.

  Next, the rendering processor 109 sets, in the built-in DMA circuit, the start address of the temporary storage area where the decoded image data is stored as the transfer source start address (step S1048), and the frame memory as the transfer destination start address. The transfer destination head address set in the head address register is set, the data length (transfer data amount) of the decoded image data is set (step S1049), and the built-in DMA circuit is activated (step S1050).

  The built-in DMA circuit outputs the read address starting from the transfer source start address to the VRAM bus, the read signal output, the output of the write address starting from the transfer destination start address to the VRAM bus, and the write signal output to the read address and the write signal. The data transfer is performed continuously while adding 1 to the embedded address. When the data transfer for the set data length is completed, for example, an internal interrupt is generated. The drawing processor 109 recognizes that all data has been transferred to the frame memory due to the occurrence of the internal interrupt (step S1051), and resets the corresponding bit in the decoding execution instruction register (step S1052). The effect control CPU 101 can recognize that the transfer of the image data from the CGROM 83 to the frame memory is completed by confirming that the corresponding bit of the decoding execution instruction register is reset if necessary.

  In this embodiment, the drawing processor 109 stores the moving image data (compressed data) of the CGROM 83 in the temporary storage area of the VRAM 84, and the moving image decompression unit 89 targets the compressed data stored in the temporary storage area. Decryption processing is performed. However, the drawing processor 109 may read the compressed data from the CGROM 83 in units of 32 bits, and the moving image decompression unit 89 may perform the decoding process on the read compressed data. Then, the decoded image data is sequentially stored in the temporary storage area. In this case, the rendering processor 109 does not decompress the compressed data before decoding in the VRAM 84, and the moving image decompression unit 89 (decoder) of the rendering processor 109 reads the picture of the moving image data from the CGROM 83, for example, the read picture Is a picture (B picture) that is decoded with reference to the preceding and succeeding pictures, the decoding is performed with reference to the preceding and succeeding pictures, and the pictures are developed one by one in the VRAM 84. Then, the drawing processor 109 sequentially displays the pictures developed in the VRAM 84 on the image display device 9. By repeatedly executing such processing, it is possible to eliminate the need to develop all the moving image data in the VRAM 84 at once. For example, if all the moving image data is developed in the VRAM 84 at a time, the capacity of the VRAM 84 is insufficient, and there is a possibility that the display of the moving image may be hindered. By eliminating the need, such inconvenience can be prevented.

  As described above, the drawing control to the frame memory based on the display control execution data set in the process data is executed. The display signal control unit 87 creates an image signal based on the image data developed in the frame memory, outputs the image signal to the image display device 9, and realizes image display on the image display device 9. Note that the display signal control unit 87 outputs an image signal based on the image data developed in the area 0 or the area 1 of the frame memory in a predetermined clock during a V blank interrupt generation interval (for example, 33.3 ms). The image is output to the image display device 9 in synchronization with the signal. The display signal control unit 87 displays an image signal based on the image data developed in the region 1 as the display region when the drawing control unit 91 develops the image data in the region 0 as the drawing region. 9, when the drawing control unit 91 develops image data for the area 1 as the drawing area, an image signal based on the image data developed in the area 0 as the display area is sent to the image display device 9. Output.

  In this embodiment, the moving image data stored in the CGROM 83 is transferred to the frame memory after being decoded. However, before actual display based on the moving image data is performed, the moving image data stored in the CGROM 83 in advance may be decoded and stored in the temporary storage area of the VRAM 84, for example. In that case, for example, the first display control execution data in the process table stores a command (for the drawing processor 109) that decodes the moving image data and expands it in the temporary storage area. In this case, a command for transferring image data from the temporary storage area of the VRAM 84 to the frame memory may be set.

  FIG. 104 is a flowchart showing the customer waiting demonstration control process in the effect control main process (see FIG. 68). The game control microcomputer 560 transmits a customer-waiting demo designation command when, for example, the variable display of the special symbol or the big hit game is finished and the number of reserved memories is zero. In the command analysis process, the production control CPU 101 sets a customer waiting demo designation command reception flag when receiving a customer waiting demonstration designation command.

  In the customer waiting demonstration control process, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not the customer waiting demonstration effect is being executed (step S601), and if not, whether or not the customer waiting demonstration designation command reception flag is set. (Step S602). If the customer waiting demonstration designation command reception flag is set, the customer waiting demonstration designation command reception flag is reset (step S603). Then, 0 is set in the address pointer (step S604), and fixed area data transfer control processing is executed (step S605). The fixed area data transfer control process is a process for transferring the image data (see FIG. 65 (B)) stored in the common image data area of the CGROM 83 to the fixed area of the VRAM 84, and the initial data in step S702. Although it is not essential to execute the fixed area data transfer control process at this stage, which is the same process as the process executed in the transfer process, for example, when the customer waiting demonstration demonstration is started, the fixed area data transfer control is performed. By executing the process, when data is garbled in the fixed area of the VRAM 84 due to some reason (for example, noise or the like), the image data in the fixed area of the VRAM 84 may be returned to correct data. it can.

  Next, the production control CPU 101 sets “1” in the data bus mode register (see FIG. 63) in the drawing control register 95 (step S606). Then, the moving image mode flag is set (step S607). Next, process data corresponding to the demonstration of waiting for a customer is selected (step S608). Next, the rendering device is controlled in accordance with the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, and sound number data 1) (step S609). Also, a process timer corresponding to the production execution data 1 in the selected process data is started (step S610). Then, a process data valid flag is set (step S611). If data related to moving image data is set in the display control execution data 1, the effect control CPU 101 executes the same control as steps S985 to S988 shown in FIG. Then, the moving image data is developed in the frame memory. The drawing processor 109 executes a moving picture decoding process to be described later (see FIGS. 102 and 103) in response to the corresponding bit in the decoding execution instruction register being set, and decodes the moving image data and expands it in the frame memory. .

  If the image data pre-transferred to the fixed area of the VRAM 84 is the image data of the moving image customer waiting demonstration screen, the CPU 101 for effect control also sets the data width of the CG bus to 32 in the process of step S605. In order to make bits, “1” is set in the data bus mode register (see FIG. 63) in the drawing control register 95. In addition, when the image data preliminarily transferred to the fixed area of the VRAM 84 is a decorative pattern image data that is a still image, “0” is set in the data bus mode register, and the data width of the CG bus is 64 bits. It is.

  If the customer waiting demonstration effect is being executed (Y in step S601), the effect control CPU 101 executes control of the effect device (image display device 9, speaker 27, lamps 28a to 28c, etc.) according to the contents of the process data n. (Step S612). Further, the effect control CPU 101 subtracts 1 from the value of the process timer (step S613).

  Next, the production control CPU 101 checks whether or not the process timer has timed out (step S614), and if the process timer has timed out, switches the process data (step S615). That is, the process data (display control execution data, lamp control execution data, and sound number data) set next in the process table is switched. In this case, the presentation control CPU 101 instructs the drawing processor 109 to perform image display control corresponding to the customer waiting demonstration presentation each time the process data is switched. The drawing processor 109 performs control to display an image corresponding to the customer waiting demonstration effect on the image display device 9 in accordance with the instruction of the effect control CPU 101. Then, the process timer setting value in the next process data is set in the process timer and the process timer is started (step S616).

  FIG. 105 is a flowchart showing a jackpot display process when a moving image is displayed on the image display device 9 during a jackpot game. In this case, the effect control CPU 101 sets “1” in the data bus mode register (see FIG. 63) in the drawing control register 95 before executing the process of step S893 (step S892A). Then, the moving image mode flag is set (step S892B). The other processes are the same as the processes shown in FIG. However, in this case, data related to a moving image is set in the display control execution data in the process table corresponding to the big hit game effect.

  FIG. 106 is an explanatory diagram showing a data bus in the CG bus between the drawing control unit 91 and the CGROM 83 in the drawing processor 109. In FIG. 106, the CG bus I / F 93 (see FIG. 4) is not shown. As shown in FIG. 106A, the data bus physically has 64 bits.

  FIG. 106 (A) shows a case where two ROMs 83A and 83B are provided. However, when an additional ROM is added, two ROM bits that can input / output 32-bit data as shown in FIG. 106 (B) are shown. It is necessary to provide ROMs 83C and 83D or a ROM capable of inputting and outputting 64-bit data. In FIG. 106 (B), the ROM 83C and 83D describe the data bus as extending from the ROM 83A and 83B for convenience of drawing. The data bus is branched and wired to the ROMs 83C and 83D. As shown in FIG. 106B, when the bus width is 64 bits, the drawing control unit 91 inputs data by 64 bits. In that case, if one ROM 83C is provided when the ROM is added, the drawing control unit 91 masks (forcibly sets to 0) the upper 32 bits of the input 64-bit data, or sets two 64-bit data. It is necessary to perform processing such as creating 64-bit data from the lower 32 bits of each data.

  In this embodiment, the CG bus mode can be switched between a 64-bit mode in which all 64 bits are used as a data bus and a 32-bit mode in which lower 32 bits are used as a data bus. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 106 (C), when image data is read from the ROM 83C in which moving image data is stored, the 32-bit mode is set and images are read from the ROM 83A and 83B in which still image data is stored. In the case of reading data, if the 64-bit mode is set, the additional ROM 83C can be made one. In FIG. 106 (C), for convenience of drawing, the ROM 83C is described so that the data bus extends from the ROM 83A. However, actually, the data bus between the drawing control unit 91 and the ROM 83A is branched. Wired to the ROM 83C. When configured as shown in FIG. 106C, when the bus width is 32 bits, that is, when the lower 32 bits are set to the 32-bit mode used as a data bus, the drawing control is performed. The unit 91 can input data by 32 bits. Therefore, the drawing control unit 91 can handle 32-bit data as it is by providing only one ROM 83C.

  Further, in the case where ROM addition is not performed and the CGROM 83 can be formed by three ROMs 83A, 83B, and 83C as shown in FIG. As shown, it is necessary to form the CGROM 83 with four ROMs 83A, 83B, 83C, 83D. That is, the number of ROMs used increases.

  The moving image data is stored in the ROM 83C in a compressed state. Therefore, the data amount is compressed as compared with the sprite images stored in the ROMs 83A and 83B. Therefore, a certain amount of processing is required for the decoding processing of the moving image data. Therefore, even if the bus width when reading the moving image data (compressed data) from the CGROM 83 is reduced to reduce the data transfer speed, the rendering processor 109 It can be said that the overall processing performance does not deteriorate so much.

  Further, when the drawing processor 109 can execute the decoding process of the compressed data and the data reading process from the CGROM 83 at the same time, the moving image data (compressed data) is read from the CGROM 83 during the decoding process. Can do. Even in that case, since only 32 bits can be decoded at a time, the decoding process takes time. Therefore, the bus width when reading moving image data (compressed data) from the CGROM 83 is narrowed to reduce the data transfer speed. It can be said that there is no problem. Similarly, when the decoding process and the data reading process of the compressed data can be executed at the same time and the writing process to the frame buffer can be executed at the same time, the moving image data (compressed data) is read from the CGROM 83. It can be said that there is no problem even if the data transfer speed is lowered by narrowing the bus width.

  The image data stored in the ROM 83C is not limited to moving image data. Still image data may also be stored in the ROM 83C used when the bus width is set to 32 bits. Conversely, moving image data may also be stored in the ROMs 83A and 84B used when the bus width is set to 64 bits.

  As described above, according to this embodiment, the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type is determined based on the determination result as to whether or not the reach state using the random value MR2-2 for reach determination is used. Is used to determine the variation pattern type of the identification information as one of a plurality of types. Also, the variation pattern of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is determined from the variation patterns included in the determined variation pattern type, using the random value MR4 for variation pattern determination. Therefore, regardless of whether the reach state is determined or not, the variation pattern type can be determined using the common variation pattern type determination random number MR3, and the variation pattern can be determined. The capacity of the program (the data capacity of the work area for determining the variation pattern) can be reduced.

  According to this embodiment, the drawing processor 109 (VDP) reads image data from the CGROM 83 in a state where the bus width of the data bus is set to a predetermined bus width (for example, a 64-bit bus width), and When a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, when reading moving image data), the bus width of the data bus is changed to a specific bus width (for example, a 32-bit bus width) different from the predetermined bus width. Read image data from. Therefore, it is possible to read the image data from the CGROM 83 by switching the bus width, and the cost for the CGROM 83 can be reduced.

  Further, according to this embodiment, in response to the determination that the reach state is made by the determination process using the reach determination random number value MR2-2, the random value MR3 for the variation pattern type determination is determined. Is used to determine one of a plurality of types of variation patterns according to the reach state. Further, in response to the determination that the reach state is not set by the determination process using the reach determination random number value MR2-2, the special symbol is variably displayed using the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type. Any of a plurality of variation pattern types including a variation pattern type for executing a specific effect (effects such as “slip”, “pseudo-run”, “intro”, “expansion chance”) in the image display device 9 To decide. For this reason, even when it is determined to be out of date and it is determined not to reach the reach state, a specific effect can be executed during the variable display. Therefore, even when it is not a big hit and a reach mode is not achieved, various effects can be executed during the variable display, and an interest in the game can be improved.

  For example, as a conventional gaming machine, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2005-160763 discloses a reach based on the value of the first variation type counter CS1 by using the values of two variation type counters such as the variation type counters CS1 and CS2. There is described a gaming machine configured to determine a type and the like, and to determine a more detailed symbol variation mode based on the value of the second variation type counter CS2. However, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2005-160763, although the values of two fluctuation type counters are used to determine the fluctuation pattern at the time of big hit or reach occurrence, If not, the symbol variation type is determined using only the first variation type counter CS1 without using the second variation type counter CS2. For this reason, the number of symbol variation types determined when neither big hit nor reach is reduced, and it is not possible to improve the game entertainment taste when neither big hit nor reach.

  In addition, since the variation pattern is determined using only one random number when it is neither big hit nor reach, the probability that each variation pattern is selected tends to be the same, and the randomness is selected in the selection ratio of each variation pattern. Without bias. Further, if the selection ratio of each variation pattern is intentionally random, the method of assigning the determination value to the random value becomes complicated, and the complexity in designing the appearance frequency of each variation pattern increases.

  In this embodiment, even if it is neither big hit nor reach, it may be determined to a fluctuation pattern including a specific effect using two random numbers. And can improve the interest of the game. In addition, after the variation pattern type is distributed using the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type, the variation pattern is finally determined using the random value MR4 for determining the variation pattern. (That is, since the variation pattern is determined by a two-stage lottery process), the selection ratio of each variation pattern can be easily randomized, and the selection ratio of each variation pattern is not biased. be able to.

  For example, when a variation pattern is determined using only one random number, when distribution of each variation pattern is to be changed, distribution of random number values for all variation patterns must be changed. On the other hand, in this embodiment, it is only necessary to change the distribution of random values for each variation pattern within the distributed variation pattern type, so the appearance frequency of each variation pattern can be easily changed in design.

  Further, according to this embodiment, the rendering processor 109 determines that a predetermined condition is satisfied when reading moving image data from the CGROM 83, and sets the bus width of the data bus to a predetermined bus width (for example, 64 bits). The video data is read from the CGROM 83 by changing the bus width to a specific bus width (for example, a 32-bit bus width). Therefore, the optimum bus width can be switched when moving image data is read from the CGROM 83, and the processing efficiency of image processing such as moving image data can be improved.

  For example, if the data read from the CGROM 83 is still image data such as a sprite image, the wider data bus can be read from the CGROM 83 at a higher speed. Data can be read at a higher speed when data is read with the bus width. On the other hand, when the data read from the CGROM 83 is moving image data, it takes time to perform decoding processing after the moving image data is read. Therefore, even if the moving image data is read with a specific bus width, it is wider than that. Even when moving image data is read out with the bus width, the overall processing time does not change so much. Rather, although the decoding process cannot be performed at the same processing speed, the reading process from the CGROM 83 is performed at a high speed, so that the overall processing efficiency decreases. Therefore, in this embodiment, when moving image data is read from the CGROM 83, the moving image data is read out from the CGROM 83 by switching to a narrow specific bus width (for example, a 32-bit bus width). The processing efficiency of image processing such as is improved.

  In this embodiment, when the super reach production or the customer waiting demonstration production is performed, the super reach moving image data or the customer waiting demonstration moving image data shown in FIG. 66 is read from the CGROM 83 and decrypted. Although the case where it displays on the display apparatus 9 was shown, the effect using moving image data is not restricted to what was shown in this Embodiment. For example, when the big hit occurs, the drawing processor 109 reads the big hit display moving image data from the CGROM 83, performs the decoding process, and displays it on the image display device 9, thereby performing the big hit display effect (fanfare effect). You may do it.

  Further, when the data is read from the CGROM 83 with only a wide predetermined bus width (for example, a 64-bit bus width), even when a ROM for storing a small amount of data is to be added, Two ROMs capable of inputting / outputting 32-bit data and ROMs capable of inputting / outputting 64-bit data must be provided, which increases costs. In this embodiment, data can be read from the CGROM 83 by switching to a narrow specific bus width (for example, 64-bit bus width). Therefore, when it is desired to add a ROM for storing small-capacity data, 32-bit data is used. It is possible to add one ROM capable of data input / output, and the cost of the CGROM 83 can be reduced.

  Moreover, according to this embodiment, the 1st special symbol display 8a and the 2nd special symbol display 8b are provided. When the variation pattern type of the first special symbol is determined and when the variation pattern type of the second special symbol is determined, the variation pattern type is determined by using a common random number as the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type. decide. Therefore, the random number counter for the random number for determining the variation pattern type of the first special symbol and the random number counter for the random number for determining the variation pattern type of the second special symbol can be shared. The RAM capacity for securing the random number counter can be reduced.

  Further, according to this embodiment, the effect control microcomputer 100 is derived and displayed as a display result in the plurality of decorative symbol display areas in the image display device 9 based on the command transmitted by the game control microcomputer 560. The decoration pattern to be selected is determined from a plurality of types. Therefore, the processing load of the game control microcomputer 560 can be reduced by determining the display result to be derived and displayed on the image display device 9 on the effect control microcomputer 100 side.

  In addition, according to this embodiment, the effect control microcomputer 100 determines that the special display result (the pseudo continuous chance, the development chance, the chance of success, etc.) based on the command transmitted by the game control microcomputer 560. , A fixed non-reach combination shown in FIG. 26). Further, when it is determined that the display result is a special display result, a stop symbol of a decorative symbol that is a special display result is determined as a display result of a variable display of a decorative symbol derived and displayed on a predetermined effective line. In addition, when it is specified that the game is reached and the game state is not shifted to the big hit game state based on the command transmitted by the game control microcomputer 560, the middle final stop symbol that is derived and displayed last on the predetermined active line The difference between the left and right final stop symbols is determined using the final stop symbol determination table 162B, and the middle final stop symbol is determined based on the difference between the determined left and right final stop symbols. Further, when it is specified that the game is not reached and the game state is not shifted to the big hit game state based on the command transmitted by the game control microcomputer 560, the combination of the decorative symbols on the predetermined active line does not result in the special display result. The middle final stop symbol is determined using the left / right outcome determination table 161 set as described above. Therefore, it is possible to reliably prevent the special display result from being derived and displayed when it is determined that the combination of decorative symbols does not become the special display result (chance) as the display result of the variable display. In addition, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the special display result is derived and displayed and the player is confused even though it is internally determined to be a non-specific display result (dosage symbol). Furthermore, when it is specified that the game is not reached and the game state is not shifted to the specific game state, the middle / final stop symbol is determined without using the difference, so that various combinations of identification information in the non-specific display result that does not become reach are various.

  Further, according to this embodiment, variable display of special symbols (first special symbol and second special symbol) is started on the basis that a predetermined variable display execution condition is satisfied, and the display result is displayed. It has a first special symbol display 8a and a second special symbol display 8b for derivation display. For this reason, by allowing variable display of a plurality of pieces of identification information, it is possible to provide more playability.

  Further, according to this embodiment, when the display result is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a or when the display result is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display 8b, the first reserved memory number is 1. When the second reserved memory number is 1 or more, the variable display of either the first special symbol or the variable display of the second special symbol is executed with priority given to the above. . Therefore, when the execution condition for the variable display of the first special symbol is easily established, the variable display of the first special symbol can be executed with priority, and when the execution condition for the variable display of the second special symbol is easily established. The variable display of the second special symbol can be executed with priority, and the number of reserved memories can be efficiently digested. For this reason, it is possible to reduce the situation where the execution of the variable display execution condition is invalid, and to improve the operation rate of the variable display.

  Further, according to this embodiment, when the total number of reserved memories corresponding to the sum of the first number of reserved memories and the second number of reserved memories is equal to or greater than a predetermined number, Compared with the variable display time. Therefore, when the total number of reserved memories is equal to or greater than a predetermined value, a shortening variation is performed in one of the first special symbol display 8a and the second special symbol display 8b, and the other This special symbol display can prevent a situation in which the shortening variation does not occur. For this reason, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable and to reduce the situation where the execution of the variable display execution condition is invalid. Therefore, the operating rate of variable display can be improved.

  Further, according to this embodiment, when the game control microcomputer 560 determines that the game is out of place, the game control microcomputer 560 determines whether or not to execute the reach effect in the variable display of the decorative symbols on the image display device 9. In this case, when the total number of reserved memories is large, it is determined that the reach effect is executed at a smaller rate than when the total number of reserved memories is small. For this reason, when the total number of reserved memories is large, it is possible to reduce the frequency of executing the reach effect during the decorative symbol variation display. Therefore, in the gaming machine equipped with the first special symbol display 8a and the second special symbol display 8b, the operating rate of variable display can be improved and the processing load of the game control microcomputer 560 can be reduced. be able to.

  In this embodiment, the process for determining the big hit (see steps S1508 to S1517) and the like are performed by the common routine when the first special symbol is displayed in a variable manner and when the second special symbol is displayed in a variable manner. In the start port switch passing process (see step S312), a start winning confirmation process for the first start winning opening 13 and a start winning confirmation process for the second start winning opening 14 are performed. Also, a common routine may be used. FIG. 107 is a flowchart showing the start port switch passing process when the common routine is implemented. In the example shown in FIG. 107, the CPU 56 first checks whether or not the second start winning a prize opening switch 14a is on (step S211A). If the second start port switch 14a is on, the CPU 56 sets data indicating “second” in the start port pointer (step S211B). If the second start port switch 14a is not turned on (that is, if the first start port switch 13a is turned on), data indicating “first” is set in the start port pointer (step S211B).

  Data indicating the address of the first reserved memory number counter or the address of the second reserved memory number counter is set in the start port pointer. That is, the data indicating “first” set in the start port pointer indicates the address of the first reserved memory number counter, and the data indicating “second” indicates the address of the second reserved memory number counter. The start port pointer is formed in the RAM 55. A first reserved memory number counter and a second reserved memory number counter are also formed in the RAM 55. “Formed in RAM” means an area in the RAM. Instead of the start pointer, data indicating “first” or “second” may be set in a register inside the game control microcomputer 560.

  Next, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the value of the reserved storage number counter indicated by the start port pointer is 4 (step S212A). If the value of the reserved storage number counter indicated by the start port pointer is 4, the process ends.

  If the value of the reserved memory number counter indicated by the start port pointer is not 4, the CPU 56 increments the value of the reserved memory number counter indicated by the start port pointer by 1 (step S213A). Further, the CPU 56 corresponds to the value of the total reserved storage number counter in the reserved storage specific information storage area (hold specific area) for storing the winning order to the first start winning opening 13 and the second start winning opening 14. Data indicated by the start port pointer is set in the area (step S214A).

  Next, the CPU 56 selects each random number value (random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, random number value MR2-1 for determining the big hit type, reach determination) from among the numerical data updated by the random number circuit 503 or the random counter. Random number value MR2-2, random pattern value MR3 for variation pattern type determination, random value MR4 for variation pattern determination) are extracted and stored in the storage area in the reserved storage buffer indicated by the start-pointer pointer. Processing is executed (step S215A).

  Next, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit the start port winning designation command indicated by the start port pointer (step S216A). Further, the CPU 56 increments the value of the total reserved memory number counter indicating the total reserved memory number, which is the sum of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number (step S217). Then, the CPU 56 transmits a reserved memory number notification command indicating the total reserved memory number based on the value of the total reserved memory number counter (step S218).

  Note that both the first start port switch 13a and the second start port switch 14a may be turned on at the same timing. Therefore, when data indicating “second” is set in the start port pointer in step S211B based on the fact that the second start port switch 14a is in the on state in step S211A, the processing in steps S212A to S218 is executed. Later, it may be confirmed whether or not the first start port switch 13a is in an ON state. If the first start port switch 13a is in the ON state, step S211C may be executed to set data indicating “first” in the start port pointer, and the processing after step S212A may be executed.

  Further, when making the start port switch passing process into a common routine, a common reserved memory number buffer similar to that in FIG. 50 may be used. In this case, after incrementing the value of the first reserved memory number counter by 1 in step S213A, the CPU 56 replaces the processing in step S214A with the reserved memory specifying information storage area at the head of the free area of the common reserved memory number buffer. A process of setting data indicated by the start port pointer is executed. In addition, the CPU 56 replaces the processing of step S215A with each random value (random number value MR1 for special figure display result determination, random value MR2-1 for jackpot type determination, random value MR2-2 for reach determination, fluctuation A random number value MR3 for pattern type determination and a random value MR4 for variation pattern determination) are extracted, and a process of storing them in the random number value storage area at the head of the empty area of the common reserved storage number buffer is executed.

  Also, when the start port switch passing process is made a common routine, the CPU 56 determines the variation pattern type based on the random value MR3 for variation pattern type determination according to the same process as the variation pattern setting process shown in FIG. After that (see step S331), the variation pattern is determined based on the random value MR4 for variation pattern determination (see step S333).

  Even when the start port switch passing process is made into a common routine, not all random values are extracted when a start winning occurs, but fluctuations such as a random number MR3 for variation pattern type determination and a random value MR4 for variation pattern determination. The random value for determining the pattern may be extracted at the start of the variation of the special symbol (that is, at the timing of variation pattern determination (see steps S331 and S333)).

  In this embodiment, characteristic configurations of gaming machines as shown in the following (1) to (6) are shown.

  (1) A variable display of a plurality of types of identification information (for example, decorative symbols) that can identify each is performed on an image display device (for example, image display device 9), and the display result of the identification information is a specific display result (for example, A game machine that can be controlled to a specific gaming state (for example, a big hit gaming state) that is advantageous to the player when it becomes a big hit symbol), and for effect control that gives a command to control the display state of the image display device A microcomputer (for example, production control microcomputer 100), an image data storage means (for example, CGROM 83) for storing a plurality of image data including image data of each identification information, and a data bus (for example, CG bus) The image data stored in the image data storage means is connected to the image data storage means so that the image data can be read out. Image processing means (for example, a drawing processor 109) that performs processing for displaying an image on the image display device based on the image data stored in the image data storage means. The first ROM (for example, ROM 83A, 83B) from which image data is read when the bus width of the data bus is set to the first bus width (for example, 64 bits), and the bus width of the data bus is the first Including a second ROM (for example, ROM 83C) from which image data is read when the second bus width (for example, 32 bits) is set narrower than the one bus width. Moving image data (for example, compressed data) is stored, and when the image processing unit reads the image data from the second ROM, the bus width setting of the data bus is set to the first bus. The width is changed to the second bus width (for example, the upper 32 bits of the CG bus are invalidated when “1” is set in the data bus mode register in the process of step S963). . According to such a configuration, the bus width of the data bus is set to the first bus width as the ROM of the image data storage means from which the image data is read when the bus width of the data bus is changed to the second bus width. It is possible to use a ROM capable of inputting / outputting data with fewer bits than a ROM from which image data is read when set, and as a result, the number of memories constituting the image data storage means can be reduced. is there. In addition, the bus width of the data bus is reduced when moving image data is read. However, since moving image control in the image processing means takes more time than still image control, image processing is performed even when the bus width is reduced. It is possible to prevent the performance from deteriorating.

  (2) The second ROM stores the moving image data in a compressed state, and the image processing means includes decoding means (for example, a moving image decompression unit 89) for decoding the compressed data. According to such a configuration, the processing of the decoding means takes time compared to the control of the still image, and therefore the image processing performance is degraded even if the bus width is reduced and the image data reading speed is reduced. There is no.

  (3) The effect control microcomputer is a display effect selection means (for example, an effect control micro-computer) that selects a display effect to be executed in the image display device when the identification information is variably displayed from a plurality of types of display effects. The computer 100 includes a part that executes the processes of steps S840 and S842 (a variation pattern to be used may be selected from a plurality of types of variation patterns according to the received variation pattern command). When the display result of the identification information in the image display device is the specific display result, the image processing means includes a predetermined display effect (for example, a super reach effect) that is easier to select than when the specific display result is not used. When the selection means selects a predetermined display effect as the display effect, the bus width setting of the data bus is set to the second The bus width is changed and image data is read from the second ROM (for example, in response to selection of a process table including process data indicating transfer of moving image data, the data bus mode register is selected in step S966. Is set to "1" and the processing of steps S981 to S985 is executed, then the processing of steps S1041 to S1052 is executed). According to such a configuration, when the predetermined display effect is selected, the moving image data stored in the second ROM is used, and the fun of the game is improved without degrading the image processing performance. The played game effect can be executed.

  (4) A sprite image (for example, still image data) used for displaying identification information as image data is stored in the first ROM (for example, ROM 83A, 83B). According to such a configuration, identification information can be processed quickly.

  (5) The image processing means includes a storage means (for example, a VRAM 84) for storing image data read from the image data storage means, a frame storage means (for example, a frame buffer 85) in which image data is set, a frame When the power supply to the image display means (for example, the display signal control unit 87) for displaying an image on the image display device based on the image data set in the storage means and the gaming machine is started, the use frequency is predetermined. Transfer means (for example, the drawing processor 109 (specifically, the data transfer circuit 94) for reading out image data higher than image data from the image data storage means and transferring it to a fixed storage area in the storage means (for example, a fixed area in the VRAM 84). In step S924, based on the execution of steps S924 and S925, step S1 is executed. When the image data to be set in the frame storage unit is transferred to the fixed storage area when the image data is set in the frame storage unit, the fixed storage is performed. Image data is read from the area and set in the frame storage means (for example, the processes in steps S1025 to S1030 are executed based on the execution of the processes in steps S972 to S976), and the image data is set in the frame storage means. When the target image data to be set in the frame storage means is not transferred to the fixed storage area, the image data is read from the image data storage means, and the read image data is stored in the frame via the temporary storage area in the storage means. Set in the means (for example, the processing of steps S981 to S984) Based on what was executed, it executes the processing of step S1031~S1040). According to such a configuration, when the identification information is variably displayed, the image data can be quickly set in the frame storage means, and the image after switching to the image display device (variably displayed) is reliably performed. Image) can be displayed. In addition, after power supply to the gaming machine is started, it is not necessary to read out image data that is frequently used from the image data storage unit, and the processing load on the image processing unit can be reduced.

  (6) The plurality of types of identification information are common identification information (for example, image data stored in the common image data area) used in any of the plurality of game modes (for example, production modes # 1 to # 3). A corresponding decorative design) and each selection identification information used in each of the plurality of game modes (for example, a decorative design corresponding to the image data stored in the selected image data area), When power supply to the gaming machine is started, the image data of the common identification information is read from the image data storage unit and transferred to the fixed storage area in the storage unit (for example, the processing in steps S924 and S925 has been executed). The process of steps S1001 to S1006 is executed based on the selection identification information used in the game mode when the game mode is determined. Reads out the image data from the image data storage means, for transferring the storage means (e.g., step S877, executes the process of step S1011~S1021 based on the processing of S941~951 has been executed). According to such a configuration, it is possible to save the storage capacity of the image data storage unit as compared with the case where image data of a plurality of identification information is stored in the image data storage unit for each game mode. In addition, after the variable display of the identification information is first started, it is not necessary to read out the image data of the common identification information from the image data storage unit, and the processing load on the image processing unit can be reduced.

Embodiment 2. FIG.
The gaming machine shown in the first embodiment is provided with a variable winning ball device (a combination) that can be controlled in either an open state in which game balls can be won or a closed state in which game balls cannot be won. A gaming machine that shifts the variable winning ball apparatus to a big hit gaming state in which the variable winning ball apparatus is controlled to be opened a predetermined number of times when a game ball wins in a special area (V winning zone) among the winning areas provided in the variable winning ball apparatus. You may apply to. Hereinafter, when the game ball is won in a special area provided in the variable winning ball apparatus, the second is a case where the variable winning ball apparatus is applied to a gaming machine that shifts to a big hit gaming state in which the variable winning ball apparatus is controlled to be opened a predetermined number of times. Embodiments will be described.

  Note that in this embodiment, detailed description of the parts having the same configuration and processing as those of the first embodiment will be omitted, and parts different from those of the first embodiment will be mainly described. For example, in this embodiment, the CPU 56 performs the same processing as in the first embodiment, the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random value MR2-1 for determining the big hit type, and the disturbance for determining the reach. Using the numerical value MR2-2, the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type, and the random value MR4 for determining the variation pattern, a variation pattern for variation display of the special symbol is determined. In addition, the effect control CPU 101 instructs the drawing processor 109 to display a still image or a moving image on the image display device 9 according to the same processing as in the first embodiment.

  FIG. 108 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment as seen from the front. As shown in FIG. 108, a variable winning ball apparatus 20 is arranged in the approximate center of the game area 7. Below the variable winning ball apparatus 20, a first starting winning hole 13 and a variable winning ball apparatus 15 that forms a second starting winning hole 14 are provided. The winning ball that has entered the first starting winning opening 13 is detected by the first starting opening switch 13a and guided to the back of the game board 6. In addition, the winning ball that has entered the second starting winning opening 14 that can be won when the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is opened is detected by the second starting opening switch 14 a and guided to the back of the game board 6. The variable winning ball device 15 is opened by a solenoid 15a. Hereinafter, the first start winning port 13 and the second start winning port 14 may be collectively referred to as “start winning ports” or may be expressed as the start winning ports 13 and 14. Further, the first start port switch 13a and the second start port switch 14a may be collectively referred to as “start port switches” or may be represented as start port switches 13a and 14a.

  When the game ball wins the start winning opening and is detected by the start opening switch, the variable winning ball apparatus 20 is controlled to open and close once or twice. By the opening / closing control, the left open door 76A moves to the left from the initial position, and the right open door 76B moves to the right from the initial position, so that the variable winning ball device 20 enters the open state, and the open door 76A. , 76B return to the initial position, the variable winning ball apparatus 20 is closed. The state where the variable winning ball apparatus 20 performs the opening operation in response to the detection of the winning of the start port switch in this way is referred to as a starting operation state. Hereinafter, the variable winning ball apparatus 20 may be referred to as a big winning opening or an accessory. In addition, the game board 6 is provided with various kinds of winnings. Hereinafter, the winning combination means the variable winning ball apparatus 20.

  Further, the variable winning ball apparatus 20 is controlled to be opened and closed a predetermined number of times, that is, a predetermined number of rounds when a big hit game start condition (for example, a game ball has won a specific area in the starting operation state) is established. This state is called a big hit gaming state (specific gaming state). In the big hit gaming state, a high percentage is won, and a large number of game balls are paid out to the player. Note that, except for the start operation state, a state where the variable winning ball apparatus 20 is controlled to open and close (a big hit game state) may be referred to as a first big hit game state. In addition, among the plurality of rounds in the first big hit gaming state, there may be included a round in which a large winning opening that is opened by the opening / closing plate 16 being opened is controlled to be opened / closed.

  An image display device 9 such as an LCD for effect display is provided on the back side inside the variable winning ball device 20. The image display device 9 variably displays (variably displays) the decorative symbol as identification information. In this embodiment, the image display device 9 has, for example, three variable display portions (symbol display areas) of “left”, “middle”, and “right”.

  On the right side of the variable winning ball apparatus 20, a first special symbol display 8a that variably displays a first special symbol as identification information is provided. The 1st special symbol display 8a is comprised by 7 segment display, for example. Further, on the right side of the variable winning ball apparatus 20, a second special symbol display 8b for variably displaying a second special symbol as identification information is provided. The second special symbol display 8b is constituted by, for example, a 7-segment display.

  Above the first special symbol display 8a and the second special symbol display 8b, there are four LEDs for displaying the number of effective winning balls in which a game ball has entered the first starting winning opening 13, that is, the first starting memory number. A first special symbol start memory display 18a is provided. The first special symbol start memory display 18a displays up to four first start memory numbers in order of winning. The first special symbol start memory display 18a increases the number of LEDs in the lit state by 1 each time there is an effective start winning in the first start winning opening 13. Each time variable display is started on the first special symbol display 8a, the number of LEDs that are lit is reduced by 1 (that is, one LED is turned off). In this example, the first special symbol start memory display 18a shifts the lighting state every time variable display is started on the first special symbol display 8a.

  Further, above the first special symbol display 8a and the second special symbol display 8b, four LEDs for displaying the number of effective winning balls in which a game ball has entered the second starting winning port 14, that is, the second starting memory number. A second special symbol start memory indicator 18b is provided. The second special symbol start memory display 18b displays up to four second start memory numbers in the order of winning. The second special symbol start memory display 18b increases the number of LEDs in the lit state by 1 each time there is an effective start winning in the second start winning opening 14. Then, every time variable display is started on the second special symbol display 8b, the number of LEDs in the lit state is reduced by 1 (that is, one LED is turned off). In this example, the second special symbol start memory display 18b shifts the lighting state every time variable display is started by the second special symbol display 8b.

  The variable display of the first special symbol ("0" to "9") on the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol ("0" to "9") on the second special symbol display 8b is a predetermined time. If the first special symbol or the second special symbol at the time of stoppage is a jackpot symbol (specific display result: specifically, “3”, “7”, for example) It shifts to the first big hit gaming state (big hit gaming state started without going through the starting operation state), and when it is other symbols (small hit symbol), it shifts to the starting operation state. In the operating state, when a game ball wins in a special area provided inside the variable winning ball apparatus 20, the state shifts to a second big hit game state (a big hit game state started after passing through the starting operation state).

  Next, the variable winning ball apparatus 20 will be described with reference to FIGS. 109 to 117. 109 and 110 are front views of the variable winning ball apparatus 20 provided on the game board 6 as seen from the front. FIG. 111 is a perspective view showing a structure having game ball passage openings 71, 72, 73 provided on the back side of the open doors 76A, 76B shown in FIG. 109 and FIG. FIG. 112 is a perspective view showing a path from the passing port 71 to the specific winning port 66 that forms the specific region. FIG. 113 is a perspective view showing a path from the passing port 73 to a specific winning port that forms a specific region. 114 (A), 115 (A) and 116 are top views of the lower part of the variable winning ball apparatus 20 as viewed from above, and FIGS. 114 (B) and 115 (B) are the variable winning ball apparatus. It is the front view which looked at the lower part of 20 from the front side. FIG. 116 also shows a rotating body (disk) 86 provided immediately above the specific winning opening 66. FIG. 117 is a top view of the rotator 86 as viewed from above. In FIGS. 110 and 112 to 116, the arrows indicate the course of the game ball.

  When the opening doors 76 </ b> A and 76 </ b> B are opened by driving the opening / closing motor 75, the variable winning device (combination object) 20 is in a state in which a game ball can enter. The game ball that has entered the accessory 20 passes through any of the passage openings 71, 72, 73 and flows down to the lower side of the accessory 20. The game ball that has passed through the passage opening 71 is detected by the first winning combination winning switch 71a, and the game ball that has passed through the passage opening 72 is detected by the second winning combination winning switch 72a and has passed through the passage opening 73. Is detected by the third prize winning switch 73a. The game ball that has passed through the passage port 71 passes through the guide rod 71A and is guided to the left in the accessory 20. The game ball that has passed through the passage openings 72 and 73 passes through the guide rod 73A and is guided to the right in the accessory 20. 109 shows a state in which the open doors 76A and 76B are closed and the game ball cannot enter the accessory 20, and FIG. 110 shows a state in which the open doors 76A and 76B are opened. Yes. In addition, the first prize winning switch 71a, the second prize winning switch 72a, and the third prize winning switch 73a may be collectively referred to as an “act winning prize switch”.

  Open doors 76A and 76B (not shown in FIG. 111) are provided on the front side of the structure shown in FIG. The game ball reaches any one of the passage openings 71, 72, and 73 through any of the three passages (routes from the front side to the back side) in the structure shown in FIG. 111. When the open doors 76A and 76B are closed (completely closed state), the game ball cannot enter any of the three passage openings 71, 72, and 73. When the open doors 76A and 76B are in the open state, the open doors 76A and 76B can enter any of the three passage openings 71, 72, and 73. However, when the open doors 76A and 76B are in the most open state (fully open state), there are three. Although it can enter any of the passage openings 71, 72, 73, the left and right passage openings 71, 73 become smaller as the open area becomes smaller during the period when the open doors 76A, 76B shift from the fully opened state to the fully closed state. Compared to the above, it becomes easier to pass through the central passage 72. In addition, during a period of transition from the fully closed state to the fully opened state, the game ball gradually enters a state where it can enter any of the three passing ports 71, 72, 73 from a state where the game ball easily enters the central passing port 72. Transition.

  That is, immediately after the opening doors 76A and 76B start transition from the fully closed state to the fully closed state and immediately before returning to the fully closed state, the proportion of the game balls passing through the central passage 72 is relatively high. . Note that opening the opening doors 76A and 76B means that the accessory 20 is in an open state, and closing the opening doors 76A and 76B means that the accessory 20 is in a closed state. Moreover, the open door 76A and the open door 76B move in the target state. The movement in the target state means that the distance from the center (the central axis of the central passage port 72) to the end of the open door 76A (the end near the central passage 72) and the end of the open door 76B ( This means that the distance to the end near the central passage 72 is always the same.

  Movable members 77 and 78 are provided on the left and right sides of the accessory 20. The moving part in the movable member 77 is a movable part 77A, and the moving part in the movable member 78 is a movable part 78A. The movable portion 77A is moved by a movable portion drive solenoid 77B, and the movable portion 78A is moved by a movable portion drive solenoid 78B. The movable part 77A and the movable part 78A each move in the vertical direction. A game ball that has won a specific winning opening 66 that forms a specific area provided at the bottom of the accessory 20 is detected by a specific area switch 66a. Note that the fact that a game ball has won the specific winning opening 66 and is detected by the specific area switch 66a is also referred to as V winning.

  As shown in FIG. 112 (A), the game ball that has passed through the passage opening 71 and is guided by the guide rod 71A (not shown in FIG. 112) passes through the passage 71B to the specific winning opening 66 and enters a specific area. It is possible to reach. The passage 71B becomes an open portion (a bowl-shaped passage) whose upper part is open from the middle, and a discontinuous passage 71C that is a passage that is connected to the passage 71B and cannot reach a specific area is provided at the beginning of the open portion. Yes. As shown in FIG. 112 (B), the movable portion 77A prevents the passage of the game ball downstream of the passage 71B at the beginning of the opening portion of the passage 71B during operation (when in the lower position). Is guided to the disengagement passage 71C. As shown in FIG. 112 (A), when the movable portion 77A is in the upper position, the game ball is not blocked by the movable portion 77A and flows down from the position where the movable portion 77A is provided to the downstream side of the passage 71B. .

  The game ball guided by the guide rod 73A (not shown in FIG. 113) through the passage openings 72 and 73 is specified through the passage 73B leading to the specific winning opening 66 as shown in FIG. 113 (A). It is possible to reach the area. The passage 73 </ b> B is an open portion (a bowl-shaped passage) that is open from the middle. The opening part of the passage 73B is curved, and there is no wall inside the curve at the beginning of the opening part. As shown in FIG. 113 (B), the movable portion 77A prevents the passage of the game ball downstream of the passage 73B at the beginning of the opening portion of the passage 73B during operation (when in the lower position). Is guided from the portion where the inner wall does not exist to the detaching passage 73C, which is a passage that cannot reach the specific region. As shown in FIG. 113 (A), when the movable portion 78A is in the upper position, the game ball is not blocked by the movable portion 78A and flows through the passage 73B along the outer wall of the curve by centrifugal force. It flows down from the position where the movable portion 78A is provided to the downstream side of the passage 73B.

  The passage 73B reaches the midway hole 74. The rotating body 86 is provided below the midway hole 74. The game ball that has passed through the intermediate hole 74 flows down to the rotating body 86.

  As shown in FIG. 114 (A), the game ball that has passed through the midway hole 74 flows down to the specific area side through the passage 74B. The passage 74B passes through the space between the recess 86C and the recess 86C (excluding the notch 86A) at the upper part of the rotating body 86, and merges with the passage 71B that is a path from the passage port 71.

  In this embodiment, the game ball that has passed through the passage port 72 and the game ball that has passed through the passage port 73 merge at the guide rod 73A, but the game ball that has passed through the passage port 72 and the game ball that has passed through the passage port 73 A ball path may be provided so as to reach the intermediate hole 74 directly from the passage port 72 without joining the game balls.

  As shown in FIG. 114 (B), The game balls that have won the specific winning opening 66 and are detected by the specific area switch 66a are: Further, it is detected by the accessory discharge switch 85a. In addition, The game balls that did not win the special winning opening 66 It is detected by the accessory discharge switch 85a. That means In this embodiment, All game balls that have entered the character 20 It is detected by the accessory discharge switch 85a. In addition, A game ball won in the specific winning opening 66 is not detected by the accessory discharge switch 85a, Only the game balls that have not won the specific winning opening 66 are detected by the accessory discharge switch 85a. A spherical path may be configured. In that case, The sum of the number of game balls detected by the specific area switch 66a and the number of game balls detected by the accessory discharge switch 85a is: It becomes the number of game balls discharged from the accessory 20.

  As shown in FIG. 115 (A), the game ball that has passed through the off-passage passages 71C and 73C does not pass through the specific winning port 66 from the off-holes 67 and 68 formed immediately above the specific winning port 66. Be guided to.

  As shown in FIG. 117, a plurality of concave portions 86 </ b> C are formed on the surface of the rotating body 86, and a notch 86 </ b> A is provided in a part of the rotating body 86. In the example shown in FIG. 117, seven concave portions 86C are provided. The game ball that has entered the passage 74B from the midway hole 74 and the game ball that has passed through the passage 71B reach the rotating body 86, but can enter the specific winning opening 66 only from the cutout portion 86A of the rotating body 86. The game ball that has entered the recess 86 </ b> C formed on the surface of the frame area (donut portion) of the rotator 86 is moved by the rotator 86, and is guided from the detachment port 69 to a path that does not pass through the specific winning port 66. . The recess 86C is a communication hole having no bottom surface. Therefore, the game ball that has entered the recess 86C can fall to the lower part, but the fall is prevented by the structure on the back surface of the rotating body 86 until the recess 86C containing the game ball reaches the position of the release port 69. ing. Further, the wall portion of the outer edge portion of the concave portion 86 </ b> C is prevented from falling toward the specific winning opening 66 from the concave portion 86 </ b> C. Note that a space between one recess 86C and the recess 86C adjacent thereto (hereinafter also referred to as “connecting portion”) is not a communication hole, so that the game ball does not fall from there.

  As indicated by broken line arrows in FIG. 116, the rotating body 86 rotates (in this example, rotates counterclockwise) by the driving of the rotating body drive motor 87 (see FIG. 117). During the rotation of the rotating body 86, the game ball that has reached the rotating body 86 when the notch 86 </ b> A is positioned immediately above the specific winning slot 66 can immediately win the specific winning slot 66. Moreover, the area | region (internal area | region) inside the donut part in the rotary body 86 is an area | region formed in planar shape. Therefore, the game ball that has reached the rotating body 86 may enter the notch 86A or the recess 86C after rolling in the internal region.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 117, a sensor for position detection is provided in the vicinity of the rotating body 86. The sensor includes, for example, a light emitting element such as a light emitting diode and a light receiving element such as a photodiode or a phototransistor installed so as to sandwich the rotating body 86, and the rotating body 86 is provided with a hole 87c. The hole 87 c is formed at a predetermined position in the inner region of the rotating body 86. Specifically, it is formed at a position that allows light from the light emitting element to pass to the light receiving element side when the rotating body 86 rotates and the region including the hole portion is at a position corresponding to the sensor installation position. The light receiving element is hereinafter referred to as a position sensor 87a.

  The game ball that has passed through the intermediate hole 74 and has reached the rotating body 86 through the passage 74B is almost always dropped from the notch 86A and specified when the notch 86A is located immediately above the specific winning opening 66. Wins a prize opening 66. However, when the game ball reaches the rotating body 86 from the passage 71B, even when the cutout portion 86A is located immediately above the specific winning opening 66, the cutout portion 86A does not fall from the cutout portion 86A. May come off and cross over into the recess 86C. Whereas the passage 74B that is the route from the intermediate hole 74 to the rotating body 86 is steeply inclined with respect to the surface of the rotating body 86 and is formed so as to flow down from the upper part with respect to the rotating body 86, The passage 71B is formed so as to flow in the lateral direction with respect to the surface of the rotating body 86 immediately before flowing into the rotating body 86. Therefore, depending on the momentum in which the game ball flows in, the passage 71B enters the notch 86A. This is not always the case.

  Therefore, in this embodiment, when the game ball passes through the central passage 72 or the right passage 73, the V winning is more likely than when the game ball passes through the left passage 71. Will occur. That is, the right route from the passing port 72 and the passing port 73 is easier to guide the game ball to the specific winning port 66 than the left route from the passing port 71. Further, in the case where a ball passage that directly reaches the midway hole 74 from the passage port 72 is provided, when the game ball passes through the central passage port 72, it is not blocked by the movable portions 77A and 78A. Compared to the case where the left and right passage openings 71 and 73 are passed, the specific winning opening 66 is easily reached.

  In this embodiment, it is assumed that a winning occurs when the game ball is detected by the accessory winning switch in the starting operation state or the second big hit gaming state. That is, an area where the three prize winning switches 71a, 72a, 73a are provided corresponds to the winning area. However, a switch for detecting a game ball may be provided in the variable winning ball apparatus 20 in addition to the prize winning switch, and a winning may occur when the game ball is detected by the switch.

  FIG. 118 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example of how the gaming machine proceeds in the second embodiment. As shown in FIG. 118, when a game ball is won at the start winning opening and the detection signal of any of the start opening switches 13a and 14a is turned on, that is, when a start winning occurs, the game control for controlling the progress of the game. A lottery is executed by the means. In this embodiment, the lottery result is a big hit or a small hit, and there is no losing. Then, the variation (variable display) of the special symbol and the decorative symbol is started. In addition to the big hit and the small hit, it may be determined to be out of place. In this case, for example, when it is determined that it is out of place, it is determined whether or not to reach using the random value MR2-2 for reach determination according to the same processing as in the first embodiment, and the variation pattern type The variation pattern is determined using the random number value MR3 for determination and the random value MR4 for variation pattern determination. And when a display result turns into a small hit symbol, you may make it transfer to a small hit game state and perform the process of releasing the accessory 20 demonstrated below.

  When the variation of the special symbol and the decorative symbol is finished, when the big hit is determined, the gaming state is shifted to the big hit gaming state (first big hit gaming state). In the big hit gaming state, the opening / closing control of the large winning opening (first large winning opening) by the opening / closing plate 16 is performed 16 times (16 rounds, 1 round opening allowance time is 29 seconds). As described above, in this embodiment, the number of rounds in the jackpot gaming state is fixed at 16, but the number of rounds (for example, any one of 2 rounds, 7 rounds, and 16 rounds) is determined by lottery or the like. May be.

  When the small hit is determined, the game control means controls the accessory 20 to the open state and starts the starting operation. In the starting operation state, the accessory 20 is opened for 0.9 seconds. The number of times of opening (number of times of opening) is once or twice. In the start-up operation state, when a game ball wins the accessory 20, and when the game ball wins the specific winning slot 66 and is detected by the specific area switch 66a, a V prize is generated. When a V prize is generated, the gaming state is shifted to a big hit gaming state (second big hit gaming state). If no V prize is generated, the game does not enter the second big hit gaming state. In other words, it becomes out of place.

  In this embodiment, in the second jackpot gaming state, the first grand prize opening is controlled to be opened / closed in all rounds, the round in which the first big prize opening is controlled to open / close, and the second big prize opening are There is a state in which a round controlled to open and close is mixed. In this way, there are a round with the first big prize opening where the continuation right of the next round is likely to occur and a round with the second big prize place where the continuation right of the next round is difficult to occur, so the variation of the game has been increased. Yes. However, even in a gaming machine having only the second grand prize opening without having both the first big prize opening by the opening / closing plate 16 and the second big prize opening by the variable winning ball apparatus 20, the display of the special symbol is performed. The present invention in which the number of times of opening of the big winning opening in the big hit gaming state is different can be applied. In addition, the opening / closing control of only the first big prize opening by the opening / closing plate 16 may be performed in the second big hit game state without using the accessory 20 as the second big prize opening.

  FIG. 119 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the variation of the special symbol and the decorative symbol and the start of the small hit game. As shown in FIG. 119, when the “start prize” is generated, the first special symbol or the second special symbol is changed in the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b, and in synchronization therewith. A display effect is performed in the image display device 9. When the variation time elapses, the stop symbol of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is derived and displayed. When the stop symbol is not the big hit symbol, the accessory 20 is released (blade released) and the small hit game is started. . Note that, as will be described below, the decorative pattern is changed in the image display device 9 in synchronization with the change of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, but in FIG. 119, the change of the decorative symbol is omitted. ing.

  FIG. 120 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the change of the special symbol and the decorative symbol, the start of the small hit game, and the start of the big hit game. As shown in FIG. 120, when the “start winning prize” occurs, the first special symbol display unit 8a or the second special symbol display unit 8b changes the first special symbol or the second special symbol, and is synchronized therewith. A display effect is performed in the image display device 9. When the variation time elapses, the stop symbol of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is derived and displayed. When the stop symbol is not the big hit symbol, the accessory 20 is released (blade released) and the small hit game is started. . When the stop symbol is a jackpot symbol ("3" or "7"), a jackpot display ("big hit" or "probability big hit") is performed, and the jackpot game is started. In that case, the game in the small hit game 8 starting operation state) is not executed. Thus, in this embodiment, in the big hit gaming state (first big hit gaming state) that occurs when the stop symbol of the first special symbol or the second special symbol becomes a specific symbol, and in the small hit game V Since there is a jackpot gaming state (second jackpot gaming state) that occurs when a winning occurs, the player can enjoy a plurality of types of jackpot games. Note that, as will be described below, the decorative pattern is changed in the image display device 9 in synchronization with the change of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. In FIG. ing.

  FIG. 121 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of image display such as a post-change effect (effect executed before the end of change of the special symbol and the start of the small hit game) in the image display device 9. FIG. 121 (A) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a display effect for a small hit (opening once for an accessory), and FIG. 121 (B) is an example of a display effect for a small hit (opening for an accessory twice). It is explanatory drawing shown. FIG. 121 (C) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a display effect when a V winning is generated in the small hit game. The display effect illustrated in FIG. 121 (C) is executed, for example, during a small hit game. The display effects exemplified in FIGS. 121A and 121B may also be executed during the small hit game.

  121 (A) and 121 (B) illustrate still images, the effect control microcomputer 100 causes the image display device 9 to display the images in FIGS. 121 (A) and (B) during the post-change effect period. ) Are controlled so as to sequentially display images in which the contents of the images exemplified in (1) are changed (for example, images in which the petals are gradually dropped or moved). Further, in synchronization with the display of the post-change effect on the image display device 9, the post-change effect is also performed on the light emitter and the speaker 27.

  FIG. 122 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the stop symbol of the special symbol and the type of winning. As shown in FIG. 122, stop symbols of special symbols include big hit symbols (in this example, “3” or “7”) and small hit symbols (in this example, other than “3” and “7”). However, the small hit symbol and the number of rounds in the second big hit gaming state correspond to each other. Further, the small hit symbol corresponds to the number of times the accessory 20 is released in the starting operation state. Therefore, a display relating to the player's advantage / disadvantage (number of times of opening) is made in the stage before the V winning in the small hit game, and the player's interest is drawn to whether or not the game ball will win the specific winning slot 66. Can do. In this embodiment, the number of rounds is determined by the type of the small hit symbol, but in addition to the type of the small hit symbol type, the number of rounds is determined depending on which of the passing holes 71, 72, 73 the game ball has passed. You may make it vary the range and kind of round number to be played, and the distribution ratio of a round.

Next, the configuration and operation of control means and the like in the gaming machine will be described.
FIG. 123 is a block diagram illustrating an example of a circuit configuration of the main board (game control board) 31 according to the second embodiment. FIG. 123 also shows the payout control board 37, the effect control board 80, and the like. A game control microcomputer (corresponding to game control means) 560 for controlling the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to a program is mounted on the main board 31. The game control microcomputer 560 includes a ROM 54 for storing a game control (game progress control) program and the like, a RAM 55 as storage means used as a work memory, a CPU 56 for performing control operations in accordance with the program, and an I / O port unit 57. including. In this embodiment, the ROM 54 and the RAM 55 are built in the game control microcomputer 560. That is, the game control microcomputer 560 is a one-chip microcomputer. The one-chip microcomputer only needs to incorporate at least the CPU 56 and the RAM 55, and the ROM 54 may be external or built-in. The I / O port unit 57 may be externally attached.

  In addition, the gate switch 32a, the first start opening switch 13a, the second start opening switch 14a, the first prize winning switch 71a, the second prize winning switch 72a, the third prize winning switch 73a, the specific area switch 66a, Also mounted on the main board 31 is an object driver switch 85a, winning port switches 38a and 39a, a V winning switch 22, a count switch 23, and an input driver circuit 58 for supplying detection signals from the position sensor 87a to the game control microcomputer 560. Yes. Further, a solenoid 15a for opening / closing the variable winning ball apparatus 15, a solenoid 21 for opening / closing the opening / closing plate 16, an opening / closing motor 75 for opening / closing the opening / closing doors 76A, 76B, a movable part driving solenoid 77B for operating the movable part 77A, An output circuit 59 for driving the movable part drive solenoid 78B for operating the movable part 78A in accordance with a command from the game control microcomputer 560 is also mounted on the main board 31. Further, an information output circuit (not shown) for outputting an information output signal such as jackpot information indicating the occurrence of a jackpot gaming state to an external device such as a hall computer is also mounted on the main board 31.

  Further, the game control microcomputer 560 includes a first special symbol display 8a that variably displays the first special symbol, a second special symbol display 8b that variably displays the second special symbol, and a normal symbol that variably displays the normal symbol. The display control of the display 10, the first special symbol hold memory display 18a, the second special symbol hold memory display 18b, and the normal symbol hold memory display 41 is performed.

  FIG. 124 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a program for special symbol process (step S27) in the second embodiment. When the CPU 56 performs the special symbol process, the start port switch (the first start port switch 13a or the second start port) is used to detect that a game ball has won the start winning port provided in the game board 6. If the switch 14a) is turned on, that is, if a start winning that causes the game ball to win the start winning opening has occurred (step S311), a start opening switch passing process is executed (step S312). Then, any one of steps S300 to S307 is performed.

  The processes in steps S300 to S307 are as follows.

  Pre-opening of bonus item (step S303A): According to the value of the special symbol process flag, the game control microcomputer 560 executes a process for causing the start operation to be performed, and the internal state (specifically, the special symbol process) The value of the flag) is updated to a value corresponding to the process during opening of the accessory (step S303B).

  Processing during opening of an accessory (step S303B): In accordance with the value of the special symbol process flag, it is confirmed whether or not the specific area switch 66a is turned on and whether or not the accessory release time has elapsed. When the specific area switch 66a is turned on, the V winning flag is set. When the bonus release time has elapsed, the bonus is closed. Then, the value of the accessory release count counter is decremented by 1. If the value of the accessory release count counter is not 0, the accessory is released to perform the starting operation again. If the value of the bonus release counter is 0, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value corresponding to the bonus closing post-process (step S303C).

  Post-combination processing (step S303C): If the V winning flag is set according to the value of the special symbol process flag, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is changed to the pre-opening process for the big winning opening (step S304). Update to the corresponding value. If the V winning flag is not set, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal process (step S300).

  Pre-opening process for winning a prize opening (step S304): Control for opening the second winning prize opening (that is, the accessory 20) or the first winning prize opening (a large winning opening by the opening and closing plate 16) according to the value of the special symbol process flag. Do. More specifically, a counter (for example, a counter that counts the number of game balls that have entered the big prize opening) is initialized, and the big prize opening is opened. Also, the execution time of the process for opening the special prize opening is set by the timer, and the internal state (specifically, the value of the special symbol process flag) is updated to a value corresponding to the process for opening the special prize opening (step S305). To do. The pre-opening process for the big winning opening is executed for each round, but when the first round is started, the pre-opening process for the big winning opening is also a process for starting the big hit game.

  Processing for opening a special prize opening (step S305): A process for confirming the completion of the closing condition for the special prize opening is performed according to the value of the special symbol process flag. If the closing condition for the special prize opening is satisfied, the internal state (specifically, the value of the special symbol process flag) is updated to a value corresponding to the post-winner closing process (step S306).

  Process after closing the big prize opening (step S306): In accordance with the value of the special symbol process flag, a process for confirming that all the game balls are discharged from the big prize opening is performed. When all the game balls are discharged and there are still remaining rounds and the continuation condition of the big hit game (the V winning) has been established, the internal state (specifically, the special symbol process flag) Is updated to a value (7 in this example) corresponding to the pre-opening process for the special winning opening (step S304). When all rounds are completed or when the continuation condition for the big hit game is not satisfied, the internal state is updated to a value corresponding to the big hit end process (step S307).

  The special symbol normal process (step S300), the variation pattern setting process (step S301), the special symbol variation process (step S302), the special symbol stop process (step S303), and the big hit end process (step S307) These processes are the same as those described in the first embodiment.

  FIG. 125 is a flowchart showing the accessory release pre-processing (step S303A). In the pre-opening process, the CPU 56 sets 1 or 2 in the multi-function opening counter that indicates the number of times the variable winning ball apparatus 20 (playing object) is released in the starting operation (step S411), and sets the opening time of the playing object. A value corresponding to the opening time (for example, 0.9 seconds) is set in the accessory opening time timer shown (step S412). And the accessory 20 is made into an open state (step S413). Specifically, driving of the opening / closing motor 75 that drives the opening / closing doors 76A and 76B is started, and the accessory (variable winning ball apparatus) 20 is opened. In addition, the in-function game ball number counter that counts the game balls that have entered the inside of the game 20 is cleared (initialized to 0) (step S414), and the value of the special symbol process flag is changed to the processing during the game release ( The value is updated according to step S303B) (step S415).

  FIG. 126 is a flowchart showing the process during opening of an accessory (step S303B). In the process during opening of the accessory, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the accessory release time timer has timed out (step S420). If it has timed out, it is confirmed whether or not the value of the accessory release number counter is 0 (whether or not the last release in the starting operation state has already ended) (step S420A). If the value of the bonus release counter is 0, the process proceeds to step S434. If the value of the accessory release number counter is not 0, the value of the accessory release number counter is decremented by 1 (step S420B). Then, it is confirmed whether or not the value of the accessory release number counter has become 0 (step S420C). Then, it is confirmed whether or not the value of the accessory release number counter has become 0 (step S420C). When the value of the accessory release number counter becomes 0, that is, when the start operation end condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S434. When the value of the accessory release number counter is not 0, the CPU 56 performs control for releasing the accessory again. That is, a value corresponding to the opening time (for example, 0.9 seconds) is set in the accessory opening time timer (step S420D). Further, the accessory 20 is controlled to be in an open state (step S420E).

  In step S434, it is confirmed whether or not the value of the in-function game ball number counter is zero. If the value of the in-game game ball number counter is not 0, the process proceeds to step S424. When the value of the game ball number counter in the accessory becomes 0, the rotating body 86 is stopped at the initial position, and the movable portions 77A and 78A of the movable members 77 and 78 are moved to the initial positions (positions that do not block the game balls). ) (Step S434A).

  The initial position of the rotator 86 is the position of the rotator 86 when the position sensor 87a outputs a detection signal. That is, it is the position of the rotating body 86 when the hole 87c provided in the rotating body 86 comes to a position corresponding to the sensor installation position. Therefore, the CPU 56 actually stops the driving of the rotating body drive motor 87 when the position sensor 87a outputs a detection signal in step S434A. Further, by stopping the driving of the movable part drive solenoids 77B and 78B, the movable parts 77A and 78A are returned to the initial positions.

  Then, the CPU 56 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the post-function closing process (step S303C) (step S435).

  As described above, the CPU 56 determines that when the value of the in-game game ball number counter becomes 0 after the bonus release time (0.9 seconds) for the final release has elapsed, that is, for all games. When the ball is ejected from the accessory 20, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the processing after closing the accessory (steps SS 420, S 420 A, S 420 C, S 434, S 435). In other words, in the process of releasing an accessory, the game state (in this case, the value of the special symbol process flag) is changed on condition that all the game balls are discharged from the accessory 20. It should be noted that the special symbol process flag value is updated to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal process on condition that no V winning has occurred in the post-combination processing (see steps S454 and S469 in FIG. 129).

  If the accessory release time timer has not timed out, the value of the accessory release time timer is decremented by 1 (step S421). Then, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the accessory release time timer has timed out (step S422). If time-out has occurred, the accessory 20 is controlled to be closed (step S432). Specifically, the open / close motor 75 is rotated in a direction to close the open / close doors 76A and 76B.

  If the accessory release time timer has not timed out, the rotating body / movable part control is executed (step S423). Further, when the first prize winning switch 71a, the second prize winning switch 72a or the third prize winning switch 73a is turned on, that is, when a game ball winning the prize is detected (step S424), a game ball in the bonus The value of the number counter is incremented by 1 (step S425), and a control for transmitting a prize winning designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 is performed (step S426). When the accessory discharge switch 85a is turned on, that is, when a game ball discharged from the accessory is detected (step S427), the value of the in-function game ball number counter is decremented by 1 (step S428).

  When the specific area switch 66a indicating that the game ball has entered the specific winning opening 66 is turned on (step S429), the V winning flag is set (step S430) and a V winning designation command is transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 100. Control is performed (step S431).

  FIG. 127 is a flowchart showing the rotating body / movable unit control. In the rotator / movable part control, the CPU confirms whether or not the rotator 86 and the movable parts 77A and 78A are in operation (in operation of the rotator / movable part) (step S435). If not in operation, it is confirmed whether or not the accessory 20 has been released (step S436). When turned on, the drive of the rotator 86 is started (step S437). That is, the rotating body drive motor 87 is rotated. Further, the driving of the movable parts 77A and 78A is started (step S438). That is, the drive of the movable part drive solenoids 77B and 78B is started. When the processes of steps S437 and S438 are executed, the CPU 56 sets an internal flag indicating that the rotating body / movable part is operating. Also, whether or not the accessory 20 has been released is confirmed by setting a flag when executing the process of step S413 and checking whether or not the flag is set in the process of step S436.

  FIG. 128 is a timing chart showing an operation example of the rotating body 86 and the movable portions 77A and 78A when the accessory 20 is released once. As shown in FIG. 128, the rotating body 86 rotates at a constant speed for a time of 0.9 seconds + α. α is a period from when 0.9 seconds have elapsed from the start of opening of the accessory 20 to when all game balls that have entered the accessory 20 are discharged.

  Further, the movable part drive solenoid 77B for operating the movable part 77A is set to a position where it is driven until 0.4 seconds have elapsed from when the rotating body / movable part is in operation to prevent passage of the game ball. . Next, the driving is stopped for 0.2 seconds, and the position is set to allow passage of the game ball. Thereafter, the position is set again to block the passage of the game ball. Further, the movable portion 78A is set to a position where the movable ball 78A is driven until 0.1 seconds elapses from when the rotating body / movable portion is in operation to prevent the game ball from passing. Next, the driving is stopped for 0.7 seconds, and the position is set to allow the game ball to pass. Thereafter, the position is set again to block the passage of the game ball.

  Accordingly, when the rotary body / movable part is operating, the CPU 56 drives the movable part drive solenoid 77B for 0.2 seconds after 0.4 seconds have elapsed since the rotary body / movable part was operated. When 0.1 second elapses from when the rotating body / movable part is in operation, the drive of the movable part drive solenoid 78B is stopped for 0.7 seconds (step S439). Specifically, when the rotating body / movable portion is operating, the CPU 56 sets 0.4 second to the first timer that subtracts the value when the rotating body / movable portion is operating. Is set, and a value corresponding to 0.1 second is set in the second timer for subtracting the value. When the first timer times out, the drive of the movable part drive solenoid 77B is stopped and the value corresponding to 0.2 seconds is set in the first timer, and when the second timer times out, the drive of the movable part drive solenoid 78B is stopped. And a value corresponding to 0.7 seconds is set in the second timer. Thereafter, when the first timer times out, the driving of the movable portion driving solenoid 77B is resumed, and when the second timer times out, the driving of the movable portion driving solenoid 78B is resumed.

  FIG. 129 is a flowchart showing the post-close processing (step S303C). In the post-completion processing, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the V winning flag is set (step S454). If the V winning flag is set, the V winning flag is reset (step S455), and the number of times of opening (the number of rounds) that is the number of times that the big winning opening can be opened in the second big hit game is set in the opening number counter ( Step S456).

  Further, a value corresponding to the pre-round start time (time for notifying the start of a new round in the image display device 9, for example) is set in the pre-round start timer (step S457). Also, a big hit flag is set (step S458).

  Then, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a hit start designation command (fanfare command) to the production control microcomputer 100 (step S459), and the value of the special symbol process flag corresponds to the pre-opening process for the big prize opening (step S304). The updated value is updated (step S460).

  If it is confirmed in step S454 that the V winning flag is not set, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a small hitting end designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 (step S461), and the special symbol process. The value of the flag is updated to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal process (step S300) (step S462).

  FIG. 130 is a flowchart showing the pre-opening process for the special winning opening in the second embodiment (step S304). In the pre-opening process for the special winning opening, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit the display command for opening the special winning opening if it has not transmitted the display command for opening the special winning opening (steps S470 and S471). Also, the value of the timer before the round start is decremented by 1 (step S472). If the pre-round start timer times out (the value of the pre-round start timer is 0) (step S473), the winning number counter is initialized (step S474). That is, the value of the winning number counter is set to zero.

  Then, a value corresponding to the opening time (for example, 29 seconds) is set in the opening time timer (step S475). In addition, the special winning opening (act) is controlled to be open. Specifically, in the round in which the first grand prize opening (large prize opening by the opening / closing plate 16) is opened, the solenoid 21 is driven to open the opening / closing plate 16 (steps S476, S477). Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the special winning opening opening process (step S305) (step S478). Further, in the round in which the second grand prize winning opening (the accessory 20) is opened, the open / close motor 75 is driven to open the open doors 76A and 76B (steps S476 and S479). Further, the in-item game ball number counter for counting the game balls won in the item 20 is cleared (initialized to 0) (step S480), and the process proceeds to step S478.

  FIG. 131 is an explanatory diagram showing a round in which the first big winning opening is opened in the second big hit gaming state. As shown in FIG. 131, the CPU 56 determines the round in which the first big winning opening in the second big hit gaming state is opened corresponding to the special symbols that have already been stopped. If it is decided to win the first big hit (in this example, if the special symbol stop symbol is decided to be “3” or “7”), the first big prize will be won in all rounds. Mouth open. If the stop symbol of the special symbol is “8” or “9”, as shown in FIG. 131, in the second big hit game executed after the small hit game is finished, the first in all rounds. The big prize opening is opened.

  132 and 133 are flowcharts showing the special winning opening opening process (step S305) in the second embodiment. In the big prize opening opening process, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the first big prize opening is being opened (step S480). If the first big prize opening has been opened, the process proceeds to step S481B.

  When the first big prize opening is not opened (when the second big prize opening is opened), it is confirmed whether or not the opening time timer has timed out (step S481A). If the open time timer has timed out, the process proceeds to step S497. If the opening time timer has not timed out, it is confirmed whether or not the value of the winning number counter has reached 10 (step S482A). When the value of the winning number counter becomes 10, the opening time timer is cleared (step S482B) and the accessory 20 is controlled to be closed (step S482C). Specifically, the open / close motor 75 is rotated in a direction to close the open / close doors 76A and 76B. Then, control goes to a step S497. When the value of the winning number counter is not 10, the value of the opening time timer is decremented by 1 (step S483A). If the value of the opening time timer is 0, that is, if the opening time timer times out (step S484), the accessory 20 is controlled to be closed (step S495). Specifically, the open / close motor 75 is rotated in a direction to close the open / close doors 76A and 76B.

  If the opening time timer has not timed out, the CPU 56 executes the rotating body / movable part control (step S485). The rotating body / movable unit control is the same as the processing shown in FIG. However, here, the rotating body 86 is kept rotating at a constant speed until the second big prize opening is closed and the game ball is discharged from the accessory 20. For the movable parts 77A and 78A, the process of step S439 (see FIG. 127) is repeated every 0.9 seconds until the second big prize opening is closed.

  Further, when the bonus winning switch is turned on, that is, when a game ball won in the big prize opening (the bonus 20) is detected (step S486), the value of the in- bonus game ball counter is incremented by 1 (step S487), and the prize is won. The value of the number counter is incremented by 1 (step S488), and control is performed to transmit a prize winning designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 (step S489). Further, when the accessory discharge switch 85a is turned on, that is, when a game ball discharged from the big prize opening is detected (step S490), the value of the in-function game ball number counter is decremented by 1 (step S491). When the specific area switch 66a indicating that the game ball has won the specific winning opening 66 is turned on (step S492A), the V winning flag is set (step S493A), and the V winning designation command is sent to the effect control microcomputer 100. Is transmitted (step S494).

  In step S497, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the value of the in-function game ball number counter is zero. If the value of the in-game game ball number counter is not 0, the process proceeds to step S486. When the value of the in-game game ball number counter is 0, the rotating body 86 is stopped at the initial position, and the movable portions 77A and 78A of the movable members 77 and 78 are moved to the initial position (the game ball is not blocked). Position) (step S497A). Then, the process proceeds to step S499.

  In step S481B, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the open time timer has timed out. If the open time timer has timed out, the process proceeds to step S498. If the opening time timer has not timed out, it is confirmed whether or not the value of the winning counter is 10 (step S482B). When the value of the winning number counter becomes 10, the process proceeds to step S498. When the value of the winning number counter is not 10, the value of the opening time timer is decremented by 1 (step S483B). When the V winning switch 22 is turned on, the V winning flag is set (steps S492B and S493B). When the count switch 23 is turned on, that is, when a game ball won in the first grand prize opening is detected, the value of the winning number counter is incremented by 1 (steps S486B and S488B).

  In step S498, the CPU 56 performs a process for ending the round. Specifically, the drive of the solenoid 21 is stopped and the open / close plate 16 is closed. Then, control is performed to transmit a display command after opening the special winning opening to the production control microcomputer 100 (step S499), and the value of the special symbol process flag is set to a value corresponding to the post-processing after closing the special winning opening (step S306). Update (step S500).

  FIG. 134 is a flowchart showing the post-close closing process (step S306) in the second embodiment. In the process after closing the big prize opening, the CPU 56 decrements the value of the number-of-opening counter (step S513). If the value of the opening number counter is not 0, the process proceeds to step S515 (step S514). When the value of the number-of-releases counter is 0, that is, when all rounds in the jackpot game have ended, the time-shortage flag is set and a predetermined value (20 in this example) is set in the time-shortage counter. Set (steps S519 and S520). Also, the big hit flag is reset (step S521), and the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the big hit end process (step S307) (step S522).

  In this embodiment, when the big hit game is over, the state becomes a short time state (a state in which the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is shortened), but this state is the variation of the special symbol of the number indicated by the value set in the short time counter. Continue until is finished. In this embodiment, when the big hit game is finished, the state is always shifted to the short time state. However, for example, the short time state may be changed only when the first big hit game is finished.

  In step S515, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the V winning flag is set. If the V winning flag is not set, the CPU 56 proceeds to step S519 to end the big hit game. When the V winning flag is set, the V winning flag is reset (step S516), and the pre-round start time is notified to the pre-round start timer (eg, the image display device 9 notifies that a new round is started). A value corresponding to “time” is set (step S517), and the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the pre-opening process for the big winning opening (step S304) (step S518).

  In this embodiment, on the condition that the V winning flag is set, that is, the game ball has won (V winning) in the specific winning opening 66 (one of the winning areas), and the first big The game will move to the next round on the condition that the game ball has won a prize in the special area (the area in which the game ball is detected by the V prize switch 22) (the V prize has been won). It does not have to be a condition. In that case, it is possible to always advance to the final round, or to advance to a predetermined round regardless of whether or not a V prize is won.

  In this embodiment, when the accessory 20 is controlled to be in the closed state in the process of opening the bonus item or the process of opening the grand prize opening, the rotary body 86 is controlled to be driven to the initial position and then stopped (step S434A). , S497A). FIG. 135 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the opening and closing timing of the accessory 20 and the stop timing of the rotating body 86 after the accessory 20 is closed. As shown in FIG. 135, when the accessory 20 is closed and the discharge of the game balls in the accessory 20 is completed, specifically, when the value of the in-function game ball number counter becomes 0 (see steps S434 and S497). ), The CPU 56 starts driving the rotating body drive motor 87 to return the rotating body 86 to the initial position. When the rotating body reaches the initial position, specifically, when the position sensor 87a outputs a detection signal, the driving of the rotating body drive motor 87 is stopped. As shown in FIG. 135, in this embodiment, the time before the big winning opening is opened after the starting winning opening at the starting winning openings 13 and 14 is started until the opening of the accessory 20 is started. It is set to be longer than the rotating body origin return time from the start of the position return operation to the return to the initial position. For example, in this embodiment, the time before the special winning opening is opened is set to be at least longer than the time for which the rotating body drive motor 87 is driven for one cycle. By doing so, in this embodiment, after the accessory 20 is closed and the discharge of the game ball in the accessory 20 is completed, the initial position return operation of the rotating body 86 is in progress. It is possible to prevent a situation in which the opening control of the accessory 20 based on the start winning is started.

  In this embodiment, the case where the rotating body 86 is returned to the initial position when the value of the game ball number counter in the accessory becomes 0 after the accessory 20 is closed is shown. However, the accessory 20 is released. It may be controlled to release the accessory 20 after executing the process of returning the rotating body 86 to the initial position immediately before. Moreover, in this embodiment, the case where the rotating body 86 is returned to the initial position after the accessory 20 is closed in the processing during the opening of the accessory or the processing during the opening of the big prize opening is shown. However, the accessory is released after the accessory 20 is closed. In post-processing or post-processing after closing the big prize opening, control may be performed to return the rotator 86 to the initial position, and a wait may be made until the rotator 86 returns to the initial position. Further, in this embodiment, the time before the opening of the big winning opening is made longer than the rotator origin return time, so that the next start winning award is made despite the initial position return operation of the rotator 86. Although the case where the situation where the opening control of the accessory 20 based on the occurrence of the occurrence of the occurrence is prevented has been shown, for example, the variation time of the special symbol is sufficiently long (specifically, the return time to the rotator origin return time). Longer).

  In this embodiment, a characteristic configuration of the gaming machine as shown in the following (1) and (2) is shown.

  (1) A predetermined game can be performed using a game ball, and after a predetermined variable display execution condition is established (for example, the game ball has won a winning prize opening 13, 14) , Variable identification information (for example, special symbol) based on establishment of variable display start condition (for example, state that variable symbol special display is not performed and jackpot game is not performed) A variable display device (for example, special symbol display devices 8a and 8b) that starts display and displays and displays the display result, and a state that is either an open state in which game balls can be won or a closed state in which game balls cannot be won A variable winning ball apparatus (for example, a variable winning ball apparatus (object) 20) that is controllable to a special area (for example, a specific winning slot 66) among the winning areas provided in the variable winning ball apparatus. When the ball wins A game machine that shifts the variable winning ball apparatus to a specific game state (for example, the second big hit game state) that controls the open state for a predetermined number of times and that controls the progress of the game (for example, a game including a CPU 56) The game control means includes a display result determination means for determining the display result of the variable display device (for example, the game control microcomputer 560 is similar to steps S1513 and S1518 in the first embodiment). And the variable winning ball apparatus is in an open state once or a plurality of times (for example, twice) when the open display result (for example, small hit symbol) is derived and displayed on the variable display device. Starting operation control means for controlling the starting operation state (for example, in the game control microcomputer 560 in the second embodiment) And a plurality of types of open display results determined by the display result determining means (for example, 0 to 2, 4 to 6, 8, and 9; see FIG. 122). The number of times of opening of the variable winning ball device in the specific gaming state is varied according to the opening display result (see FIG. 122). According to such a configuration, a display relating to the player's advantage (disadvantage) is made before the game ball wins the special area, and whether or not the game ball wins the special area It can attract interest. In other words, it is possible to improve the interest of the game due to the movement of the game medium in the variable winning ball apparatus (function) in which the special area is formed.

  (2) The gaming machine has a specific variable winning device (for example, a first big prize opening by the opening / closing plate 16) that can be changed between an open state in which game balls can be won and a closed state in which game balls cannot be won. ), And when the specific display result (for example, 3 or 7, see FIG. 122) is derived and displayed on the variable display device, the game control means displays the specific variable winning device in a specific game state a predetermined number of times (for example, , 16 times), shifting to a state of controlling to an open state (execution of the process of step S477). According to such a structure, the variation of a game can be increased and the interest of a game can be improved more.

Embodiment 3 FIG.
In the gaming machine shown in the first embodiment, the display result of the variable symbol display of the special symbol (the first special symbol or the second special symbol) or the normal symbol can be hit with a probability of 100%. Good. Hereinafter, a description will be given of a third embodiment in which the display result of variable display is configured to be a hit with 100% probability.

  Note that in this embodiment, detailed description of the parts having the same configuration and processing as those of the first embodiment will be omitted, and parts different from those of the first embodiment will be mainly described. For example, in this embodiment, the CPU 56 performs the same processing as in the first embodiment, the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random value MR2-1 for determining the big hit type, and the disturbance for determining the reach. Using the numerical value MR2-2, the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type, and the random value MR4 for determining the variation pattern, a variation pattern for variation display of the special symbol is determined.

  Further, in this embodiment, the production control CPU 101 determines the stop symbol of the decorative symbol according to the same processing as in the first embodiment (see, for example, FIGS. 71, 72, and 73). A stop design of the decorative design is displayed on the image display device 9. In addition, the effect control CPU 101 instructs the drawing processor 109 to display a still image or a moving image on the image display device 9 according to the same processing as in the first embodiment. In this case, the drawing processor 109 extracts the image data from the CGROM 83 and transfers it to the VRAM 84 according to the instruction of the effect control CPU 101 according to the same processing as in the first embodiment, and further transfers it to the frame buffer to transfer the image data. An image is displayed on the display device 9.

  Further, in this embodiment, it is difficult to place nails densely around the first start winning opening 13 or to guide the game balls to the first starting winning opening 13 with the nail arrangement around the first start winning opening 13. Thus, in a normal game, it is difficult for the game ball to win the first start winning opening 13, and the second start winning opening 14 is won only when the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is open. A gaming machine shall be constructed. Then, the decorative design is changed in accordance with the change of the normal design, and when the normal design and the decorative design come into contact, the second start winning port 14 constituted by the variable winning ball device 15 is opened and the second start winning port is opened. It is assumed that the gaming machine is configured to open the special variable winning device 20 with a special symbol as a big hit when winning 14. In this case, the special variable winning ball apparatus 20 may be controlled to be opened only a small number of times (for example, two rounds). Further, in this embodiment, even if it is difficult to start winning, when the game ball wins the first start winning opening 13 or the second starting winning opening 14, special symbols are changed. Even when the special symbol is a big hit, the special variable winning device 20 is controlled to open in conjunction with the special symbol.

  In this embodiment, the special symbol jackpot type includes a probabilistic jackpot and a normal jackpot. In this embodiment, the jackpot is determined with a probability of 100 percent or with a very high probability. For example, when the jackpot is determined, it is determined that the probability jackpot with a probability of 95 percent and the jackpot game ends. Later, the gaming state is controlled to a certain change state. Also, it is determined that the normal big hit is made with a probability of 5%, and the gaming state is controlled to the normal state after the big hit game ends.

  Further, for example, when it is determined that a big hit, the game may always shift to a probable change state after the big hit game ends. And, for example, when starting to change special symbols, normal symbols, and decorative symbols, a lottery process for determining whether or not to end the probability variation state is performed. May be controlled to shift to the normal state.

  FIG. 136 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example of a special figure display result determination table according to the third embodiment. In this embodiment, in both the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the special display result determination table shown in FIG. 136 is used to determine whether or not the variable display result is a big hit. And As shown in FIG. 136, the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result is updated in the range of 0 to 65535. When the gaming state is the normal gaming state, as shown in FIG. 136 (A), when the read random number value MR1 for special figure display result determination is a value from 0 to 62257, it is determined as “big hit”. When the read random number value MR1 for determination of the special figure display result is a value of 62258 to 65535, it is determined as “out of”. That is, in the normal big hit determination table, a value of 0 to 62257 is set as the big hit determination value in the update range 0 to 65535 of the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result. Therefore, in this embodiment, the probability of being determined to be a big hit in the big hit determination in the normal gaming state (a special symbol winning probability) is about 95%. On the other hand, when the gaming state is a probable change state, as shown in FIG. 136 (B), when the read random number value MR1 for special figure display result determination is a value of 0 to 65535, it is determined as “big hit” . That is, in the probability change big hit determination table, the same value 0 to 65535 as the update range 0 to 65535 of the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result is set as the big hit determination value. Therefore, in this embodiment, the probability that the jackpot determination is determined to be a big hit in the probability variation state (the winning probability of the special symbol) is 100%.

  As described above, when the gaming state is the normal gaming state, it is a big hit with a high probability, and when the gaming state is the probability variation state, it is always a big hit (with a probability of 100%). Therefore, in the special symbol normal process, when the gaming state is the normal gaming state, the gaming control microcomputer 560 (specifically, the CPU 56) sets the random value MR1 in step S1513 in the first embodiment. It is confirmed whether or not the jackpot determination value matches, and when the random value MR1 matches the jackpot determination value (Y in step S1513 in the first embodiment), the jackpot flag is set (first embodiment) Step S1514 in the form). On the other hand, when the gaming state is a probable change state, the gaming control microcomputer 560 always determines that the random value MR1 matches the jackpot determination value in step S1513 in the first embodiment, and the jackpot flag is set. (Step S1514 in the first embodiment). When the gaming state is a probable change state, the effect control microcomputer 560 does not confirm whether or not the random number MR1 matches the jackpot determination value, and directly proceeds to step S1514 in the first embodiment. You may make it transfer and set a big hit flag.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 136, the special figure display result determination table includes only the big hit determination value and does not include the small hit determination value, so whether or not the random value MR1 matches the big hit determination value. Control is performed so as to determine whether or not it matches the small hit determination value (see steps S1518 and S1519 in the first embodiment). Therefore, in this embodiment, control is performed so as not to shift to the small hit gaming state. In addition, for example, the special figure display result determination table in the normal state shown in FIG. 136 (A) includes the small hit determination value in addition to the big hit determination value so as to shift to the small hit gaming state in addition to the big hit gaming state. You may control to. Also, for example, the special symbol display result determination table for the first special symbol is different from the special symbol display result determination table for the second special symbol, and the first special symbol is variable as in the first embodiment. Only in the case of display, in addition to the big hit, it may be made a small hit.

  Next, the normal symbol process (step S28) executed by the game control microcomputer 560 will be described. FIG. 137 is a flowchart illustrating an example of normal symbol process processing according to the third embodiment. In the normal symbol process, the game control microcomputer 560 (specifically, the CPU 56) detects that the game ball has passed through the gate 32 and the gate switch 32a is turned on (step S111). A switch passage process (steps S112 to S114) is executed.

  In the gate switch passage process, the game control microcomputer 560 checks whether or not the count value (gate passage storage number) of the gate passage storage counter has reached the maximum value (“4” in this example) (step S112). . If the maximum value has not been reached (N in step S112), the game control microcomputer 560 extracts the random number for variation pattern determination (ordinary symbol variation) and the random number for determination per ordinary symbol, which are software random numbers, A process of storing in a storage area (ordinary symbol determination buffer) corresponding to the value of the number of gate passages is performed (step S113). Then, the game control microcomputer 560 increments the count value of the gate passage storage counter by 1 (step S114). Note that the LED of the normal symbol storage memory display 41 is turned on according to the value of the gate passage storage counter.

  Thereafter, the game control microcomputer 560 executes one of the processes shown in steps S100 to S104 according to the value of the normal symbol process flag.

  Normal symbol normal processing (step S100): The game control microcomputer 560 is in a state where normal symbol variation can be started (for example, when the value of the normal symbol process flag is a value indicating step S100) The normal symbol display 10 does not display the variation of the normal symbol and is not in the open / close operation of the variable winning ball apparatus 15 based on the fact that the symbol is derived and displayed on the normal symbol display 10) In this case, the value of the gate passing memory number is confirmed. Specifically, the count value of the gate passing memory number counter is confirmed. If the gate passing memory number is not 0, it is determined whether or not to win (whether or not to stop the normal symbol as a winning symbol). Then, the value of the normal symbol process flag is updated to a value (specifically “1”) indicating the normal symbol variation pattern setting process (step S101).

  Normal symbol variation pattern setting process (step S301): A variation pattern of variable display of a regular symbol (effect mode during symbol variation: variation time is also specified by the variation pattern) at the occurrence of winning to the gate 32 It is selected from a plurality of types of variation patterns determined in advance according to the value of the extracted variation pattern determination random number (for normal symbol variation, one of display random numbers). Also, based on the determined variation pattern, after setting the variable display time (ordinary symbol variation time) until the normal symbol is variably displayed and derived and displayed in the normal symbol process timer, the normal symbol process timer is started. . Then, the value of the normal symbol process flag is updated to a value (specifically “2”) corresponding to the normal symbol variation process (step S102).

  Normal symbol variation processing (step S102): The game control microcomputer 560 checks whether or not the ordinary symbol process timer has timed out, and if it has timed out, stops the variation of the ordinary symbol on the ordinary symbol display 10. Further, an effect control command (decorative symbol stop designation command: also referred to as symbol confirmation designation command) for designating stop of variable display of the decorative symbols in the variable display device 9 is transmitted to the effect control board 80. Then, the normal symbol stop symbol display time is set in the normal symbol process timer, and the timer is started. Then, the value of the normal symbol process flag is updated to a value (specifically “3”) indicating the normal symbol stop process (step S103).

  Normal symbol stop processing (step S103): The game control microcomputer 560 checks whether or not the normal symbol process timer has timed out, and if it has timed out, checks whether or not the normal symbol stop symbol is a winning symbol. To do. If it is not a winning symbol (if it is a missing symbol), the value of the normal symbol process flag is updated to a value (specifically, “0”) indicating the normal symbol normal process (step S100). On the other hand, if the stop symbol of the normal symbol is a winning symbol, the normal electric accessory operating time is set in the normal symbol process timer, and the timer is started. In addition, it is confirmed whether or not the current gaming state is a high probability state (probability variation state), and if it is a high probability state, the opening pattern of the ordinary electric accessory (variable winning ball apparatus 15) in the high probability state If the low probability state (normal game state) is selected, the release pattern of the ordinary electric accessory (variable winning ball apparatus 15) in the low probability state is selected, and the selected release pattern is set. Then, the value of the normal symbol process flag is updated to a value (specifically “4”) indicating the normal electric accessory operation processing (step S104).

  Normal electric accessory act processing (step S104): The game control microcomputer 560 wins the game ball to the normal electric accessory (variable winning ball device 15) on condition that the normal symbol process timer has not timed out. The ordinary electric accessory winning count process for counting the number (the number of winnings to the second start winning opening 14) is executed, and the ordinary electric accessory is released with the set opening pattern (of the variable winning ball apparatus 15). (Open / close operation is executed) Normal electric accessory release pattern processing is executed. When the normal symbol process timer times out, the value of the normal symbol process flag is updated to a value (specifically, “0”) indicating the normal symbol normal process (step S100).

  FIG. 138 is a flowchart showing normal symbol normal processing (step S100) in the third embodiment. In the normal symbol normal process, the game control microcomputer 560 confirms whether or not the gate passing memory number is 0 by confirming the count value of the gate passing memory number counter (step S121). If the gate passing memory number is 0 (Y in step S121), the process is terminated as it is. If the gate passing memory number is not 0 (N in step S121), the game control microcomputer 560 determines the random number value for determination per normal symbol and the variation pattern stored in the storage area corresponding to the gate passing memory number = 1. The determination random number value is read and stored in the random number buffer area of the RAM 55 (step S122). Then, the game control microcomputer 560 decrements the value of the gate passing memory number counter by 1 and shifts the contents of each storage area (step S123). That is, the random number value for determination per normal symbol and the random number value for determining the variation pattern stored in the storage area corresponding to the gate passing memory number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) are represented by the gate passing memory number = n−. 1 is stored in the storage area corresponding to 1. Therefore, the order in which the random numbers for determining normal symbols and the random numbers for determining variation patterns stored in the respective storage areas corresponding to the respective numbers of stored passages of gates are always extracted as follows: , 3 and 4 in order.

  Next, the game control microcomputer 560 reads the normal symbol per-determination random number from the random number storage buffer (step S124), and determines whether to win or not based on the read random number value. Is executed (step S125).

  FIG. 139 is a flowchart illustrating the universal hit determination process according to the third embodiment. As shown in FIG. 139, in the normal game hit determination process, the gaming control microcomputer 560 first checks whether or not the current gaming state is a probability variation state (high probability state) (step S91). Note that whether or not the current gaming state is the probability variation state is confirmed by confirming whether or not the probability variation flag indicating that the gaming state is the probability variation state is set. In step S91, the game control microcomputer 560 may confirm whether or not the current game state is the time-short state by confirming whether or not the time-short flag is set. If it is not in the time saving state (that is, when it is in the normal gaming state), the process may move to step S92, and if it is in the time saving state, the process may move to step S95.

  When the gaming state is the normal gaming state (N in step S91), the gaming control microcomputer 560 selects a normal-time normal figure hit determination table used for the hit determination in the normal gaming state (step S92). The normal symbol per-determining random number value read in step S124 is compared with the hit determination value set in the normal-time normal symbol per-determination determination table, and if they match, it is determined to be a hit (step S93). On the other hand, when the game state is the probability change state (Y in step S91), the game control microcomputer 560 selects the probability change normal figure hit determination table used for the hit determination in the probability change state (step S95). Then, the random number value for normal symbol determination read in step S124 is compared with the hit determination value set in the probability change normal symbol determination table, and if they match, it is determined to be a hit (step S96).

  Here, as shown in FIG. 140, the random number value for determination per ordinary symbol is updated in the range of 0 to 149. When the gaming state is the normal gaming state, as shown in FIG. 140 (A), when the read random number for normal symbol determination is a value of 7, the winning is determined and read. When the random value for determination per normal symbol is a value from 0 to 6, 8 to 149, it is determined as “out of”. In other words, in the normal-time normal symbol determination table, only seven of the update ranges 0 to 149 of the normal symbol determination random number value are set as the hit determination values. Accordingly, in this embodiment, the probability of being determined to be a hit in the normal symbol determination (ordinary symbol winning probability) in the normal game state is 1/150. On the other hand, when the gaming state is a probable change state, as shown in FIG. 140 (B), when the read random number value for normal symbol determination is a value between 0 and 149, it is determined as “winning”. That is, in the probability variation normal symbol determination table, a value of 0 to 149 which is the same as the update range 0 to 149 of the normal symbol determination random number value is set as the hit determination value. Therefore, in this embodiment, the probability of being determined to be hit in the normal symbol determination (ordinary symbol winning probability) in the probability variation state is 100% (1/1).

  As described above, when the gaming state is the normal gaming state, it is a big hit with a low probability, and when the gaming state is the probability variation state, it is always a big hit (with a probability of 100%). Therefore, when the game state is the normal game state in the normal game hit determination process shown in FIG. 139, the game control microcomputer 560 checks whether or not “win” is determined in step S93 (step S94). ), When it is determined to be “winning” (Y in step S94), the normal winning flag is set (step S97). On the other hand, when the gaming state is in the probabilistic state, the gaming control microcomputer 560 is always determined as “winning” in step S96, so that it is not necessary to check whether it has been determined as “winning”. A winning flag is set (step S97).

  Returning to the description of FIG. 138, thereafter, the game control microcomputer 560 updates the value of the normal symbol process flag to a value (specifically “2”) indicating the normal symbol variation pattern setting process (step S102). (Step S126).

  FIG. 141 is a flowchart showing a normal symbol variation pattern setting process (step S102) in the normal symbol process. In the normal symbol variation pattern setting process, the game control microcomputer 560 first checks whether or not the universal symbol flag is set (step S131). When the normal hit flag is set (Y in step S131), the game control microcomputer 560 checks whether or not the current game state is a certain change state (step S132). Whether or not the gaming state is a probability variation state is confirmed by whether or not the probability variation flag is set. When the gaming state is not the probability variation state but the normal gaming state (N in step S132), it is determined to use the normal time variation pattern determination table used when winning in the normal gaming state (step S133). .

  In the variation pattern determination table for normal time, a variation pattern selected at the time of winning in the normal gaming state is set in advance, and a plurality of determination values are assigned to each variation pattern.

  On the other hand, when the gaming state is the probability variation state (Y in step S132), it is determined to use the probability variation time variation pattern determination table used when winning in the probability variation state (step S134).

  Only the variation pattern selected at the time of winning in the probability variation state is set in advance in the variation pattern determination table for probability variation time, and a determination value is assigned to this variation pattern.

  When the normal hit flag is not set (N in step S131), the game control microcomputer 560 decides to use the deviation variation pattern determination table to be used when the game is lost in the normal gaming state ( Step S135).

  In the deviation variation pattern determination table, variation patterns that are selected in the normal gaming state at the time of deviation are set in advance, and a plurality of determination values are assigned to each variation pattern.

  Then, the game control microcomputer 560 reads the variation pattern determination random number from the random number storage buffer, and based on the read variation pattern determination random number value, the variation pattern determination table determined in steps S133, S134, and S135. Using this, the fluctuation pattern of the normal symbol is determined (step S136).

  Next, the game control microcomputer 560 sets the normal symbol process time specified by the change pattern in the normal symbol process timer, and starts the normal symbol process timer (step S137). In addition, the game control microcomputer 560 sets the address of the variation command transmission table for transmitting the variation pattern command corresponding to the variation pattern determined in step S136 to the pointer (step S138), and executes the command setting process. (Step S139). As a result, control for transmitting a variation pattern command corresponding to the determined variation pattern to the production control microcomputer 100 is executed.

  Thereafter, the value of the normal symbol process flag is updated to a value (specifically “2”) corresponding to the normal symbol variation process (step S102) (step S140).

  In FIG. 141, the variation pattern command is transmitted in the processes of steps S138 and S139. However, the variation pattern command is transmitted in the effect symbol command control process (step S29). Also good. Specifically, the address of the variation command transmission table corresponding to the variation pattern determined in step S136 is stored in the decorative symbol command transmission pointer. Then, in the effect symbol command control process, based on the fact that the address of the variation command transmission table is stored in the decorative symbol command transmission pointer, control is performed to transmit a variation pattern command indicating the content of the determined variation pattern. In this embodiment, in the decorative symbol command control process, the display result command is transmitted continuously (after 2 ms) after the variation pattern command is transmitted.

  Further, in this embodiment, in the effect symbol command control processing, when the variation of the normal symbol starts (when the number of stored passages of the normal symbol becomes -1) and when the game ball passes the gate 32 (gate of the normal symbol) When the passing memory number becomes +1), a gate passing memory number designation command for designating the normal symbol gate passing memory number is also transmitted. The command for specifying the number of passages through the gate at the start of normal symbol variation is transmitted continuously (after 2 ms) after the display result command is transmitted.

  FIG. 142 is a flowchart showing the normal symbol variation process (step S102). In the normal symbol variation processing, the game control microcomputer 560 checks whether or not the value of the normal symbol process timer has reached 0, that is, whether or not the normal symbol process timer has expired (step S141). If the normal symbol process timer has not expired (N in step S141), the game control microcomputer 560 decrements the value of the normal symbol process timer by -1 (step S142).

  When the normal symbol process timer expires, that is, when the normal symbol change time has elapsed (Y in step S141), the game control microcomputer 560 stops the normal symbol change in the normal symbol display 10. (Step S143). Then, the game control microcomputer 560 sets the address of the decorative symbol stop designation command transmission table in the pointer (step S144), and executes the command setting process (step S145). As a result, control for transmitting a decorative symbol stop designation command is executed.

  Further, the game control microcomputer 560 sets the normal symbol stop symbol display time in the normal symbol process timer (step S146). Then, the game control microcomputer 560 updates the value of the normal symbol process flag to a value (specifically “3”) indicating the normal symbol stop process (step S103) (step S137).

  FIG. 143 is a flowchart showing the normal symbol stop process (step S103). In the normal symbol stop process, the game control microcomputer 560 checks whether the value of the normal symbol process timer has reached 0, that is, whether the normal symbol process timer has expired (step S151). If the normal symbol process timer has not expired (N in Step S151), the game control microcomputer 560 decrements the value of the normal symbol process timer by -1 (Step S152).

  When the normal symbol process timer expires, that is, when the normal symbol stop symbol display time has elapsed (Y in step S151), the game control microcomputer 560 checks whether or not the flag for normal symbol is set. (Step S153).

  When the normal symbol hit flag is set (Y in step S153), the game control microcomputer 560 sets the normal electric accessory operating time in the normal symbol process timer (step S154). The ordinary electric accessory operating time is the maximum time during which the ordinary electric accessory (variable winning ball device 15) can operate. It should be noted that the normal electric accessory operating time may be different depending on whether the gaming state is the normal gaming state or the probability variation state.

  Next, the game control microcomputer 560 confirms whether the game state is a high probability state (probability change state) or a low probability state (normal game state) by checking whether the probability change flag is set. (Step S155). In step S155, the game control microcomputer 560 may confirm whether or not the current game state is the time-short state by confirming whether or not the time-short flag is set. If the time is short, the process may proceed to step S156. If the time is not short (that is, in the normal gaming state), the process may proceed to step S157.

  When in the high probability state (Y in step S155), the game control microcomputer 560 is set in the high probability time table (table in the probability variation state) shown in FIG. An open pattern is selected (step S156). On the other hand, when it is in the low probability state (N in step S155), the game control microcomputer 560 uses the low probability table (table in the normal game state) shown in FIG. A set release pattern is selected (step S157). In the example shown in FIG. 144, in the low probability table, data of an opening pattern with an opening time of 2.0 seconds and an opening count of 3 is set. Further, in the high probability table, data of an opening pattern with an opening time of 2.5 seconds and an opening frequency of 2 is set. In the release pattern shown in FIG. 144, the number of times of opening is three or two, but the number of times of opening may be one and the opening may be continued until the total opening time elapses. Further, in the example shown in FIG. 144, the normal game state shows a case where the number of times of opening is larger than the probability change state, but for example, the probability change state (which may be a short time state) is the normal game state. The number of times of opening may be increased to be more advantageous.

  Then, the game control microcomputer 560 sets the release pattern selected in step S156 or S157 in the release pattern buffer (step S158). When the opening pattern is set in the opening pattern buffer, the opening pattern time (in this case, the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is set to the normal electric accessory opening pattern timer (the timer for measuring the opening time and closing time of the ordinary electric accessory). A process of setting a closing time until the first opening is performed is also performed. Thereafter, the value of the normal symbol process flag is updated to a value (specifically “4”) indicating the normal electric accessory operation processing (step S104) (step S159).

  When it is determined in step S153 that the normal symbol hit flag is not set (N in step S153), the game control microcomputer 560 indicates the normal symbol normal processing (step S100) with the value of the normal symbol process flag. It is updated to a value (specifically “0”) (step S160).

  FIG. 145 is a flowchart showing the ordinary electric accessory operating process (step S104). In the ordinary electric actor operation process, the game control microcomputer 560 checks whether or not the value of the normal symbol process timer has reached 0, that is, whether or not the normal symbol process timer has expired (step S161). If the normal symbol process timer has not expired (N in step S161), the game control microcomputer 560 decrements the value of the normal symbol process timer by -1 (step S162).

  Then, the game control microcomputer 560 loads the switch-on buffer into the register (step S163). The switch-on buffer is a buffer in which 1 is set in the corresponding bit of the switch when switch-on is detected, and 0 is set in the corresponding bit of the switch when the switch-off is detected.

  The game control microcomputer 560 checks whether 1 is set in the second start port switch input bit (corresponding bit of the second start port switch 14a) (step S164). That is, it is confirmed whether or not the second start opening switch 14a is turned on (whether or not a game ball has won the second start winning opening 14). If 1 is not set in the second start port switch input bit (N in Step S164), the process proceeds to Step S170. If 1 is set in the second start port switch input bit (Y in step S164), the second start port switch 14a is turned on, so that the game control microcomputer 560 is a normal electric accessory (variable). The number of the number of game balls won in the winning ball apparatus 15) is incremented by 1 (step S165). Then, the game control microcomputer 560 checks whether or not the value of the ordinary electric winning prize counter is less than 8 (step S166). If the value of the ordinary electric winning prize counter is less than 8 (Y in step S166), the process proceeds to step S170.

  If the value of the ordinary electric winning prize counter is not less than 8 (N in step S166), that is, if it is 8 or more, the game control microcomputer 560 clears (sets to 0) the value of the normal symbol process timer. (Step S167). By this process, it is determined that the normal symbol process timer has timed out thereafter (see Y in step S161). As described above, in this embodiment, when eight or more game balls win the variable winning ball device 15 within the normal electric accessory operating time, the opening control of the variable winning ball device 15 (steps S170 to S174). Not to run.

  Then, when the ordinary electric accessory (variable winning ball apparatus 15) is open, the game control microcomputer 560 drives the solenoid 16 to close the ordinary electric accessory (step S168). Further, the game control microcomputer 560 starts a normal process transition time timer (step S169). The normal process transition time timer is a timer for measuring the time difference (time lag) from when the normal symbol process timer times out (Y in step S161) until the normal symbol process is shifted to normal symbol process (step S178). Then, the process ends. Thereafter, when the game control microcomputer 560 determines that the special symbol process timer has timed out (Y in step S161), the normal process transition time timer is decremented by -1 (step S176), and the normal process transition time timer has timed out. Whether or not is confirmed (step S177). If the normal processing transition time timer times out (Y in step S177), the ordinary symbol flag is reset (step S178), and the value of the normal symbol process flag is set to a value indicating the normal symbol normal processing (step S100) (specifically, Is updated to "0") (step S179). By the processing in steps S169, S176, and S177, the normal symbol process timer is shifted to the normal symbol normal processing after a predetermined time has elapsed since the normal symbol process timer timed out. The “predetermined time” is, for example, about 3 seconds. By executing such processing, when the process is determined to be an error when the winning is made at a timing other than the time when the process is not open, the normal symbol normal processing is started after an appropriate interval time has elapsed. be able to. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a situation where it is determined that the second start winning port 14 is abnormally won even though the second starting winning port 14 formed by the variable winning ball device 15 is normally started. .

  In step S170, the game control microcomputer 560 decrements the value of the ordinary electric accessory release pattern timer by -1 (step S170). Then, the game control microcomputer 560 checks whether or not the value of the ordinary electric accessory release pattern timer is 0, that is, whether or not the ordinary electric accessory release pattern timer has expired (step S171). If it has not timed out (N in step S171), the process is terminated as it is. If time-out has occurred (Y in step S171), the game control microcomputer 560 determines whether or not the release pattern has ended (step S172). If the release pattern has not ended (N in step S172), the release pattern time is set in the ordinary electric accessory release pattern timer (step S173). Then, the game control microcomputer 560 drives the solenoid 16 to open or close the ordinary electric accessory (variable winning ball apparatus 15) (step S174).

  Specifically, when the normal electric accessory release pattern timer expires when the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is in the closed state, the release time is set as the open pattern time in the normal electric accessory release pattern timer, and the output port buffer ( The variable winning ball apparatus 15 is opened by inverting the solenoid output bit of the ordinary electric accessory of the solenoid buffer. If the normal electric accessory release pattern timer expires when the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is in the open state, the closing time is set as the open pattern time in the normal electric accessory release pattern timer, and the normal output port buffer (solenoid buffer) The variable winning ball apparatus 15 is closed by reversing the electric accessory solenoid output bit.

  Through the processes in steps S170 to S174 described above, an open pattern in the low probability state (normal game state) and an open pattern in the high probability state (probability change state) are realized. When the gaming state is in a low probability state, the release time is 2.0 seconds and the number of times of opening is 3, so that, for example, 1.0 seconds after the normal electric accessory activation process is started When the closing time elapses, the variable winning ball device 15 is opened and opened, and when the opening time of 2.0 seconds elapses thereafter, the variable winning ball device 15 is closed and closed, and 1.0 again. When the second closing time elapses, the variable winning ball device 15 is opened and opened. When the opening time of 2.0 seconds elapses thereafter, the variable winning ball device 15 is closed and closed. When the closing time of 0.0 second elapses, the variable winning ball device 15 is opened and opened, and when the opening time of 2.0 seconds elapses thereafter, the variable winning ball device 15 is closed and closed. . Further, when the gaming state is in a high probability state, the release time is 2.5 seconds and the number of times of opening is two. When the second closing time elapses, the variable winning ball device 15 is opened and opened, and when the opening time of 2.5 seconds elapses thereafter, the variable winning ball device 15 is closed and closed. When the closing time of 0.0 seconds elapses, the variable winning ball device 15 is opened and opened, and when the opening time of 2.5 seconds elapses, the variable winning ball device 15 is closed and closed.

  When the above open pattern is completed (Y in step S172), the game control microcomputer 560 starts a normal process transition time timer (step S175) and ends the process. Thereafter, when the game control microcomputer 560 determines that the special symbol process timer has timed out (Y in step S161), the normal process transition time timer is decremented by -1 (step S176), and the normal process transition time timer has timed out. Whether or not is confirmed (step S177). If the normal processing transition time timer times out (Y in step S177), the ordinary symbol flag is reset (step S178), and the value of the normal symbol process flag is set to a value indicating the normal symbol normal processing (step S100) (specifically, Is updated to "0") (step S179). By the processing of steps S175, S176, and S177, the normal symbol process timer is shifted to normal symbol normal processing after a predetermined time has elapsed since the normal symbol process timer timed out.

  In this embodiment, in a normal game, it is difficult for a game ball to win the first start winning opening 13 and the second starting winning opening 14, and the decoration pattern is changed in accordance with the change of the normal pattern. A special gaming machine has been described that is configured to open a special variable winning device 20 by winning a special symbol as a big hit in conjunction with a normal symbol and a decorative symbol. On the other hand, in a normal game, a game ball is won at the first start winning port 13 and the second start winning port 14, and when a normal symbol is hit, it becomes easier for the game ball to win the second start winning port 14, In a general gaming machine that is configured to open the special variable winning device 20 when the special symbol and the decorative symbol are a big hit, the display result of the variable display is 100%. It may be configured to win with probability. Hereinafter, a modification in the case where the display result of variable display becomes a hit with 100% probability in a general gaming machine will be described with reference to FIGS. 146 to 148. In this embodiment, the first start winning opening 13 is extremely difficult to win, and it is rare that a game ball wins the first starting winning opening 13, but FIGS. In the modification shown, it may be possible to make it easier to win the first start winning opening 13.

  FIG. 146 is a flowchart showing a modification of the normal symbol process in the third embodiment. In the third embodiment, a plurality of types of normal symbol variation patterns are provided and the normal symbol variation pattern is selected in the normal symbol variation pattern setting process. However, the modifications shown in FIGS. 146 to 148 are possible. However, only one type of variation pattern of normal symbols is provided for each gaming state (a variation pattern (variation time) in the normal gaming state and a variation pattern (variation time) in the probability variation state). Accordingly, since there is no need to select a normal symbol variation pattern, the normal symbol variation pattern setting process (step S101) is omitted in FIG. In step S113, the random number value for determination per normal symbol and the random value for variation pattern determination are extracted as software random numbers based on the winning of the game ball to the gate 32. Since the numerical value is used to select the variation pattern of the special symbol, in this modified example, the random value for variation pattern determination is extracted based on the occurrence of the start winning (steps S313, S317), and in step S113, the normal symbol per symbol is extracted. Only the random number for determination is extracted. Other configurations are the same as those in FIG. 137, and thus the description thereof is omitted.

  FIG. 147 is a flowchart illustrating a variation of the universal hit determination process in the third embodiment. In the third embodiment, when the gaming state is the normal gaming state, the winning probability of the normal symbol is 1/150, and when the gaming state is the probability changing state, the winning probability of the normal symbol is 1/1 (100%). However, in the modified examples shown in FIGS. 146 to 148, the winning probability of the normal symbol is always set to 1/1 (100%) regardless of whether the gaming state is the normal gaming state or the probability variation state. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 148, in the universal symbol determination table in this modification, the same value 0 to 149 as the update range 0 to 149 of the normal symbol random number value is set as the hit determination value. ing. Therefore, in this modification, the probability of being determined to be hit in the normal hit determination is always 100% (1/1). Therefore, as shown in FIG. 147, the game control microcomputer 560 compares the random number value for determination per ordinary symbol with the hit determination value set in the per-unit determination table, and if they match, it is determined to be a hit. Although it is determined (step S98A), since it is per 100%, it is determined whether or not it is a hit, and the flag for normal figure is set (step S98B). In addition, after determining whether or not it is a win, a normal hit flag may be set. Alternatively, the normal symbol hit flag may be set as it is without performing the comparison process itself between the normal symbol random number for symbol determination and the hit determination value set in the normal symbol determination table.

  As described above, in the modified examples shown in FIGS. 146 to 148, the game control microcomputer 560 uses the random number value (normal random number value for determination per symbol) extracted when the gate passage occurs and the preset determination. The values are compared, and based on the fact that they are matched, it is determined that the winning (ordinary symbol winning) is made (steps S113, S124, S125), and control for opening the variable winning device (variable winning ball device 15) is executed. However (step S104), regardless of what the random number value is, the variable prize apparatus is released assuming that the random number value matches the determination value (that is, with a 100% probability of winning). Since it is configured to execute control, the processing itself corresponding to the case where the extracted random number value does not match the preset judgment value (when it is off) becomes unnecessary. It is possible to achieve a reduction in program capacity reduction and processing burden. For example, since the normal symbol is per 100%, it suffices to automatically set the flag for the normal symbol, and it is not necessary to check whether the symbol is determined to be a hit and to set the flag for the normal symbol. As a result, it is possible to reduce the program capacity and the processing load.

  Note that the special symbol jackpot determination may be performed according to the same processing as in FIGS. 146 to 148. In other words, regardless of the value of the random value for jackpot determination (for example, the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result), the random value is assumed to match the determination value (ie, 100% probability) It may be determined that the game is a big hit) and the game state may be shifted to the big hit gaming state. By doing so, it is possible to reduce the program capacity for jackpot determination of special symbols in the same manner, and the processing burden can be reduced.

  In the modified example shown in FIGS. 146 to 148, a random number value for normal symbol determination is extracted based on the winning of the game ball to the gate 32 (step S113), and the extracted random number value is compared with the hit determination value. Whether or not to win is determined, but since the winning probability of the normal symbol is 100%, it is not necessary to perform the hit determination using the random value for determining the normal symbol. Therefore, the winning symbol may be automatically set based on the winning of the game ball to the gate 32, and the winning determination may not be performed using the random number value for determining the normal symbol. In the following, a modification example in which the flag for the normal symbol is automatically set based on the winning of the game ball to the gate 32 and the hit determination is not performed using the random value for the normal symbol determination is used. This will be described with reference to FIGS.

  FIG. 149 is a flowchart showing another modification of the normal symbol process in the third embodiment. In the modified examples shown in FIGS. 146 to 148, the random number value for determination per ordinary symbol is extracted as the software random number value based on the passage of the game ball through the gate (step S113), but shown in FIGS. 149 and 150. In the modification, since the normal random number for determination per symbol is not provided, the processing for extracting the software random number value is not provided. On the other hand, the designated value per common symbol is stored in the storage area (ordinary symbol determination buffer) corresponding to the value of the gate passing memory number based on the gate passage of the game ball (step S113A). Here, the specified value per hit is data indicating that the normal symbol is automatically hit based on the passage of the game ball through the gate. Based on the fact that the designated value per ordinary figure is stored, as shown later, the ordinary symbol normal process sets a usual figure winning flag (see step S124A). Other configurations are the same as those in FIG. 146, and thus the description thereof is omitted.

  FIG. 150 is a flowchart showing another modification of the normal symbol normal process in the third embodiment. In the normal symbol normal process in this modification, if the gate passing memory number is not 0 (N in step S121), the game control microcomputer 560 is stored in the storage area corresponding to the gate passing memory number = 1. The designated value per normal symbol is read (step S122A), the value of the gate passing memory number counter is decremented by 1, and the contents of each storage area are shifted (step S123A). In addition, you may make it transfer to step S123A as it is, without performing the process of step S122A. Then, the game control microcomputer 560 sets a flag for the usual figure based on the read designated value for the usual figure (step S124A). As described above, since the normal symbol hit determination is not performed in the third embodiment, the process of steps S122A to S124A is executed instead of the process of steps S122 to S125 shown in FIG. 138 in FIG. . In this modification, the normal symbol variation pattern setting process is omitted as in the variations shown in FIGS. 146 to 148. Therefore, the normal symbol variation time is set in the ordinary symbol process timer, and the ordinary symbol process timer is set. While starting (step S127), the process which starts the fluctuation | variation of a normal symbol is performed (step S128). Further, the value of the normal symbol process flag is updated to a value indicating the normal symbol variation process (step S102), and the normal symbol variation process is shifted to (step S126A).

  As described above, in the modified examples shown in FIGS. 149 and 150, the game control microcomputer 560 does not extract a random number value (normal random number value for determining per symbol) when a gate passage occurs. The specified value is stored in the storage area according to the number of stored gates, and the flag for each figure is set based on the stored value for each figure. Since the control for opening the winning device (variable winning ball device 15) is executed, the random number itself becomes unnecessary. As a result, the processing required when the hit determination is performed using the random number (for example, random number Update processing, routine determination processing, etc.) and data for executing such processing (for example, a determination table, a counter, etc.) are also unnecessary, thereby reducing the program capacity and processing load. Door can be. In the modification shown in FIGS. 149 and 150, when a gate passage occurs, the designated value per map is stored in a storage area corresponding to the number of stored gate passes, and the designated value per map is stored. Originally, the flag per flag was set. However, when a gate pass occurs, the specified value per map is stored in a storage area according to the number of stored gate passes, and the specified value per map is stored in the save area. Control for opening the variable winning device (variable winning ball device 15) may be executed based on the stored information. In this case, it is not necessary to set the flag for the common map. However, the content of the storage area is not shifted in step S123A, but the content of the storage area is shifted when the process moves to the normal electric accessory operation process. Alternatively, a change area for the current change is provided separately from the save area, the top data of the save area is moved to the change area at the start of the change, and the data in the other save areas are shifted one by one. To do.

  In the modified example shown in FIGS. 149 and 150, the base symbol per flag is automatically set based on the winning of the game ball to the gate 32, and the hit determination is performed using the random number for normal symbol determination. Although it was not performed, the big hit flag is automatically set based on the winning of the game ball to the start winning holes 13 and 14, and the big hit determination is performed using the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result. It may not be performed. Specifically, in the special symbol process, the first start-up switch 13a is turned on (Y in step S211 in the first embodiment), and it is determined that the number of reserved memories is not 4 (first implementation) N) of step S212 in the above form, the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result is not extracted in step S215 in the first embodiment, and the big hit designated value is stored in the storage area corresponding to the number of reserved storage. Also, when the second start port switch 14a is turned on (Y in step S221 in the first embodiment) and it is determined that the number of reserved storage is not 4 (N in step S222 in the first embodiment). In step S225 in the first embodiment, the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result is not extracted, but the jackpot designated value is stored in the storage area corresponding to the reserved storage number. In the special symbol normal process in the special symbol process, if the total reserved memory number is not 0 (N in step S1501 in the first embodiment), the number is stored in the storage area corresponding to the reserved memory number = 1. The jackpot specified value is read, the value of the pending storage counter is decremented by 1, and the contents of each storage area are shifted. Then, the big hit flag is set based on the read big hit designated value. Further, in the special symbol normal process, the process related to the big hit determination (the processes in steps S1512 and S1513 in the first embodiment) is omitted. According to such a configuration, the random value MR1 itself for determining the special figure display result is not required, and as a result, processing necessary for performing the jackpot determination using random numbers (for example, random number update processing, jackpot determination processing, etc.) ) And data for executing these processes (for example, special figure display result determination table, counter, etc.) are also unnecessary, and the program capacity can be reduced and the processing load can be reduced.

  Further, only when the gaming state is in the probable change state, the processing for automatically setting the flag for the normal game may be executed based on the winning of the game ball to the gate 32. That is, a random number for normal symbol determination is extracted based on the passage of the gate and stored in the storage area (step S113). When the number of stored gate passages is not 0 in the normal symbol normal processing (N in step S121), the probability change It is determined whether or not the vehicle is in the state, and only in the probability variation state, the processing for shifting to the normal electric accessory operation processing by setting the flag for normal drawing is performed without performing the hit determination (step S159 is Y in step S153). In the normal gaming state, a hit determination is made based on a random number for normal symbol determination (steps S122 to S125), and a hit flag is set when the hit determination is made. (Refer to step S97), and a process of shifting to the normal electric accessory actuating process is executed based on the fact that the normal hit flag is set (step S). 53 of Y, executes the processing of step S159) may be. Further, only when the gaming state is in the probability changing state, the process of automatically setting the big hit flag based on the winning of the game ball to the start winning opening 13, 14 may be executed. That is, the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result is extracted based on the start winning and is stored in the storage area (steps S215 and S225 in the first embodiment), and the total number of reserved memories in the special symbol normal process When the value is not 0 (N in step S1501 in the first embodiment), it is determined whether or not the probability change state, and only in the case of the probability change state, the big hit flag is set without performing the big hit determination and the game shifts to the big hit game. In the normal game state, the big hit determination is performed based on the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result (steps S1512 and S1513 in the first embodiment), and the big hit is determined as the big hit. The big hit flag is set at the time of winning, and based on the fact that the big hit flag has been set, the game shifts to a big hit game (pre-opening process for the big prize opening). Process is executed (at Y in step S1513 in the first embodiment, executes the processing of step S1514) may be.

  In the modified examples shown in FIGS. 149 and 150, the flag for the normal map is set based on the fact that the specified value for the normal map is stored in the storage area corresponding to the number of gate passages (step S124A). Based on the fact that the specified value per map is not stored in the storage area corresponding to the number of stored gate passages (without executing steps S113A and S122A), the value of the stored number of gate passages is not 0 (in step S121). N) It is also possible to automatically set a flag for a normal map.

  In the modification shown in FIGS. 149 and 150, when a gate passage occurs, a designated value per normal map is stored in a storage area corresponding to the number of stored gate passes, and the normal value is determined based on the stored designated value per common map. Although the control for opening the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is executed based on the setting of the hitting flag, the winning symbol is set, but the normal symbol change is not set. When the normal symbol is stopped after ending, control for automatically opening the variable winning ball apparatus 15 may be executed. Hereinafter, a modification example in which the control for automatically opening the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is executed when the variation of the normal symbol ends and the normal symbol stops will be described with reference to FIG.

  In the modified example shown in FIG. 151, since the flag for the normal figure is not set, in the normal symbol process, the process for storing the designated value for the normal figure is not performed in the storage area corresponding to the number of stored gates. That is, the process of step S113A in FIG. 149 is omitted. Further, in the normal symbol normal process, the process of reading the designated value per universal symbol stored in the storage area and the process of setting the universal symbol flag are not performed. That is, the processing in steps S122A and S124A in FIG. 150 is omitted.

  FIG. 151 is a flowchart illustrating yet another modification of the normal symbol stop process according to the third embodiment. As shown in FIG. 151, in this modification, when the variation time of the normal symbol has elapsed, that is, when the normal symbol process timer has timed out (Y in step S151), whether or not the flag per common symbol is set. Without confirming the process, the process of setting the normal electric accessory operating time in the normal symbol process timer (step S154) and the process of setting the release pattern of the normal electric accessory (variable winning ball apparatus 15) (steps S155 to S158) ) Is executed to shift to the ordinary electric accessory operation process (step S159). That is, steps S153 and S160 in FIG. 143 are omitted.

  152 is an explanatory diagram showing a difference in processing between the modification example shown in FIGS. 149 and 150 and the modification example shown in FIG. 151. As shown in FIG. 152, in the modification shown in FIGS. 149 and 150, based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the gate 32 (Y in step S111), if the number of stored gate passages is not four (step S112) N), the designated value per ordinary map is stored in the storage area corresponding to the number of stored gate passages (step S113A), and the value of the gate passage storage number counter is incremented by one (step S114). Then, in the normal symbol normal process, when the number of stored gate passages is not 0, the flag for the normal symbol is set based on the specified value for the normal symbol stored in the storage area (step S124A). Then, in the normal symbol stop process (FIG. 143), it is confirmed whether or not the normal symbol hit flag is set (step S152). If it is set, the routine proceeds to the normal electric accessory operation process (step S159). The opening control of the ordinary electric accessory (variable winning ball device 15) is executed. On the other hand, in the modification shown in FIG. 151, based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the gate 32 (Y in step S111), if the number of stored gate passes is not 4 (N in step S112), the gate passes. Only the process of incrementing the value of the storage number counter by 1 (step S114) is executed. Then, in the normal symbol stop process (FIG. 151), without confirming whether or not the common symbol flag is set, the process shifts to the normal electric accessory operation process (step S159), and the normal electric accessory (variable prize winning) The opening control of the ball device 15) is executed.

  As described above, the modification shown in FIG. 151 is configured to execute control for opening the variable winning device (variable winning ball device 15) based on the fact that the stop symbol of the normal symbol is derived and displayed. Therefore, as in the case of the modified examples shown in FIGS. 149 and 150, the random number itself is not necessary. As a result, the processing necessary for determining the big hit using the random number (for example, the random number update processing, the universal hit determination) Processing) and data for executing those processing (for example, a determination table, a counter, etc.) are also unnecessary, and the program capacity can be reduced and the processing load can be reduced. In addition, since the usual hit flag is not set, it is not necessary to check whether or not the usual hit flag is set, thereby further reducing the program capacity and the processing load.

  In the modification shown in FIG. 151, the opening / closing operation (ordinary electric accessory operation process) of the variable winning ball device 15 is automatically executed based on the winning of the game ball to the gate 32. The special variable winning device 20 may be opened and closed by automatically shifting to the big hit game based on the winning of the game ball at the winning openings 13 and 14. Specifically, in the special symbol process, the process of storing the jackpot designated value in the storage area corresponding to the reserved storage number is not performed. Further, in the special symbol normal process, the process of reading the jackpot designated value stored in the storage area and the process of setting the jackpot flag are not performed. Also, the process for confirming the big hit flag (steps S1508, S1514, S321, S1303 in the first embodiment) is not performed, and the process is always shifted to the pre-opening process for the big prize opening. According to such a configuration, the random number MR1 itself for determining the special figure display result is not required, and as a result, processing necessary when performing a jackpot determination using a random number (for example, a random number update process, a jackpot determination process, etc.) ) And data for executing these processes (for example, special figure display result determination table, counter, etc.) are also unnecessary, and the program capacity can be reduced and the processing load can be reduced. Further, since the big hit flag is not set, it is not necessary to check whether the big hit flag is set, and the program capacity and the processing load can be further reduced.

  Also, only when the gaming state is in the probable state, the variable winning ball apparatus 15 may be automatically opened / closed (ordinary electric accessory actuating process) based on the passing of the game ball to the gate 32. . In other words, only in the state of probability change, the process of shifting to the normal electric accessory operation processing is executed based on the stoppage of the normal symbol fluctuation without checking the hit judgment or the normal symbol hit flag (the fluctuation of the normal symbol is stopped). (Yes in step S151), it is determined whether or not the probability change state, and in the case of the probability change state, the process of step S159 is executed. Executes the process to shift to the normal electric accessory operation process on the condition that it has been confirmed (for example, extract a random number for normal symbol per symbol based on the passage of the gate, and perform a per-normal symbol determination based on the extracted random value When it is determined that the game is successful, the normal symbol hit flag is set. When the variation of the normal symbol is stopped (Y in step S151), it is determined whether or not it is in the probability variation state. Hiroshizu per flag to confirm whether the set, Hiroshizu per flag executes step S159 if set) it may be. Further, only when the game state is in the probable change state, the special variable winning device 20 is opened / closed automatically by shifting to the big hit game based on the passing of the game ball to the start winning opening 13,14. Good. That is, only in the probable change state, the process of shifting to the big hit game based on the stoppage of the special symbol variation without executing the big hit judgment or the big hit flag check is executed (when the special symbol change stops, The process after step S1304 in the first embodiment is executed when in the probability variation state), and in the normal gaming state, on condition that it is confirmed that the big hit flag is set A process for shifting to a big hit game (pre-opening process for the big prize opening) is executed (for example, the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result is extracted based on the occurrence of the start winning prize, and the big hit is determined based on the extracted random number value. When the big hit flag is determined, the big hit flag is set. When the special symbol change stops, it is determined whether the probability change state or not. Flag to check whether it is set, executes step S1304 and subsequent processing in the first embodiment if the jackpot flag is set) may be.

  In this embodiment, characteristic configurations of gaming machines as shown in the following (1) to (3) are shown.

  (1) A predetermined game can be played using a game ball, and a game is played in a start area provided in the game area (for example, the first start winning opening 13, the second starting winning opening 14, or the gate 32). When a predetermined condition based on the detection of a ball is satisfied (for example, that the special symbol is not changing and not being a big hit, or that the normal symbol is not changing and the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is not being opened or closed) A game machine that is controlled to a state advantageous to the player (for example, a big hit game state based on a special symbol jackpot or an operating state of the variable winning ball device 15 based on a normal symbol hit), and the game ball does not win A variable winning device (for example, a special variable winning device 20 or a variable winning ball device 15) that can be changed between a closed state and an open state in which a game ball is easy to win, and a random number (for example, a special figure) First Embodiment In numerical value updating means (for example, random number update processing by the random number circuit 503 or game control microcomputer 560) for updating the numerical value of the random number value MR1 for display result determination or the random number for normal symbol determination) And a numerical value extraction means for extracting a numerical value of a random number when a game ball is detected in the starting area (for example, in the game control microcomputer 560 in the first embodiment). A part that executes the same processing as steps S215 and S225 in FIG. 3. A part that executes step S113 in the third embodiment) and a plurality of types of identification information that can identify each (for example, special symbols or ordinary symbols) Variable display device capable of executing variable display (for example, special symbol indicators 8a and 8b, or ordinary A variable display control means (for example, a game control micro) for starting the variable display of the identification information and deriving and displaying the display result on the variable display device based on the pattern display 10) and the game ball detected in the starting area In the computer 560, a part that executes the same processing as steps S27 and S35 in the first embodiment, or a part that executes the same processing as steps S28 and S36), and the numerical value of the random number extracted by the numerical value extraction means Is based on the fact that it indicates a predetermined value (for example, a big hit determination value set in the special figure display result determination table or a hit determination value set in the normal figure determination table) ( For example, the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result is identical to the jackpot determination value by the same processing as in step S1513 in the first embodiment. The result of display on the variable display device is determined based on the fact that it has been determined that it has been determined, or that it has been determined in steps S93 and S96 in the third embodiment that the random number value for normal symbol per match matches the hit determination value). Is displayed in an open state (for example, a big hit gaming state in which the special variable winning device 20 is repeatedly opened and closed, or a variable winning game in which the variable winning ball device 15 is opened and closed) as an advantageous state for the player after The opening / closing control means (for example, the game control microcomputer 560) that can be controlled to the operation state of the ball device 15 executes the same processing as step S1514 in the first embodiment, and the same processing as step S1303 is performed. A part that executes the same processing as steps S304 to S307 based on the determination, or the third embodiment The process of step S97 is executed, and step S104 is executed based on Y of step S153), and the open / close control means determines whether the random number value is irrespective of the random number value extracted by the numerical value extraction means. Special opening control means for executing a special opening control for controlling the variable prize-winning device to an open state as an indication of a predetermined value (for example, in the game control microcomputer 560, the jackpot determination value set in the jackpot determination table) Is set to all the values in the update range of the jackpot determination random number, the winning probability of the special symbol is set to 100%, and the extracted jackpot determination random number value is whatever the value of the jackpot The hit judgment value set in the per-drawing judgment table is set to all the values in the update range of the random number for judgment per normal symbol. As 100% winning probability of the handle, the extracted normal symbol per determining random number value is characterized in that it comprises a portion) to be hit be any value. According to such a configuration, the processing itself corresponding to the case where the extracted random number value does not indicate a predetermined value (when it is out of date) becomes unnecessary, thereby reducing the program capacity and the processing load. be able to.

  (2) A predetermined game can be performed using a game ball, and a game is played in a start area provided in the game area (for example, the first start winning opening 13, the second starting winning opening 14, or the gate 32). When a predetermined condition based on the detection of a ball is satisfied (for example, that the special symbol is not changing and not being a big hit, or that the normal symbol is not changing and the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is not being opened or closed) A game machine that is controlled to a state advantageous to the player (for example, a big hit game state based on a special symbol jackpot or an operating state of the variable winning ball device 15 based on a normal symbol hit), and the game ball does not win A variable winning device (for example, the special variable winning device 20 or the variable winning ball device 15) that can be changed between a closed state and an open state where the game ball is easy to win, and a game in the start area. Specific data setting means for setting specific data (for example, a big hit flag or a normal hit flag) for opening the variable winning device based on the detection of the ball (for example, starting in the game control microcomputer 560) A part for executing a process for setting a jackpot flag in accordance with the occurrence of a winning (a process related to a special symbol corresponding to step S1514 in the first embodiment), or a process for setting a flag for a normal prize according to the passage of a gate ( A portion that executes step S124A) in the third embodiment) and a variable display device that can execute variable display of a plurality of types of identification information (for example, special symbols or normal symbols) that can identify each of them (for example, Special symbol display 8a, 8b or normal symbol display 10) and a game ball is detected in the starting area Based on this, variable display control means for starting the variable display of the identification information and deriving and displaying the display result on the variable display device (for example, in the game control microcomputer 560, the steps S27 and S35 in the first embodiment) A player who executes a similar process or a part which executes a process similar to steps S28 and S36) and the specific data is set, and the display result is derived and displayed on the variable display device. As an advantageous state for the player, the variable winning device is opened (for example, a big hit game state in which the special variable winning device 20 is repeatedly opened and closed, or an operating state of the variable winning ball device 15 in which the variable winning ball device 15 opens and closes). Controllable opening / closing control means (for example, in the production control microcomputer 100, the first embodiment A portion that executes the same processing as steps S304 to S307 based on the determination of Y in the same processing as in step S1303, or a portion that executes step S104 based on Y in step S153 in the third embodiment. The opening / closing control means includes a special opening control means (for example, a game control micro) that executes special opening control for controlling the variable prize-winning device to an open state by always setting the specific data to the specific data setting means. In computer 560, a part for executing a process (a process related to a special symbol corresponding to step S113A) for storing a jackpot designated value that is a basis for setting a jackpot flag in a storage area corresponding to the number of stored reserves based on the occurrence of the start winning prize , Or save corresponding to gate passing memory number based on gate passing Characterized in that it comprises processing for storing the Prussian view per specified value as the basis for a set of Prussian view per flag portion (steps S113A)) to pass. According to such a configuration, since the random number itself becomes unnecessary, the processing necessary for performing the jackpot determination using the random number (for example, random number update processing, jackpot determination processing, etc.) and the processing are executed. Data (for example, a determination table, a counter, etc.) are also unnecessary, and the program capacity and processing load can be reduced.

  (3) A predetermined game can be played using a game ball, and a game is played in a start area provided in the game area (for example, the first start winning opening 13, the second starting winning opening 14, or the gate 32). When a predetermined condition based on the detection of a ball is satisfied (for example, that the special symbol is not changing and not being a big hit, or that the normal symbol is not changing and the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is not being opened or closed) The game machine is controlled to a state advantageous to the player (for example, a big hit game state based on a special symbol big hit or an open state of the variable winning ball apparatus 15 based on a normal symbol hit), and the game ball does not win A variable winning device (for example, the special variable winning device 20 or the variable winning ball device 15) that can be changed between a closed state and an open state in which a game ball is easy to win, A variable display device (for example, special symbol display 8a, 8b or normal symbol display 10) capable of performing variable display of the type of identification information (for example, special symbol or normal symbol), and a game ball in the starting area Based on the detection, variable display control means for starting the variable display of the identification information on the variable display device and deriving and displaying the display result (for example, in the game control microcomputer 560, step S27 in the first embodiment). , A part that executes the same process as S35, or a part that executes the same process as steps S28 and S36), and a variable winning device that is advantageous to the player after the display result is displayed on the variable display device. An open state (for example, a big hit gaming state in which the special variable winning device 20 is repeatedly opened and closed, or the variable winning ball device 15 is Step S304 in the first embodiment after opening and closing control means that can be controlled by the variable winning ball apparatus 15 that performs the closing operation (for example, the gaming control microcomputer 560 derives and displays the special symbol stop symbol). The part that executes the same process as in S307, or the part that executes the process of step S104 after deriving and displaying the stop symbol of the normal symbol), and the open / close control means derive the display result of the variable display of the identification information Special opening control means for executing a special opening control for controlling the variable winning device to the open state based on the displayed information (for example, in the game control microcomputer 560, the big hit determination based on the start winning (first implementation) Processing similar to step S1513 in the form) and check of the big hit flag (in the first embodiment) (Similar to step S1303), the process of steps S304 to S307 is always executed, or the hit determination based on the passage of the gate (step S125 in the third embodiment) and the normal hit flag It includes a check (step S153 in the third embodiment) without performing the process (see FIG. 151), which always executes step S104). According to such a configuration, since the random number itself becomes unnecessary, the processing necessary for performing the jackpot determination using the random number (for example, random number update processing, jackpot determination processing, etc.) and the processing are executed. Data (for example, a determination table, a counter, etc.) are also unnecessary, and the program capacity and processing load can be reduced.

  The present invention includes a variable display device that variably displays a plurality of types of identification information that can be identified based on the fact that the variable display start condition is satisfied after the start condition is satisfied, and the variable information display result of the identification information is The present invention can be suitably applied to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine that controls to a specific gaming state advantageous to the player after a predetermined specific display result is obtained.

It is the front view which looked at the pachinko game machine from the front. It is a block diagram which shows an example of the circuit structure in a main board | substrate (game control board). It is a block diagram which shows the circuit structural example of a relay board | substrate, an effect control board | substrate, a lamp driver board | substrate, and an audio | voice output board | substrate. It is a block diagram which shows the circuit structure of a drawing processor. It is explanatory drawing which shows the pseudo | simulation continuous chance eyes, the development chance eyes, and the chances of surprise. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of an effect control command. It is explanatory drawing which illustrates the random number value counted by the side of a main board | substrate. It is a figure which illustrates a fluctuation pattern. It is a figure which illustrates a fluctuation pattern. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a special figure display result determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a big hit classification determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the variation pattern classification determination table for jackpots. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the variation pattern classification determination table for jackpots. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the variation pattern classification determination table for small hits. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a reach determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the reach generation probability at the time of determining not to make it a big hit and a small hit. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the variation pattern classification determination table for reach. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the variation pattern classification determination table for non-reach. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a hit fluctuation pattern determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a hit fluctuation pattern determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a loss fluctuation pattern determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a loss fluctuation pattern determination table. It is explanatory drawing which illustrates the random number value counted by the side of an effect control board. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the final stop symbol determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a left-right output determination table. It is a figure which shows the non-reach combination which does not become a final stop symbol. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the final stop symbol determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the final stop symbol determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a specific production pattern determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a promotion effect execution determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a temporary stop symbol determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a temporary stop symbol determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the temporary stop symbol in a pseudo | simulation continuous change. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a temporary stop symbol determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a temporary stop symbol determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a notice pattern classification determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a notice pattern determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a notice pattern determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a notice pattern determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a control pattern table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a control pattern table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the data holding area for production control. It is a flowchart which shows the main process which the microcomputer for game control performs. It is a flowchart which shows the main process which the microcomputer for game control performs. It is a flowchart which shows a timer interruption process. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example of a plurality of types of decorative symbols that are variably displayed on each of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” variable display portions on the display screen of the image display device 9. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the program of a special symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows a starting port switch passage process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structural example of a pending | holding storage specific information storage area (holding specific area) and a pending | holding buffer. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structural example of the common pending | holding memory number buffer with which a 1st pending memory number and a 2nd pending memory number are provided in common. It is a flowchart which shows a special symbol normal process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of a setting of the number of times of large winning a prize opening | release opening. It is a flowchart which shows a fluctuation pattern setting process. It is a flowchart which shows a special symbol fluctuation | variation process. It is a flowchart which shows a special symbol fluctuation | variation stop process. It is a flowchart which shows a big hit end process. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of a customer waiting demonstration production. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the usage method of a frame buffer. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the usage method of VRAM. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the address map of a frame memory. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the method of expansion | deployment of the image data from CGROM to a frame memory. It is explanatory drawing which shows the data bus in the CG bus between the drawing control part and CGROM in a drawing processor. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating an example of each register in a drawing control register. It is a block diagram which shows the actual wiring diagram of the data bus in the CG bus between the drawing control part and CGROM in a drawing processor. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the image data of the design symbol memorize | stored in CGROM. It is explanatory drawing which shows the data structure of moving image data among the image data of the components image memorize | stored in CGROM. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the method of decoding the moving image data (compressed data) by which the moving image expansion part compressed the data. It is a flowchart which shows the main process which the microcomputer for production control performs. It is a flowchart which shows production control process processing. It is a flowchart which shows a decoration design change start process. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a non-reach symbol determination process. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a reach design determination process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a specific production | presentation setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a change promotion effect setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a notice effect setting process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structural example of a process table. It is a flowchart which shows a decoration design change stop process. It is a flowchart which shows a big hit display process. It is a flowchart which shows processing during a big hit game. It is a flowchart which shows a big hit end effect process. It is a figure which shows the example of a display operation during the variable display of a decoration design. It is a figure which shows the example of a display operation during the variable display of a decoration design. It is a figure which shows the example of a display operation during the variable display of a decoration design. It is a figure which shows the example of a display operation during the variable display of a decoration design. It is a figure which shows the example of a display operation during the variable display of a decoration design. It is a figure which shows the example of a display operation during the variable display of a decoration design. It is a figure which shows the example of a display operation during the variable display of a decoration design. It is a figure which shows the example of a display operation during the variable display of a decoration design. It is a flowchart which shows V blank interruption processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of the data table stored in ROM. It is a flowchart which shows an initial data transfer process. It is a flowchart which shows a fixed area | region data transfer control process. It is a flowchart which shows the process which a drawing processor transfers image data from CGROM to the fixed area | region of VRAM according to the command from CPU for production control. It is a flowchart which shows a data transfer process. 10 is a flowchart showing a modification of processing in which the drawing processor transfers image data from the CGROM to a fixed area of the VRAM in response to a command from the CPU for effect control. It is a flowchart which shows production mode # 1 data transfer control processing. It is a flowchart which shows the process in which a drawing processor transfers image data from the selection image data area of CGROM to VRAM according to the command from CPU for production control. 10 is a flowchart illustrating a modification of processing in which a drawing processor transfers image data from a selected image data area of a CGROM to a VRAM in response to a command from an effect control CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the drawing control processing in V blank interruption processing. It is a flowchart which shows the process which a drawing processor transfers image data from the fixed area | region of VRAM to a frame memory according to the command from CPU for production control. It is a flowchart which shows the process which a drawing processor transfers image data from CGROM to a frame memory according to the command from CPU for production control. It is a flowchart which shows the moving image decoding process which a drawing processor transfers the image data of a moving image from CGROM to a frame memory according to the command from CPU for production control. It is a flowchart which shows the moving image decoding process which a drawing processor transfers the image data of a moving image from CGROM to a frame memory according to the command from CPU for production control. It is a flowchart which shows a customer waiting demonstration control process. It is a flowchart which shows the big hit display process in the case of performing a moving image display. It is explanatory drawing which shows the data bus in the CG bus between the drawing control part and CGROM in a drawing processor. It is a flowchart which shows the starting port switch passage process at the time of making into a common routine. It is the front view which looked at the pachinko game machine in a 2nd embodiment from the front. It is the front view which looked at the variable winning ball apparatus provided in the game board from the front. It is the front view which looked at the variable winning ball apparatus provided in the game board from the front. It is a perspective view which shows the structure which has the passage opening of the game ball provided in the back surface side of the open door. It is a perspective view which shows the path | route from a passage opening to the specific winning opening which forms a specific area. It is a perspective view which shows the path | route from a passage opening to the specific winning opening which forms a specific area. It is the top view which looked at the lower part of the variable winning ball apparatus from the upper side, and the front view seen from the front side. It is the top view which looked at the lower part of the variable winning ball apparatus from the upper side, and the front view seen from the front side. It is the top view which looked at the lower part of the variable winning ball apparatus from the upper side. It is the top view which looked at the rotary body from the upper side. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of how to advance the game of the gaming machine in the second embodiment. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the change of a special symbol and a decoration symbol, and the start of a small hit game. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the change of a special symbol and a decoration symbol, the start of a small hit game, and the start of a big hit game. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of an image display, such as a post-change effect in an image display apparatus. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the stop symbol of a special symbol, and the type of winning. It is a block diagram which shows an example of the circuit structure in the main board | substrate (game control board) in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the program of the special symbol process process in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows processing for opening an accessory. It is a flowchart which shows a process during an accessory release. It is a flowchart which shows a rotary body and a movable part control. It is a timing diagram which shows the operation example of the rotary body and movable part in one opening | release of an accessory. It is a flowchart which shows a post-completion process. It is a flowchart which shows the big prize opening pre-processing in 2nd Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows the round which open | releases the 1st big winning opening in a 2nd big hit game state. It is a flowchart which shows the special winning opening open process in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the special winning opening open process in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the process after closing of the big prize opening in 2nd Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of the opening and closing timing of an accessory, and the stop timing of the rotary body after an accessory close. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of the special figure display result determination table in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the normal symbol process process in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the normal symbol normal process in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the universal hit determination process in 3rd Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of the common figure determination table. It is a flowchart which shows a normal symbol fluctuation pattern setting process. It is a flowchart which shows a normal symbol fluctuation | variation process. It is a flowchart which shows a normal symbol stop process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of the table which sets the open pattern of a normal electric accessory. It is a flowchart which shows a normal electric accessory operating process. It is a flowchart which shows the modification of the normal symbol process process in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the modification of the common figure determination process in 3rd Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows the other example of a common figure hit determination table. It is a flowchart which shows the other modification of the normal symbol process process in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the other modification of the normal symbol normal process in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the further another modification of the normal symbol stop process in 3rd Embodiment. FIG. 159 is an explanatory diagram showing a difference in processing between the modification example shown in FIGS.

Explanation of symbols

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1 Pachinko machine 8a 1st special symbol display device 8b 2nd special symbol display device 9 Image display device 13 1st starting winning port 14 2nd starting winning port 31 Game control board (main board)
56 CPU
83 CGROM
84 VRAM
85 frame buffer 87 display signal control unit 89 moving image expansion unit 91 drawing control unit 94 data transfer circuit 95 drawing control register 560 game control microcomputer 80 effect control board 100 effect control microcomputer 101 effect control CPU
109 Drawing processor 503 Random number circuit

Claims (5)

The first variable display device and the second variable display device for starting the variable display of the identification information based on the fact that the predetermined variable display execution condition is satisfied and deriving and displaying the display result are provided. A gaming machine that shifts to a specific gaming state advantageous for a player when a specific display result is derived and displayed on either the variable display device or the second variable display device,
Image display for performing variable display of a plurality of types of presentation identification information corresponding to variable display of identification information in the first variable display device and variable display of identification information in the second variable display device as a production component Equipment,
Effect control means for controlling effect display including variable display of the effect identification information in the image display device;
Image data storage means for storing a plurality of pieces of image data including image data of a plurality of types of identification information for presentation;
The image data stored in the image data storage means is connected to the image data storage means through a data bus so as to be readable, and stored in the image data storage means in response to a command from the effect control means. Image processing means for performing processing for displaying an image on the image display device based on image data;
The image processing means reads the image data from the image data storage means in a state where the bus width of the data bus is set to a predetermined bus width, and sets the bus width of the data bus to the predetermined bus width when a predetermined condition is satisfied. A gaming machine, wherein the image data is read from the image data storage means after changing to a specific bus width different from the bus width. Game control means for controlling the progress of the game and controlling the variable display of the first variable display device and the second variable display device,
The game control means includes
First counting means for counting the number of execution conditions of variable display in the first variable display device;
Second counting means for counting the number of execution conditions of variable display in the second variable display device;
On the condition that variable display of identification information is not executed at least on the second variable display device, variable display of identification information is executed on the first variable display device, and variable identification information on at least the first variable display device. Variable display executing means for executing variable display of identification information on the second variable display device on the condition that display is not executed,
When the display result is derived and displayed on the first variable display device, or when the display result is derived and displayed on the second variable display device, the variable display execution means calculates the number of establishments counted by the first counting means. When the number of established values counted by the second counting means is 1 or more, the variable display of the identification information on the first variable display device or the variable display of the identification information on the second variable display device is performed. The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein variable display of any one of the identification information is performed with priority. The game control means
First counting means for counting the number of established variable display execution conditions in the first variable display device;
Second counting means for counting the number of established variable display execution conditions in the second variable display device;
Variable display time determining means for determining a variable display time of identification information in the first variable display device and the second variable display device;
When the total number corresponding to the sum of the number of establishments counted by the first counting means and the number of establishments counted by the second counting means is equal to or greater than a predetermined number, the variable display time determination means The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the variable display time is shortened compared to when the number is less than the predetermined number. The game control means
First counting means for counting the number of established variable display execution conditions in the first variable display device;
Second counting means for counting the number of established variable display execution conditions in the second variable display device;
Pre-decision means for deciding whether or not the display result derived and displayed on the first variable display device and the second variable display device is a specific display result before the display result is derived;
Reach effect determining means for determining whether or not to execute reach effect in variable display of the effect identification information in the image display device when it is determined not to be the specific display result by the prior determination means,
When the total number of establishments counted by the first counting unit and the establishment number counted by the second counting unit is large, the reach effect determining unit determines the number of establishments counted by the first counting unit. The gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 3, wherein the game machine is determined to execute the reach effect at a smaller rate than when the total number of the established numbers counted by the second counting means is small. . The image data storage means stores image data including moving image data in a compressed state,
The image processing means determines that a predetermined condition is satisfied when the moving image data is read from the image data storage means, and changes the bus width of the data bus from the predetermined bus width to the specific bus width to change the moving image data The gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 4, wherein the game data is read from the image data storage means.

Images